advertisement
User’s/Programmer’s Reference
Volume 1
Core Spectrum Analyzer Functions
ESA Series Spectrum Analyzers
Refer to Volume 2 for one-button power measurements information.
This manual provides documentation for the following instruments:
Agilent Technologies ESA-E Series
E4401B (9 kHz- 1.5 GHz)
E4402B (9 kHz - 3.0 GHz)
E4404B (9 kHz - 6.7 GHz)
E4405B (9 kHz - 13.2 GHz)
E4407B (9 kHz - 26.5 GHz)
Agilent Technologies ESA-L Series
E4411B (9 kHz- 1.5 GHz)
E4403B (9 kHz - 3.0 GHz)
E4408B (9 kHz - 26.5 GHz)
Manufacturing Part Number: E4401-90507
Supersedes: E4401-90448
Printed in USA
December 2006
© Copyright 1999-2006 Agilent Technologies
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Agilent
Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
2
Safety Information
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual.
Familiarize yourself with the symbols and their meaning before operating this instrument.
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Note calls out special information for the user’s attention. It provides operational information or additional instructions of which the user should be aware.
The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation.
This symbol is used to mark the on position of the power line switch.
This symbol is used to mark the standby position of the power line switch.
This symbol indicates that the input power required is
AC.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective earth ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall be inserted only in a socket outlet provided with a protected earth contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified personnel. To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers.
If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided by the equipment could be impaired. This product must be used in a normal condition (in which all means for protection are intact) only.
Always use the three-prong AC power cord supplied with this product.
Failure to ensure adequate grounding may cause product damage.
NOTE
Where to Find the Latest Information
Documentation is updated periodically. For the latest information about
Agilent Technologies ESA Spectrum Analyzers, including firmware upgrades and application information, please visit the following
Internet URL: http://www.agilent.com/find/esa
Microsoft
® is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
Bluetooth
™ is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used under license.
If the ESA Spectrum Analyzer experiences a rapid “power down / power up” sequence, the analyzer may not have fully powered down. If this occurs, Agilent recommends that you power down the analyzer (using the front-panel power switch) for approximately 10 seconds, then turn the power back on. This will allow the hardware to turn on in the correct state.
3
4
Contents
→ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5
Contents
Using an Option Mode: Minimize the number of GPIB transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions . . . 198
STATus:OPERation Condition and Event Enable Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
6
Contents
Questionable Status Power Condition and Event Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Questionable Status Frequency Condition and Event Enable Registers . . . . . . . . 221
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Questionable Status Calibration Condition and Event Enable Registers . . . . . . . . 226
Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition and Event Enable Registers227
Questionable Status Integrity Event Condition and Enable Registers . . . . . . . . . . 230
7
Contents
8
Contents
Query the Internal or External Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
9
Contents
10
Contents
Load a Limit Line from Memory to the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Merge Additional Values into the Existing Amplitude Correction Data . . . . . . . . 314
11
Contents
12
Contents
13
Contents
14
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Contents
15
Contents
16
List of Commands
17
List of Commands
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA:MERGe <x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>{,<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>} . . . 247
18
List of Commands
19
List of Commands
20
List of Commands
21
List of Commands
22
List of Commands
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]ASCii|INTeger,32|REAL,32|
:INSTrument[:SELect] ‘SA’|‘GSM’|‘CDMA’|‘PNOISE’|‘BLUETOOTH’|‘EDGE’|‘MAN’|‘LINK’|‘CATV’|‘NFIG
23
List of Commands
24
List of Commands
25
List of Commands
26
List of Commands
27
List of Commands
28
List of Commands
29
List of Commands
30
List of Commands
31
List of Commands
32
List of Commands
33
List of Commands
34
1
Using This Document
35
Using This Document
What is in This Book
What is in This Book
There are many terms used throughout this book, for example “active function block,” that are explained in detail in the Getting Started guide. It is recommended that you review the Getting Started guide first.
NOTE
The front- and rear-panel features, along with the numeric keypad and alpha-numeric softkey fundamentals are described in your Getting Started guide.
Book Organization:
- provides information about the
front-panel and lower-level key functions of your analyzer. This information is organized alphabetically by the front-panel key name.
Volume 2 includes the front panel key reference information for all the functions associated with the one-button measurements available when you press the front-panel
MEASURE
key. It also describes all the setup keys associated with each measurement.
- provides information on SCPI,
C programming language basics, and on using GPIB and RS-232.
- contains a comprehensive description of status registers explaining what status registers are and how to use them to programatically monitor instrument operation.
Commands for Programmable Instruments) programming commands for the spectrum analyzer. Volume 2 includes the SCPI command information for all the functions associated with the one-button measurements available when you press the front-panel
MEASURE
key. It also describes all the setup commands associated with each measurement.
- illustrates the menu structure of the front-panel
and lower-level keys. Refer to this chapter to identify the lower-level softkeys associated with the front-panel keys. Volume 2 includes the front panel key reference information for all the functions associated with the one-button measurements available when you press the front-panel
MEASURE
key and It also describes all the setup keys associated with each measurement.
“One-Button Measurement Functions”- are described in Volume
2 of the user/programmer guide. These measurements are selected from those available when you press the front-panel
MEASURE
key, with the default
Spectrum Analysis
Mode selected. Volume 2 provides
36 Chapter 1
Using This Document
What is in This Book
menu maps, key descriptions, and programming commands for the one-button measurements and all of their associated setup keys and commands.
Chapter 1 37
Using This Document
What is in This Book
38 Chapter 1
2
Front-Panel Key Reference
The front-panel keys in this chapter are listed alphabetically. The lower-level menu keys are arranged as they appear in your analyzer menus. Volume 2 describes all the front-panel key information for the measurements that are available when you press the
MEASURE
key and all their associated setup keys.
39
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Ref Level
Attenuation
Auto Man
CAUTION
Scale/Div
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Activates the reference level function and accesses the amplitude menu keys. Amplitude menu keys allow you to set functions that affect the way data on the vertical axis is displayed or corrected.
Allows the reference level to be changed. This function is activated when
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
is pressed. The reference level is the amplitude power or voltage represented by the top graticule on the display. Changing the value of the reference level changes the absolute amplitude level (in the selected amplitude units) of the top graticule line. The reference level can be changed using the step keys, the knob, or the numeric keypad. Pressing any digit (0 through 9) on the numeric keypad brings up the terminator menu.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
Sets the input attenuation to manual or automatic and allows you to set the attenuation level in 5 dB increments when
Attenuation (Man)
is selected. The analyzer input attenuator, which is normally coupled to the reference level control, reduces the power level of the analyzer input signal at the input mixer. The attenuator is recoupled when
Attenuation
(Auto)
is selected. Attenuation can be changed using the step keys, the knob, or the numeric keypad. To select 0 dB, the numeric keypad must be used (except for E4401B or E4411B.)
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
To prevent damage to the input mixer, do not exceed a power level of
+30 dBm at the input. To prevent signal compression, keep the power at the input mixer below 0 dBm. With the attenuator set to Auto, a signal at or below the reference level will result in a mixer level at or below the
Max Mixer Lvl
.
Sets the logarithmic units per vertical graticule division on the display.
The
Scale/Div
function is only available when the
Scale Type
key is set to
Log
. Scale/Div values may range from 0.1 to 20 dB per division With
FM Demod (Option BAA) installed and
Demod View (On)
selected, the range is 1 kHz to 240 kHz/div. With Bluetooth™ FM Demodulation
(Option 106) installed and
Demod View (On)
selected, the scale/division is fixed at approximately 40 kHz/division.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
40 Chapter 2
Scale Type
Log Lin
Presel Center
Presel Adjust
Y Axis Units
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Scales the vertical graticule divisions in logarithmic units when
Log
is underlined. Logarithmic units may range from 0.1 to 20 dB per division. When
Lin
is underlined, the vertical divisions are linearly scaled and the default amplitude units are volts. The top of the display is set to the reference-level value and the bottom graticule becomes zero volts. (Each division of the graticule is one-tenth of the reference level in volts.) Pressing
Scale Type
always sets the units specified for the current amplitude scale. When
Power On
is set to
Preset
and
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
, pressing
Preset
or powering on the analyzer sets the default units. The fastest sweep time available when
Lin
is selected and the detector is set to average (
Det/Demod
,
Detector
,
Average
) is 8 milliseconds.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
Agilent E4404B, E4405B, E4407B and E4408B only. Adjusts the frequency of the preselector filter (above 2.85 GHz) to optimize the amplitude accuracy at the active marker frequency. With
Input Mixer
(Ext)
selected and the Mixer Type set to Presel (preselected),
Presel
Center
adjusts the frequency of the external preselector filter to maximize the amplitude at the active marker frequency. If activated in a non-preselected band,
Presel Center
does nothing.
Preselector center should be used to improve amplitude accuracy for signals which fall into any one of the harmonic mixing bands. The harmonic mixing bands Frequency Ranges are:
Band
1
2
3
4
Frequency Range
2.85 - 6.7 GHz
6.2 - 13.2 GHz
12.8 - 19.2 GHz
18.7 - 26.5 GHz
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
Agilent E4404B, E4405B, E4407B and E4408B only. Allows manual adjustment of the preselector frequency to optimize its response on the signal of interest.
By changing the
Presel Adjust
, the center of the preselector filter can be moved in frequency. The signal of interest will appear to change in amplitude with the frequency response of the preselector filter.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
Accesses the menu keys that change the amplitude units. Amplitude units are maintained for both logarithmic and linear modes. The amplitude units can be changed by pressing
dBm
,
dBmV
,
dB
µV
,
dB
µA,
Watts
,
Volts
, and
Amps
. This key is unavailable when
FM Demod
and
Chapter 2 41
Ref Lvl Offst
Int Preamp
On Off
Corrections
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Demod View
are on.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
Adds an offset value to the displayed reference level. Reference-level offsets are only entered by using the numeric keypad. Entering an offset does not affect the trace or the attenuation value. Reference-level offsets are used when gain or loss occurs between a device under test and the analyzer input. Thus, the signal level measured by the analyzer may be referred to as the level at the input of an external amplitude-conversion device. When an amplitude offset is entered, its value appears on the left side of the display under Offst (as opposed to frequency offsets which appear at the bottom of the display). To eliminate an offset, press
Ref Lvl Offst
,
0
,
dB
. When
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
, pressing
Preset
also sets the offset to zero. See also the
key description.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
Agilent ESA-E Series only (E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B and
E4407B) with Option 1DS. Turns the internal preamp on and off.
Pressing
Int Preamp (On)
results in a correction being applied to compensate for the gain of the preamp so that amplitude readings show the value at the input connector. When the preamp is on, a PA indication appears on the left side of the display. The preamp is switched off in frequency bands above 3 GHz and the correction is not applied. In this case, the PA indication will still appear even though the preamp is not activated.
The preamp is specified to operate over a 1 MHz to 3 GHz range for the
E4402B, E4404B, E4405B and E4407B. The preamp range for the
E4401B is 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz, except for Option 1DP, which is 1 MHz to 1.5 GHz.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
Accesses the
Corrections
menu keys which allow you to enable the corrections function and to select which set of correction factors you wish to modify.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
Apply Corrections
Yes No
Pressing
Apply Corrections (Yes)
turns on the amplitude-correction factors. Corrections will only be applied to the sets of correction factors whose correction state is set to On. To turn a set of correction factors on, use the
Correction On Off
key in the Antenna, Cable,
Other, or User menus. When
Apply Corrections (Yes)
is selected, an A will appear on the screen annotation whether or not a correction set has been turned on using the
Correction (On)
key in the Antenna, Cable,
42 Chapter 2
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Antenna
Other, or User menus.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
Accesses the Antenna menu of keys which allow you to correct for antenna loss, but may be used for any kind of correction.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
Correction On Off
Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the selected set.
The corrections state must be set to On for the correction to be applied.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
,
Antenna
Antenna, Cable, and Other correction factors are generally entered as positive values. This indicates a loss in the external device. User correction factors are typically entered as negative values which indicate a gain in the external device.
Edit
Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and edit an amplitude-correction factor set. It puts the analyzer into a split-screen mode where the correction data is displayed in a table under the trace data. Pressing
ESC
while in this menu will exit the menu and remove the table from the screen. New points will be applied only after the editor is closed. The Tab keys are very useful for navigation between rows in the corrections table.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Antenna
Point
Allows you to create or edit an amplitude-correction factor data point.
Up to 200 points may be defined for each set. Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the numeric keypad, then press
Enter
, or use the knob, tab, or step keys to move to an existing point. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors. After selecting a point,
Frequency
becomes active.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Chapter 2 43
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Corrections
,
Antenna
,
Edit
Frequency
Allows you to enter the frequency value for an amplitude-correction point.
Enter the frequency value by using the numeric keypad. Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors.
After selecting a point,
Amplitude
becomes active.
A frequency coordinate must always be specified for amplitude-correction factors.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Antenna
,
Edit
The amplitude correction entered for the lowest frequency will be applied to all frequencies less than the lowest frequency entered.
Similarly, the amplitude correction for the highest frequency entered will be applied to all frequencies greater than the highest frequency entered.
For amplitude-correction factors, a maximum of two entries with the same frequency are valid. Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used; any middle points are ignored.
Amplitude-correction data is sorted in the table by frequency. The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front-panel.
Amplitude
Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current amplitude-correction point. After selecting a point, the point number automatically increments and
Frequency
becomes active to allow entry of the frequency of the next point. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Antenna
,
Edit
Delete Point
Allows you to delete the
44 Chapter 2
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Cable
amplitude-correction data for the currently selected point. The prompt If you are sure, press key again to delete
will appear on the display.
Pressing
Delete Point
again will delete the point and adjust all of the point numbers as appropriate.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Antenna
,
Edit
Delete Correction
Allows you to clear all data from the selected amplitude-correction set. The prompt If you are sure, press key again to delete
will appear on the display. Pressing
Delete
again will delete the correction set.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
,
Antenna
Allows you to correct for cable loss, but may be used for any kind of correction.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
Correction On Off
Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the selected set.
The corrections state must be set to On for the correction to be applied.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
,
Cable
Antenna, Cable, and Other correction factors are generally entered as positive values. This indicates a loss in the external device. User correction factors are typically entered as negative values which indicate a gain in the external device.
Edit
Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and edit an amplitude-correction factor set. It puts the analyzer into a split-screen mode where the correction data is displayed in a table under the trace data. Pressing
ESC
while in this menu will exit the menu and remove the table from the screen. New points will be applied only after the editor is closed. The Tab keys are very useful for navigation between rows in the corrections table.
Chapter 2 45
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Cable
Point
Allows you to create or edit an amplitude-correction factor data point.
Up to 200 points may be defined for each set. Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the numeric keypad, then press
Enter
, or use the knob, tab, or step keys to move to an existing point. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors. After selecting a point,
Frequency
becomes active.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Cable
,
Edit
Frequency
Allows you to enter the frequency value for an amplitude-correction point.
Enter the frequency value by using the numeric keypad. Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors.
After selecting a point,
Amplitude
becomes active.
A frequency coordinate must always be specified for amplitude-correction factors.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Cable
,
Edit
The amplitude correction entered for the lowest frequency will be applied to all frequencies less than the lowest frequency entered.
Similarly, the amplitude correction for the highest frequency entered will be applied to all frequencies greater than the highest frequency entered.
For amplitude-correction factors, a maximum of two entries with the same frequency are valid. Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used; any middle points are ignored.
Amplitude-correction data is sorted in the table by frequency. The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front-panel.
46 Chapter 2
Other
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Amplitude
Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current amplitude-correction point. After selecting a point, the point number automatically increments and
Frequency
becomes active to allow entry of the frequency of the next point. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Cable
,
Edit
Delete Point
Allows you to delete the amplitude-correction data for the currently selected point. The prompt If you are sure, press key again to delete
will appear on the display.
Pressing
Delete Point
again will delete the point and adjust all of the point numbers as appropriate.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Cable
,
Edit
Delete Correction
Allows you to clear all data from the selected amplitude-correction set. The prompt If you are sure, press key again to delete
will appear on the display. Pressing
Delete
again will delete the correction set.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
,
Cable
Allows you to correct for gain or loss other than for antenna, cable, or user.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
Correction On Off
Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the selected set.
The corrections state must be set to On for the correction to be applied.
Key Access: Amplitude Y Scale, More,
Corrections, Other
Chapter 2 47
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Antenna, Cable, and Other correction factors are generally entered as positive values. This indicates a loss in the external device. User correction factors are typically entered as negative values which indicate a gain in the external device.
Edit
Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and edit an amplitude-correction factor set. It puts the analyzer into a split-screen mode where the correction data is displayed in a table under the trace data. Pressing
ESC
while in this menu will exit the menu and remove the table from the screen. New points will be applied only after the editor is closed. The Tab keys are very useful for navigation between rows in the corrections table.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Other
Point
Allows you to create or edit an amplitude-correction factor data point.
Up to 200 points may be defined for each set. Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the numeric keypad, then press
Enter
, or use the knob, tab, or step keys to move to an existing point. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors. After selecting a point,
Frequency
becomes active.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Other
,
Edit
Frequency
Allows you to enter the frequency value for an amplitude-correction point.
Enter the frequency value by using the numeric keypad. Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors.
After selecting a point,
Amplitude
becomes active.
A frequency coordinate must always be specified for amplitude-correction factors.
48 Chapter 2
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Other
,
Edit
The amplitude correction entered for the lowest frequency will be applied to all frequencies less than the lowest frequency entered.
Similarly, the amplitude correction for the highest frequency entered will be applied to all frequencies greater than the highest frequency entered.
For amplitude-correction factors, a maximum of two entries with the same frequency are valid. Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used; any middle points are ignored.
Amplitude-correction data is sorted in the table by frequency. The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front-panel.
Amplitude
Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current amplitude-correction point. After selecting a point, the point number automatically increments and
Frequency
becomes active to allow entry of the frequency of the next point. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Other
,
Edit
Delete Point
Allows you to delete the amplitude-correction data for the currently selected point. The prompt If you are sure, press key again to delete
will appear on the display.
Pressing
Delete Point
again will delete the point and adjust all of the point numbers as appropriate.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
Other
,
Edit
Delete Correction
Allows you to clear all data from the selected amplitude-correction set. The prompt If you are sure, press key again to delete
will appear on the display. Pressing
Delete
again will delete the correction set.
Chapter 2 49
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
User
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
,
Other
Allows you to correct for gain or loss and may be used for any type of correction.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
Correction On Off
Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the selected set.
The corrections state must be set to On for the correction to be applied.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE / Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
,
User
Antenna, Cable, and Other correction factors are generally entered as positive values. This indicates a loss in the external device. User correction factors are typically entered as negative values which indicate a gain in the external device.
Edit
Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and edit an amplitude-correction factor set. It puts the analyzer into a split-screen mode where the correction data is displayed in a table under the trace data. Pressing
ESC
while in this menu will exit the menu and remove the table from the screen. New points will be applied only after the editor is closed. The Tab keys are very useful for navigation between rows in the corrections table.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
User
Point
Allows you to create or edit an amplitude-correction factor data point.
Up to 200 points may be defined for each set. Enter the point number to be created or edited by using the numeric keypad, then press
Enter
, or use the knob, tab, or step keys to move to an existing point. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors. After selecting a point,
Frequency
becomes active.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
User
,
Edit
50 Chapter 2
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Frequency
Allows you to enter the frequency value for an amplitude-correction point.
Enter the frequency value by using the numeric keypad. Change the frequency value by using the step keys or the knob. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors.
After selecting a point,
Amplitude
becomes active.
A frequency coordinate must always be specified for amplitude-correction factors.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
User
,
Edit
The amplitude correction entered for the lowest frequency will be applied to all frequencies less than the lowest frequency entered.
Similarly, the amplitude correction for the highest frequency entered will be applied to all frequencies greater than the highest frequency entered.
For amplitude-correction factors, a maximum of two entries with the same frequency are valid. Only the first and last points of a series with the same frequency values are used; any middle points are ignored.
Amplitude-correction data is sorted in the table by frequency. The sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value via the front-panel.
Amplitude
Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current amplitude-correction point. After selecting a point, the point number automatically increments and
Frequency
becomes active to allow entry of the frequency of the next point. Press
Bk Sp
to correct errors.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
User
,
Edit
Chapter 2 51
Ext Amp Gain
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Delete Point
Allows you to delete the amplitude-correction data for the currently selected point. The prompt If you are sure, press key again to delete
will appear on the display.
Pressing
Delete Point
again will delete the point and adjust all of the point numbers as appropriate.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More,
Corrections
,
User
,
Edit
Delete Correction
Allows you to clear all data from the selected amplitude-correction set. The prompt If you are sure, press key again to delete
will appear on the display. Pressing
Delete
again will delete the correction set.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
,
User
Freq Interp
Log Lin
Allows you to determine how trace values are computed between points in a correction table. If the linear mode is selected, a straight line is used between points in a correction table. If the logarithmic mode is selected, frequency values between points are computed by first taking the logarithm of both table values and the intermediate value.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
,
More
Delete all Corrections
Allows you to delete all amplitude-correction sets.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
,
Corrections
,
More
Adds a positive or negative preamplifier gain value, which is subtracted from the displayed signal. (Use negative values for gain and positive values for loss.) The function is similar to the
Ref Lvl Offset
function.
With the
Ext Amp Gain
function, the attenuation may be changed depending on the preamplifier gain entered. A preamplifier gain offset is used for measurements that require an external preamplifier or long cables. The offset is subtracted from the amplitude readout so that the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the input of the preamplifier. The preamplifier gain offset is displayed at the top of the screen and is removed by entering zero. The preamplifier gain offset can only be entered using the numeric keypad. The preamplifier gain value is not affected by an instrument preset or a power cycle.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
52 Chapter 2
Max Mixer Lvl
IF Gain
Auto Fixed
Front-Panel Key Reference
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Allows you to change the maximum input mixer level from 10 dBm to
−100 dBm in 10 dB steps using the step keys, and 1 dB steps using the knob. In addition, you may use the keypad to specify a value. The mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the attenuator setting. As the reference level changes, the input attenuator setting is changed to keep the power levels of on-screen signals less than the selected level at the input mixer. When
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
, pressing
Preset
resets the maximum input mixer level to
−10 dBm.
Key Access:
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
,
More
When using digital resolution bandwidths (RBW < 1 kHz), the analyzer uses IF Gain autoranging to set the optimum signal gain for digital processing. This technique produces the maximum measurement range without overloading the digital system. To increase measurement speed, select
IF Gain (Fixed)
. This setting decreases the display range to
70 dB, so you may have to adjust the reference level to ensure complete view of the signal.
Key Access:
Amplitude
,
More
,
More
Chapter 2 53
Auto All
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Auto Couple
Auto Couple
Accesses the menus to couple functions in your analyzer. Coupled functions are functions that are linked.
Auto-couples all coupled functions. If
Auto All
is pressed all coupled functions are set to
Auto
.
This function is not available when the segmented sweep function is set to On, (
Segmented (On)
).
Coupled functions are functions that are linked. If one function is changed, the coupled function is changed. During normal operation, the sweep time, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, and center frequency step are coupled to span; the input attenuation is coupled to the reference level.
If any of these functions become uncoupled (is set to manual), a # sign appears next to the screen annotation representing the function on the screen. If one or more functions are manually set so that the amplitude or frequency becomes uncalibrated “Meas Uncal” appears on the top right side of the graticule.
To recouple the analyzer functions, the uncoupled function(s) must be individually set back to Auto. Or, you can press
Auto All
to return all of the functions to their default auto state. Pressing
Auto All
will couple the following functions:
• Sweep time will couple to the span, detector mode, resolution bandwidth, and video bandwidth.
•
Detector (Auto)
is set.
•
Avg Type (Auto)
is set.
•
PHNoise Opt (Auto)
is set.
• RF attenuation couples to reference level.
• Center frequency step size will couple to 10% of span.
• Sweep coupling (SR/SA) will couple back to SA mode.
• Source attenuation couples to source amplitude.
• Source power step couples to one vertical scale division.
Key Access:
Auto Couple
Although
Marker Count
,
Gate Time
, and
Marker Trace
have
Auto
settings, they are not affected by
Auto All
.
54 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Auto Couple
PhNoise Opt
Auto Man
Chooses the LO (local oscillator) phase noise behavior that is optimum for measurement accuracy.
Key Access: Auto Couple
Auto
Allows the analyzer to automatically select an LO phase noise behavior that is optimum for the selected span and RBW. The
Auto
rules choose
Fast Tuning
whenever the span is
>10 MHz otherwise the
Auto
rules choose
Optimize £(f)
.
Key Access:
Auto Couple, PhNoise Opt Auto Man
Optimize £(f)
Optimizes for LO phase noise.
Key Access:
Auto Couple, PhNoise Opt Auto Man
Optimize LO for Fast Tuning
The LO behavior compromises phase noise within approximately 10 MHz of the carrier. This allows rapid measurement throughput when changing the center frequency or span.
Key Access:
Auto Couple, PhNoise Opt Auto Man
Detector Auto Man
Selects a specific detector, or in
Auto
, picks the appropriate detector for a particular measurement.
When discussing detectors, it is important to understand the concept of a trace “bucket.” For every trace point displayed, there is a finite time during which the data for that point is collected. The analyzer has the ability to look at all of the data collected during that time and present a single point of trace data based on the detector mode. We call the interval during which the data for that trace point is being collected, the “bucket.” Thus a trace is more than a series of single points. It is actually a series of trace “buckets.” The data may be sampled many times within each bucket.
Selecting
Detector (Auto)
and
BW/Avg
,
Average (On)
changes the detector.
The
Auto
choice depends on marker functions, trace functions, and the trace averaging function. If a marker function or measurement is running, the
Auto
choice of detector is either
Average
or
Sample
. When one of the detectors (such as
Average
) is manually selected instead of
Auto
, that detector is used regardless of other analyzer settings.
The
Average
detector displays the average of the signal within the bucket. The averaging method depends upon
Avg Type
selection (Video or RMS). When the
Average
detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear, the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds.
The
Peak
detector displays the maximum of the signal within the bucket.
The
Sample
detector displays the instantaneous level of the signal at the time of the sampling.
Chapter 2 55
Front-Panel Key Reference
Auto Couple
The
Negative Peak
detector displays the minimum of the signal within the bucket.
Neither average nor sample detectors measure amplitudes of CW signals as accurately as peak, because they may not find a spectral component’s true peak, but they do measure noise without the biases of peak detection.
The detector in use is indicated on the left side of the display. A # will appear next to it if the detector has been manually selected.
Key Access:
Auto Couple
Auto
The system selects peak detection as the default, but if a condition arises where a different type of detection scheme provides greater accuracy, the system will use the alternate scheme. For example, when using the
Marker Noise function, Auto mode selects Average detection for Res BWs > 300 Hz and Sample for Res
BWs
≤ 300 Hz as shown in
Key Access:
Auto Couple, Detector Auto Man
56 Chapter 2
Figure 2-1 Detector (Auto) Selection Flowchart
Front-Panel Key Reference
Auto Couple
Average
Allows you to select between video and power (RMS) averaging, via the
Average Type
key.
Chapter 2 57
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Auto Couple
Average detection is used when measuring the average value of the amplitude across each trace interval
(bucket). The averaging method used by the Average detector will be set to either Video or Power as appropriate when the Average Type is Auto coupled or may be set explicitly through the
BW/Avg
,
Avg Type Auto
Man
key.
Video Average detection computes the averaged trace interval as appropriate to the Y-axis scale:
• Log-power average when in log scale.
• Voltage average when in linear scale.
• Frequency deviation when Demod View is enabled for FM Demod.
Power Average (“root mean square” or RMS) detection computes the RMS of the samples collected across the trace interval. The number of samples included in the
RMS average for each trace interval depends on the sweep time, the resolution bandwidth, and whether or not option B7D is installed. With option B7D installed, more samples are available as appropriate for wider resolution bandwidths and faster sweep times. Slower sweep times also increase the number of samples averaged for each trace interval.
When
Average
is selected, Avg appears on the left side of the display.
When the
Average
detector is selected in linear amplitude scale mode, the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds.
Peak
Sample
Key Access:
Auto Couple, Detector Auto Man
Peak detection is used primarily when measuring sinusoidal (spectral) components. Peak detection obtains the maximum video signal value between the last display point and the present display point and stores this value in memory. When
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
, peak detection is selected at power on and by pressing
Preset
. When
Peak
detection is selected, Peak appears in the upper-left corner of the display.
Key Access:
Auto Couple, Detector Auto Man
Sample detection is used primarily to display noise or noise-like signals. This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurement of non noise-like signals. In sample mode, the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed in memory. When
Sample
detection is selected, Samp
58 Chapter 2
Avg Type
Auto Man
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Auto Couple
appears in the upper-left corner of the display.
Key Access:
Auto Couple, Detector Auto Man
Negative Peak
Negative peak detection functions the same as peak detection, but selects the minimum video signal value.
This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurements of signals. When
Negative Peak
is selected, NPeak appears in the upper-left corner of the screen.
Key Access:
Auto Couple, Detector Auto Man
Accesses the functions to automatically or manually choose from one of the following averaging scales: Video or Power (RMS).
If video averaging is selected, the measurement results are the average of the signal level in the y-axis scale. If the power average (RMS) is selected, all measured results are converted into power units before averaging and filtering operations, and converted back to decibels for displaying. The main point to remember is that there can be significant differences between the average of the log of power and the log of the average power.
There are actually four types of averaging processes within a spectrum analyzer. All, except VBW filtering, are affected by this setting. They are:
• Trace averaging (see
BW/Avg
,
Average (On)
).
Averages signal amplitudes on a trace-to-trace basis. (The type of averaging (Video or Power (RMS)) is selected by pressing
BW/Avg
,
Avg Type
.)
• Average detector (see
Det/Demod
,
Detector, Average (Video/RMS)
).
Averages signal amplitudes during the time or frequency interval represented by a particular measurement point. The method is determined by selection of either Video or RMS.
• Noise Marker (see
Marker
,
Noise
)
Averages signal amplitudes across measurement points to reduce variations for noisy signals.
• VBW filtering.
Filtering the video is a form of averaging the video signal.
When trace average is on (
BW/Avg
,
Average (On)
, the Average Type is shown on the left side of the display. When
Avg Type (Auto)
is selected, the analyzer chooses the type of averaging to be used as shown in
Figure 2-2 . When one of the average types is selected manually, the
Chapter 2 59
Figure 2-2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Auto Couple
analyzer uses that type without regard to the other analyzer settings and sets
Avg Type
to
Man
.
Auto Rules for Average Type
Key Access:
Auto Couple
Video Avg
Video averaging averages the data as appropriate for the y-axis scale. When
Avg Type
,
Video Avg
is selected,
VAvg
appears on the left side of the analyzer display if
Average
is On.
Pwr Avg
Key Access:
Auto Couple
,
Avg Type
Power averaging is performed by converting the trace data from logarithmic to linear power units, and then averaging the power trace data. When
Avg Type
,
Pwr
Avg
is selected, PAvg appears on the left side of the analyzer display if
Average
is On.
Key Access:
Auto Couple
,
Avg Type
60 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Bk Sp (Backspace)
Bk Sp (Backspace)
The backspace key is located on the front panel and is used to change or correct an active function entry or a text entry before you save to a file.
Chapter 2 61
Res BW
Auto Man
NOTE
Video BW
Auto Man
Front-Panel Key Reference
BW/Avg
BW/Avg
Activates the resolution bandwidth function and accesses the menu keys that control the bandwidth functions and averaging.
Changes the 3 dB resolution bandwidth on the analyzer from 1 kHz to
5 MHz in a 1, 3, 10 sequence using the knob or step keys. If an unavailable bandwidth is entered using the numeric keypad, the closest available bandwidth in the 1, 3, 10 sequence is used. (For ESA-E Series analyses, Option 1DR provides additional 300 Hz, 200 Hz, 100 Hz,
30 Hz and 10 Hz bandwidths. For firmware revision A.08.00 and later, the bandwidth range is from 1 Hz to 5 MHz if you have both Options
1D5 and 1DR.) (For ESA-L Series analyses, Option 1DR provides additional 300 Hz, 200 Hz, and 100 Hz bandwidths.) As the resolution bandwidth is decreased, the sweep time is modified to maintain amplitude calibration. Resolution bandwidth is also related to span. As span is decreased, the resolution bandwidth is decreased. As the resolution bandwidth changes, the video bandwidth, if in auto couple mode, changes to maintain the VBW/RBW ratio.
With firmware A.08.00 and greater, in zero span, the auto/manual function of this key is not applicable. When
Res BW (Auto)
is selected in non-zero span, any changes to Res BW while in zero span will revert to the Auto value when you return to non-zero span. When
Res BW (Man)
is selected in non-zero span, any changes to Res BW while in zero span will be maintained when you return to non-zero span.
A “#” mark appears next to Res BW on the display when it is not coupled. To recouple the resolution bandwidth, press
Res BW (Auto)
(or press
Auto Couple, Auto All
). The resolution bandwidth can be changed using the step keys, the knob, or the numeric keypad.
Key Access:
BW/Avg
Changes the analyzer post-detection filter from 30 Hz to 3 MHz in a 1,
3, 10 sequence using the knob, step keys, or the numeric keypad. If an unavailable bandwidth is entered using the numeric keypad, the closest available bandwidth in the 1, 3, 10 sequence is used. (Option 1DR provides additional 1 Hz, 3 Hz and 10 Hz video bandwidths when the resolution bandwidth is
≤ 300 Hz.)
As the video bandwidth is decreased, the sweep time is increased to maintain amplitude calibration. A “#” mark appears next to VBW on the bottom of the analyzer display when it is not coupled. To couple the video bandwidth, press
Video BW (Auto)
(or press
Auto All
).
Key Access:
BW/Avg
62 Chapter 2
VBW/RBW
Auto Man
Figure 2-3
Front-Panel Key Reference
BW/Avg
Selects the ratio between the video and resolution bandwidths. If signal responses near the noise level are visually masked by the noise, the ratio can be set to less than 1 to lower the noise. The knob and step keys change the ratio in a 1, 3, 10 sequence. When
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
and
Preset
is pressed or
Auto Couple
,
Auto All
have been selected, the ratio is set to 1.000 X. The ratio can be changed using the step keys, knob, or numeric keypad. When
VBW/RBW (Auto)
is selected, the ratio is
determined by the rules in Figure 2-3
.
VBW/RBW Ratio Auto Rules
Key Access:
BW/Avg
Chapter 2 63
Average
On Off
Avg Type
Auto Man
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
BW/Avg
Initiates a digital averaging routine that averages the trace points in a number of successive sweeps resulting in trace “smoothing”. The number of sweeps (average number) can be selected. Increasing the average number will further smooth the trace. The type of averaging used is selected by pressing
BW/Avg, Avg Type
.
The average is restarted when any of the following occurs:
• a new average number is entered.
• any measurement related parameter (e.g., Center Frequency) is changed.
•
Restart
is pressed.
•
Single Sweep
is pressed.
When in Single Sweep, the specified number of averages is taken, then the sweep stops. When in continuous sweep, the specified number of averages is taken, then the averaging continues with each new sweep averaged in with a weight of
Average Number
and the old average reduced by multiplying it by
⎛
⎝
Average Number
– -----------------------------------------
Average Number
⎠
⎞
.
To turn off averaging, press
Average (Off)
. The number of sweeps can only be entered using the numeric keypad, not the knob or step keys.
Key Access:
BW/Avg
Accesses the functions to automatically or manually choose from one of the following averaging scales: Video or Power (RMS).
If video averaging is selected, the measurement results are the average of the signal level in the y-axis scale. If the power average (RMS) is selected, all measured results are converted into power units before averaging and filtering operations, and converted back to decibels for displaying. The main point to remember is that there can be significant differences between the average of the log of power and the log of the average power.
There are actually four types of averaging processes within a spectrum analyzer. All, except VBW filtering, are affected by this setting. They are:
• Trace averaging (see
BW/Avg
).
Averages signal amplitudes on a trace-to-trace basis. (Press Video or
Power (RMS) when
Avg Type (Man)
is selected.)
• Average detector (see
Detector
,
Average
).
Averages signal amplitudes during the time or frequency interval represented by a particular measurement point.
• Noise Marker (see
Marker
,
Noise
)
64 Chapter 2
EMI Res BW
Front-Panel Key Reference
BW/Avg
Averages signal amplitudes across measurement points to reduce variations for noisy signals.
• VBW filtering.
Filtering the video is a form of averaging the video signal.
When trace average is on (
BW/Avg
,
Average (On)
, the Average Type is shown on the left side of the display. When
Avg Type (Auto)
is selected, the analyzer chooses the type of averaging to be used as shown in
Figure 2-2 on page 60 . When one of the average types is selected
manually, the analyzer uses that type without regard to the other analyzer settings and sets
Avg Type
to
Man
.
Key Access:
BW/Avg
Video Avg
Video averaging averages the data as appropriate for the y-axis scale. When
Avg Type
,
Video Avg
is selected,
VAvg
appears on the left side of the analyzer display if
Average
is On.
Pwr Avg
Key Access:
BW/Avg
,
Avg Type
Power averaging is performed by converting the trace data from logarithmic to linear power units, and then averaging the power trace data. When
Avg Type
,
Pwr
Avg
is selected, PAvg appears on the left side of the analyzer display if
Average
is On.
Key Access:
BW/Avg
,
Avg Type
Accesses the
EMI Res BW
menu keys and allows you to choose between
6 dB bandwidths of
120 kHz
,
9 kHz
and
200 Hz
. The 200 Hz bandwidth is only available if Option 1DR (narrow resolution bandwidth) is installed and the span is less than 5 MHz.
This function is set to
None
when the resolution bandwidth is set to any other value using the
Resolution BW
key.
Key Access:
BW/Avg
Chapter 2 65
Front-Panel Key Reference
Det/Demod
NOTE
Det/Demod
Accesses the menu keys controlling detector functions, demodulation functions, and the speaker. FM demod is available with options 106,
BAA or AYQ installed.
The FM Demod internal circuitry must be aligned before use. Press
System
,
Alignments
,
Align Now
,
FM Demod
.
Detector Auto Man
Selects a specific detector, or uses the system to pick the appropriate detector (through
Auto
) for a particular measurement.
When discussing detectors, it is important to understand the concept of a trace “bucket.” For every trace point displayed, there is a finite time during which the data for that point is collected. The analyzer has the ability to look at all of the data collected during that time and present a single point of trace data based on the detector mode. We call the interval during which the data for that trace point is being collected, the “bucket.” Thus a trace is more than a series of single points. It is actually a series of trace “buckets.” The data may be sampled many times within each bucket.
When the detector choice is
Auto
, selecting trace averaging (
BW/Avg
,
Average (On)
) changes the detector. The
Auto
choice depends on marker functions, trace functions, and the trace averaging function. If a marker function or measurement is running, the
Auto
choice of detector is either
Average
or
Sample
. When one of the detectors (such as
Average
) is manually selected instead of
Auto
, that detector is used without regard to other analyzer settings.
• Average - displays the average of the signal within the display bucket. Set the averaging method with
Avg Type
(Video or RMS).
• Sample - displays the instantaneous level of the signal at the center of the bucket represented by each display point.
• Peak - displays the maximum of the signal within the bucket.
• Negative Peak - displays the minimum of the signal within the bucket.
Neither average nor sample detectors measure amplitudes of CW signals as accurately as peak, because they may not find a spectral component’s true peak. However, they both measure noise better without the positive bias of peak detection.
The detector in use is indicated on the left side of the display. A # will appear next to it if the detector has been manually selected.
Key Access:
Det/Demod
66 Chapter 2
NOTE
Auto
Front-Panel Key Reference
Det/Demod
The system selects peak detection as the default. If a measurement condition arises where a different type of detection scheme would be better utilized, the system will use the alternate scheme. For example, the Marker
Noise function uses Average detection when in Auto mode because the system determines that the data will be more accurate for noise-type signals. Refer to
2-1 on page 57 for more information.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, Detector Auto Man
Average
Average detection measures the average value of the amplitude across each trace interval (bucket). The averaging method will be set to either Video or Power as appropriate when the Average Type is Auto coupled, or it may be set explicitly with the
BW/Avg
,
Avg Type
Auto Man
key.
Video Average detection computes the averaged trace interval as appropriate to the Y-axis scale:
• Log-power average when in log scale.
• Voltage average when in linear scale.
• Frequency deviation when Demod View is enabled for FM Demod.
Power Average (“root mean square” or RMS) detection computes the RMS of the samples collected across the trace interval. The number of samples included in the
RMS average for each trace interval depends on the sweep time, the resolution bandwidth, and whether or not option B7D is installed. With option B7D installed, more samples are available as appropriate for wider resolution bandwidths and faster sweep times. Slower sweep times also increase the number of samples averaged for each trace interval.
When
Average
is selected, Avg appears on the left side of the display.
When the
Average
detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear, the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, Detector Auto Man
Peak
Peak detection is used primarily when measuring sinusoidal (spectral) components. Peak detection obtains the maximum video signal value between the last display point and the present display point and
Chapter 2 67
EMI Detector
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Det/Demod
Sample
stores this value in memory. Peak detection is selected at power on and by pressing
Preset
when
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
and
Power On
is set to
Preset
. When
Peak
detection is selected, Peak appears in the upper-left corner of the display.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, Detector Auto Man
Sample detection is used primarily to display noise or noise-like signals. This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurement of non noise-like signals. In sample mode, the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed in memory. When
Sample
detection is selected, Samp appears in the upper-left corner of the display.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, Detector Auto Man
Negative Peak
Negative peak detection functions the same as peak detection, but selects the minimum video signal value.
This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurements of signals. When
Negative Peak
is selected, NPk appears in the upper-left corner of the screen.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, Detector Auto Man
Selects and configures the specified type of EMI detection. Selecting either quasi-peak or EMI average runs an amplitude ranging process that affects the reference level and attenuation settings. This optimizes the available dynamic range for the measurement. It also gives you access to the View and QP/Avg Gain functions.
Key Access:
Det/Demod
The
EMI Detector
menu key only appears when the Option AYQ is installed.
Quasi Peak
The quasi-peak EMI detector weights the peak detected amplitude using specific charge, discharge, and meter time constants. The effect of this detector depends on the characteristics and repetition rate of the input signal. When the quasi-peak detector is selected, the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude display using sample detection.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, EMI Detector
EMI Average
The EMI average detector averages the peak detected amplitude. When EMI average detection is selected, the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude display using
68 Chapter 2
Demod
sample detection.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, EMI Detector
Front-Panel Key Reference
Det/Demod
Off
View
Turning EMI detectors off restores the amplitude reference level and scale type (logarithmic or linear) that was used prior to the selection of either the quasi-peak or average detector. It also turns off any special ranging and grays out the
View
and
QP/Avg Gain
keys.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, EMI Detector
Selects between peak detection and quasi-peak/EMI average detection, without changing the ranging which adjusts the reference level. This allows you to use peak detection while maintaining the current EMI measurement view/settings. This function is not available unless you have selected either
Quasi Peak
or
EMI Average
.
When Pk is selected, the peak detector is used and the quasi peak and EMI average detectors are bypassed.
When QP/Avg is selected the quasi peak or EMI average detector is used and the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude detection mode using sample detection.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, EMI Detector
QP/Avg Gain
Turns on or off the linear
×10 gain stage in the quasi-peak and average detector signal path. This stage may be enabled/disabled whenever the quasi-peak or
EMI average detector is first selected.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, EMI Detector
Range Dwell
Sets the auto-range dwell time for the EMI Detectors.
The amplitude ranging process optimizes the available dynamic range for the measurement. The dwell time is the time spent auto-ranging. You may need to set this value if you have a signal with a very low PRF (< 5Hz).
Dwell time must be > 1/PRF.
Key Access:
Det/Demod, EMI Detector
Accesses the menu keys to select
AM
demodulation,
FM
demodulation or demodulation
Off
. It also accesses the
Demod View On Off
,
Speaker On
Off,
and
Demod Time
menu keys described below.
Key Access:
Det/Demod
Chapter 2 69
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Det/Demod
The
FM
menu key only appears when the optional FM demodulation hardware is installed (options 106, AYQ or BAA). If you have multiple
FM demodulation hardware options, the hardware that will be used is automatically selected in order of priority (with firmware revision
A.14.00 or later.)
1. Option 106 - Bluetooth
™
2. Option AYQ - Quasi-peak detection and FM demodulation
3. Option BAA - FM Demodulation
Segmented sweep is not available with the demodulation functions in this section.
Off
AM
FM
Turns demodulation off.
Key Access:
Det/Demod
,
Demod
Activating AM demodulation turns off FM demodulation (if it is on). For non-zero spans, a 10 kHz resolution bandwidth is used during demodulation, regardless of the screen annotation. When the span is set to zero span, the displayed bandwidth is used.
Key Access:
Det/Demod
,
Demod
Turning FM demodulation on turns off AM demodulation (if it is on). For non-zero spans, a
100 kHz resolution bandwidth is used during the demodulation, regardless of the screen annotation.
When the span is set to zero span, the displayed bandwidth is used. For best results, move the signal to be demodulated to within 3 divisions of the top of the display.
Follow these steps to use this key:
1. Turn auto align off. (
System
,
Alignments
,
Auto Align
,
Off
)
2. Calibrate the demodulator. (
System
,
Alignments
,
Align Now
,
FM Demod)
3. Set the center frequency. (
FREQUENCY)
4. Go to zero span. (
SPAN
,
Zero Span)
5. Set the resolution bandwidth. (
BW/Avg
,
Res BW
)
6. Set the detector to sample. (
Det/Demod
,
Detector
,
Sample
)
7. View the FM demodulation. (
Det/Demod
,
Demod
,
FM,
Demod View
(On))
8. Use the Markers to measure the FM demodulation and the modulation rate. (
Marker
)
70 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Det/Demod
9. Adjust the sweep time as necessary.
Figure 2-4 1 GHz, -10 dBm, 5 kHz deviation, 5 kHz Modulation Rate
Demod View
On Off
Key Access:
Det/Demod
,
Demod
When
Demod View (On)
is pressed, the vertical scaling of the display is in frequency, and marker will read out the FM deviation in kHz. When Demod View is On, the following functions are not available: Log/Lin (the display is always linear and calibrated in Hz),
Y Axis Units, Normalize, Display Line, Peak Excursion, and Peak Threshold. In AM demod, pressing
Demod View (On)
has no effect. FM demod must be selected. The Bluetooth™ FM Demod (Option 106) has a fixed vertical scale of approximately 40 kHz/Div. The exact value is determined by the auto alignment process and is displayed in the upper-left corner of the display.
Key Access:
Det/Demod
,
Demod
Speaker
On Off
Turns the internal speaker on and off. The volume from the speaker is controlled by the front-panel volume control knob. Selecting AM or FM turns the speaker on.
Turning AM or FM off, pressing
Preset
when
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
, or cycling the power sets the speaker function to off.
Chapter 2 71
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Det/Demod
Key Access:
Det/Demod
,
Demod
Demod Time
Allows you to set the time, in non-zero spans, to pause and demodulate the signal after each sweep. The demodulated signal can be heard during demodulation when in
Speaker (On)
mode. In zero span, demodulation is performed (and can be heard) throughout the sweep.
With non-zero spans, in AM the Video BW is set to 3 kHz and the Resolution BW is set to 10 kHz. In FM, the
Video BW is set to 30 kHz and the Resolution BW is set to 100 kHz.
When AM or FM demod is enabled, the instrument will tune to the marker frequency and wait for the Demod to take place.
Demod Time
is not available unless AM or
FM demod is selected, and span is >0 Hz. For long demodulation times, pressing
Preset
when
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
will abort the Demod function. The default value is 500 ms.
Key Access:
Det/Demod
,
Demod
It is normal to hear clicking sounds when the Auto Alignment function is On. During retrace, a small portion of the analyzer circuitry is realigned. Some of the switching of the analyzer circuitry is done using relays. It is the rapid switching of these relays during retrace that causes the clicking sounds. To eliminate the clicking sounds, turn the auto alignment off by pressing
System
,
Alignments
,
Auto Align
,
Off
.
When this is done, the
Align Now
,
All
function should be performed periodically. Refer to the Specifications Guide for your instrument to learn more information on how often to perform
Align Now
,
All
when the auto alignment is off.
Squelch
Allows you to adjust the squelch level. The squelch level mutes weak signals and passes strong signals. Only the audio level is affected. If the internal speaker is On, audio signals are not output unless the signal strength exceeds the squelch threshold.
The squelch level does not affect the rear panel AUX
VIDEO OUT
signal. Squelch level is indicated on screen by the numbers 0 to 100, with 0 being the minimum threshold (all signals are passed) and 100 being the maximum threshold (no signals are passed). The default squelch value is 0. Squelch is active only when
FM demod is selected and it is only available when the
Option AYQ hardware is used as the instrument’s FM demod hardware.
Key Access:
Det/Demod
,
Demod
72 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Display
Full Screen
Display Line
On Off
Limits
Display
Accesses menu keys that allow you to control what is displayed on the analyzer, including titles, the display line
,
graticule and annotation, as well as the testing of trace data against user entered limits.
Allows the measurement window to expand horizontally over the entire instrument display. Pressing a key that brings up a new menu will cancel the full screen function.
Key Access:
Display
Activates an adjustable horizontal line that is used as a visual reference line. The line, which can be used for trace arithmetic, has amplitude values that correspond to its vertical position when compared to the reference level. The value of the display line appears in the active function block and on the left side of the display. The display line can be adjusted using the step keys, knob, or numeric keypad. Pressing any digit, 0 through 9, on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu. To deactivate the display line, press
Display Line (Off)
.
Key Access:
Display
Accesses menu keys that allow you to create and define the parameters of limit lines.
Key Access:
Display
Limit 1
Limit 2
Allows you to select either of the two available limits.
The
Limit 1
and
Limit 2
keys access menu keys that allow you to set parameters for the selected limit.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
Type
Upper Lower
Allows you to define the limit you are editing as either an upper or lower limit. An upper limit fails if trace 1 exceeds the limit. A lower limit fails if trace 1 falls below the limit.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
Limit On Off
Turns the limit line display on and off.
Either
Limit
or
Margin
, as well as
Test
, must be turned on for a limit test to work.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
Chapter 2 73
Front-Panel Key Reference
Display
Test
On Off
Margin
On Off
Edit
Turns the testing of the limit lines on and off. If trace 1 is at or within the bounds of the set limit or margin, PASS
LIMIT #
or PASS MARGIN # is displayed in green in the upper left corner of the measurement area where # is the number of the selected limit line.
(Colored annotation appears only with a color display.) Only positive margins are allowed for lower limits and only negative margins are allowed for upper limits. If the trace is out of the limit or margin boundaries, FAIL LIMIT # or
FAIL MARGIN #
is displayed in red. The results for Limit 2 are displayed below those for Limit 1. Either
Limit
or
Margin
must be turned on for
Test
to work.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
Margin (Off)
turns the margin off.
Margin (On)
allows you to set a limit line offset for the selected limit line. Either
Limit
or
Margin
as well as
Test
, must be turned on for a limit test to work.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
Accesses the
Edit
menu keys which include
Point
,
Frequency
(or
Time
if
Display, Limits, X Axis Units (Time)
has been selected),
Amplitude
,
Connected to
Previous Pt
, and
Delete Point
.
Edit
also accesses the limits table. The Tab keys allow you to move between the rows in the limits table. New limit segments will only be applied after the editor is closed. Pressing
Return
, or any key not associated with the editor, will close the editor.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
74 Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Display
Point
Allows you to create or edit a limit point. Up to 200 points may be defined for each limit line. Enter the point number to be created or edited using the numeric keypad, then Press
Enter
, or use the knob, Tab or step keys to move to an existing point. After selecting a point,
Frequency
(or
Time
) becomes active.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
,
Edit
Frequency
(The key label is
Time
if
X Axis Units (Time)
has been selected.)
Allows you to enter the frequency value for a limit point. After entering a value, the limit table is sorted to place the frequency or time in the correct order. For a new point,
Amplitude
defaults to 0 dBm and
Connected to
Previous Pt
defaults to
Yes
.
Amplitude
then becomes active.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
,
Edit
Amplitude
Allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current limit point. After entering a value,
Connected to Previous
Pt
becomes active. If a Tab key is pressed without entering a value, the current
Amplitude
and
Connected to
Previous Pt
values of the point are selected. If Tab
⇑ is pressed, the point number automatically increments to allow entry of the amplitude of the next point, or if a new point, to allow
Frequency
to be entered for the new point.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
,
Edit
75
Front-Panel Key Reference
Display
Connected to Previous Pt
Yes No
Allows you to determine whether the current point will be connected to the previous point. No limit testing is performed between disconnected points. Pressing this key when the
Connected field is selected toggles the
Connected value of the current point and increments the Point number to allow entry or editing of the Frequency of the next point. If a Tab key is pressed without entering a value, the current
Connected value of the point is selected. If Tab
⇑ is pressed, the Point number automatically increments to allow entry of the Connected value of the next point, or if a new point, to allow
Frequency
to be entered for the new point.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
,
Edit
Delete Point
Allows you to delete the current point in the limit line. You will be prompted with the message If you are sure, press key again to delete
.
Pressing
Delete Point
again will delete the point.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
,
Edit
Delete Limit
Allows you to delete the current limit set. You will be prompted with the message If you are sure, press key again to delete
. Pressing
Delete
again will delete the limit set.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
Freq Interp
Log Lin
Allows you to determine how limit trace values are computed between points in a limit table. The available interpolation modes are linear and logarithmic. If the linear mode is used for both frequency and amplitude, a
76 Chapter 2
NOTE
X Axis Units
Freq Time
Front-Panel Key Reference
Display
straight line is used when interpolating between points in a limit table. If frequency interpolation is logarithmic, frequency values between limit points are computed by first taking the logarithm of both the table values and the intermediate value. A linear interpolation is then performed in this logarithmic frequency space. An exactly analogous manipulation is done for logarithmic amplitude interpolation.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
,
More
Amptd Interp
Log Lin
Allows you to determine how limit trace values are computed between points in a limit table. The available interpolation modes are linear and logarithmic. If the linear mode is used for both frequency and amplitude, a straight line is used when interpolating between points in a limit table.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
,
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
,
More
Interpolation modes determine how limit values are computed between points in the limit table. The appearance of a limit trace is also affected by the amplitude scale, which may be linear or logarithmic.
Selects whether limit lines will be entered using frequency or sweep time to define the segments. They can be specified as a table of limit line segments of amplitude versus frequency, or of amplitude versus time. Time values are evaluated with respect to the analyzer sweep time. A time value of zero corresponds to the start of the sweep, which is at the left edge of the graticule.
Switching the limit line definition between frequency and time will erase both of the current limit lines. The message Changing X axis units will delete all limits. If you are sure, press key again to change units
will appear. Press
X Axis Units Freq Time
again to purge both limit lines and switch between frequency and time.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
Chapter 2 77
Front-Panel Key Reference
Display
Limits Fixed Rel
Delete
All Limits
Active Fctn
Position
Allows you to choose fixed or relative limit lines. The fixed (
Fixed
) type uses the current limit line as a reference with fixed frequency and amplitude values. The relative (
Rel
) setting causes the current limit line value to be relative to the displayed center frequency and reference level amplitude values. When limit lines are specified with time, rather than frequency, the
Rel
setting only affects the amplitude values. The current amplitude values will be relative to the displayed reference level amplitude, but the time values will always start at the left edge of the graticule.
As an example, assume you have a frequency limit line. If the limit line is specified as fixed, entering a limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz displays the limit line segment at 300 MHz. If the same limit line table is specified as relative, it is displayed relative to the analyzer center frequency and reference level. If the center frequency is at 1.0 GHz, a relative limit line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz will display the limit line segment at 1.3 GHz. If the amplitude component of the relative limit line segment is –10 dB, then
−10 dB is added to the reference level value to obtain the amplitude of the given segment (reference level offset included).
A limit line entered as fixed may be changed to relative, and one entered as relative may be changed to fixed. When changing between fixed and relative limit lines, the frequency and amplitude values in the limit line table change so that the limit line remains in the same position for the current frequency and amplitude settings of the analyzer. If a time and amplitude limit line is used, the amplitude values change but the time values remain the same.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
Allows you to purge data from the limit-line tables. Pressing
Delete
Limits
after the prompt, If you are sure, press key again to delete
, will delete the limits.
Key Access:
Display
,
Limits
Selects the screen position for the Active Function Display. Depending on the type of trace data being viewed, you can move the Active
Function Display position for less visual interference with your screen data.
Key Access:
Display
Top
Displays the active function in the top-left corner of the display.
78 Chapter 2
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Display
Do not select
Active Fctn Position
,
Top
when performing limit or margin tests as the pass/fail messages for these functions will be overwritten by the active function information.
Center
Bottom
Key Access:
Display
,
Active Fctn Position
Displays the active function in the center-left side of the display.
Key Access:
Display
,
Active Fctn Position
Displays the active function in the bottom-left corner of the display
Title
Key Access:
Display
,
Active Fctn Position
Accesses the following
Title
menu keys which allows you to change or
Chapter 2 79
NOTE
Preferences
Front-Panel Key Reference
Display
clear a title on your display.
Key Access:
Display
Change Title
Allows you to write a title across the top of the display.
The marker readout may interfere with the last characters. The markers can be turned off by pressing
Marker
,
More
,
Marker All Off
. Pressing
Change Title
accesses the Alpha Editor Menus that contain available characters and symbols.
Pressing
ESC
before exiting the Alpha Editor menus will retain the previous title.
Clear Title
The display title will remain until either
Change Title
is pressed again, or a trace is recalled that was previously saved with a title. A display title can also be cleared by using the clear function. Press
Display
,
Title, Clear Title
.
Key Access:
Display
,
Title
Allows you to clear a title from the front-panel display.
Once cleared, the title cannot be retrieved.
Key Access:
Display
,
Title
Accesses a menu of the following display functions which allow you to turn the graticule and annotation on or off.
Key Access:
Display
Graticule
On Off
Turns the display graticule on and off.
Key Access:
Display
,
Preferences
Annotation
On Off
Turns the screen annotation on or off, however, menu key annotation will remain on the screen. The screen annotation may not be required for prints or during remote operation.
Key Access:
Display
,
Preferences
80 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Enter
Enter
Terminates and enters into the analyzer a numerical value that has been entered from the front panel using the numeric keypad. (For most applications, it is better to use the units menu keys.)
When using the
File
key menus, the
Enter
key is used to terminate filename entries. When entering titles (
Display
,
Title
,
Change Title
), the
Enter
key is used to terminate title entries.
Chapter 2 81
Front-Panel Key Reference
ESC
ESC
Use the escape key to exit any function without modifying current parameters. Pressing the
ESC
key will:
• Clear any numeric entry that you have begun to enter and cancels the active function (see the section on display annotation, active function area, and other display features in the Getting Started
Guide for your instrument).
• Clear any title entry that you have begun to enter and cause the title to revert to the previous name.
• Clear input or output overloads.
• Clear error messages from the status line along the bottom of the display.
• Clear peak threshold from the display (turn it off) if the peak threshold line is on.
• Cancels a print, if one is in progress.
82 Chapter 2
Catalog
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
File
Accesses the menu keys used to view, save, load, and manage data on a floppy disk or the internal analyzer drive. Refer to the Getting Started
Guide for your instrument for more information on file menu functions.
Displays all directories and files located on the selected drive, depending upon the preferences set under the
Type
and
Sort
keys defined below.
Key Access:
File
Type
Allows you to select all types or one type of file(s) for viewing.
Key Access:
File, Catalog
All
Displays all files located on the selected drive.
Setup
State
Key Access:
File, Catalog, Type
Displays all setup files (.SET) in the selected directory. Setups are a complete set of instrument parameters including traces, states, limits, and corrections.
Key Access:
File, Catalog, Type
Displays all state files (.STA) in the selected directory. State files contain most instrument settings.
Trace
Key Access:
File, Catalog, Type
Displays all trace files (.TRC and .CSV) in the selected directory.
Key Access:
File, Catalog, Type
Limits
Screen
Displays all limits files (.LIM) in the selected directory.
Key Access:
File, Catalog, Type
Displays all screen (.GIF and .WMF) files in the selected directory.
Key Access:
File, Catalog, Type
Corrections
Displays all correction files (.ANT,
.CBL, .OTH, .AMP) in the selected directory.
Key Access:
File, Catalog, Type, More
Chapter 2 83
Save
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
Sort
Dir Up
Dir Select
Measurement Results
Displays all measurement results files in the selected directory.
Measurement results files are saved in
.CSV format (for importing into spreadsheets).
Key Access:
File
,
Catalog
,
Type
,
More
Accesses the
Sort
menu keys that allow you to sort your files according to a selected file attribute.The selections include,
By Date
,
By Name
,
By Extension
,
By Size
, and
Order Up Down
.
Order (Up)
allows you to sort files in ascending order (for instance, A,B,C).
Order (Down)
allows you to sort files in descending order (for instance, C,B,A).
Key Access:
File, Catalog
Allows you to move up one directory level. If at the top level,
Dir Up
moves to the drive level, displaying the available disk drives.
Key Access:
File, Catalog
Accesses the highlighted directory on your display.
Key Access:
File, Catalog
Accesses menu keys that allow you to save analyzer setups, states, traces, limits, corrections and screen data to a floppy (A:) drive or internal flash (C:) drive.
If you intend to save trace files for use with a personal computer, save them as .CSV (comma separated values). However, files fomatted in this way cannot be loaded back into the analyzer.
Never remove the floppy disk during a save operation. To do so could corrupt all data on the floppy disk.
Key Access:
File
Save Now
Executes the save function. When the save is complete, the message XXXXXX file saved (where XXXXXX is the filename) will appear in the status line on your display.
Note that once you have used the
File
,
Save
,
Save Now
keys to setup and save a file, the
Save
hardkey will perform an immediate
Save Now
of your file in the same format and to the same location.
Key Access:
File, Save
84 Chapter 2
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
If the Path: field above the directory box is empty when pressing
Save
Now
, the status line will display the error message: Unable to save file, invalid path
. In this case, please select a drive.
Type
Allows you to select the type of data you want to save.
Setup
Displays all previously saved setup files and detects the current setup parameters in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date.
Setup files include all instrument settings including traces, states, limits, and corrections.
When viewing a floppy disc with saved Setup files (filename.set) on a personal computer, notice there are also many similarly named files with extensions like .s01, .s02, etc. Do not delete these files as they are necessary to allow complete restoration of originally saved Setup.
State
Trace
Key Access:
File, Save, Type
Displays all previously saved state files and detects the current state parameters in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date.
State files include all instrument settings but not traces, limits, and corrections. (This is the default setting when power is applied to the analyzer.)
Key Access:
File, Save, Type
Displays all previously saved trace files
(.TRC) and detects the current trace in preparation to save it in a file for retrieval at a future date. A trace can be saved individually or as a group of traces. It can also be saved in .CSV
(comma separated values) format (for importing into spreadsheets) or in .TRC format, accompanied by the analyzer state (for later recalling into the analyzer). (Note that CSV formatted data cannot be reloaded into the analyzer and TRC formatted data cannot be loaded into most personal computer programs.) Refer to the
Format
key description.
Key Access:
File, Save, Type
Chapter 2 85
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
Limits
Screen
Displays all previously saved limits files and detects the current limits in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date. Limits provide data sets to determine whether a trace has exceeded preset specifications. Limit sets can hold up to
200 points and can only be saved individually. Refer to the
File, Source
key description.
Key Access:
File, Save, Type
Displays all previously saved screen files and captures the current screen displayed in preparation to save it in a file for retrieval at a future date.
Screen files can be saved in any of the following formats: Bitmap, Metafile,
Reverse Bitmap, and Reverse Metafile.
Refer to the
Format
key description.
Key Access:
File, Save, Type
Screen files saved in WMF format can only be loaded into Microsoft
® 1 applications such as Microsoft Word.
NOTE
The screen saved is that which was displayed before pressing
File
. For this reason, the screens seen while in the file menus cannot be saved.
Corrections
Displays all previously saved correction files and detects the current corrections in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date. Corrections provide a way to adjust the trace display for preset gain factors (such as for cable loss). A correction set may hold up to 200 points. Pressing
Corrections
activates the
Source
key.
Refer to the
Source
key description.
Key Access:
File, Save, Type, More
Measurement Results
Displays all previously saved measurement results files and detects the current measurement results in preparation to save them in a file for retrieval at a future date.
1. Microsoft
® is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
86 Chapter 2
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
Format
Source
Name
Measurement results files are saved in
.CSV format (for importing into spreadsheets).
Key Access:
File, Save, Type, More
When
Type
is set to
Trace
,
Format
allows you to save a trace accompanied by the analyzer state. The
CSV
format is readable by a spreadsheet on your PC, but cannot be loaded back into the analyzer. The TRC format cannot be loaded into a PC, but can be loaded back into the analyzer. TRC files include the state of the analyzer and restore all settings when loaded.
When
Type
is set to
Screen
,
Format
allows you to choose between bitmap and metafile formats.
Bitmap
saves the screen image in Graphics Interchange Format (GIF) and
Metafile
saves the screen image in Windows
Metafile Format (WMF).
Reverse Bitmap
and
Reverse
Metafile
turn black backgrounds to white and yellow traces to green so they can be printed visibly and with less use of black ink. Screen images cannot be loaded back into the analyzer.
Key Access:
File, Save
When
Type
is set to
Trace
,
Source
allows you to save trace
1
,
2
, or
3
along with state. Saving trace
All
saves all traces in a single .trc file, along with the state.
When
Type
is set to
Corrections
,
Source
accesses the
Antenna
,
Cable
,
Other
and
User
menu keys, which allow you to select the type of correction to be saved.
When
Type
is set to
Limits
,
Source
accesses the
Limit 1
and
Limit 2
menu keys.
Limit 1
and
Limit 2
provide data sets to determine whether a trace has exceeded preset specifications. Limit sets can hold up to 200 points and can only be saved individually.
Key Access:
File, Save
Accesses the Alpha Editor and allows you to enter a filename. The external keyboard can also be used to enter a filename while the alpha editor is accessed.
Key Access:
File, Save
Only capital letters (A-Z) and digits (0-9) may appear in file names (8 characters, maximum). Additionally, file names include a 3 character extension which is automatically set by the instrument.
Chapter 2 87
Load
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
Dir Up
Dir Select
Allows you to move up one directory level. If at the top level,
Dir Up
moves to the drive level, displaying the available disk drives.
Key Access:
File, Save
Accesses the highlighted directory on your display.
Key Access:
File, Save
Accesses menu keys that allow you to load analyzer setups, states, traces, limits and corrections into the analyzer from a floppy (A:) drive or internal flash (C:) drive.
Key Access:
File
Load Now
Executes the load function. When the load is complete, the message XXXXXX file loaded (where XXXXXX is the filename) will appear in the status line on your display.
Type
Key Access:
File, Load
Allows you to select the type of file you want to load.
Setup
Displays all setup files you may wish to load (.SET). Setup files include a complete set of instrument parameters including traces, states, limits, and corrections. Loading a setup restores the analyzer (as closely as possible) to all previous instrument settings at the time of the save.
State
Trace
Key Access:
File, Load, Type
Displays all state files you may wish to load (.STA). Loading a state restores most settings to the previously saved values.
Key Access:
File, Load, Type
Displays all trace files (.TRC) you may wish to load. Traces can be loaded individually or as a group. When a trace is loaded, the state that existed when that trace was saved is loaded along with the trace. Also, the loaded trace is placed in view mode.
Key Access:
File, Load, Type
88 Chapter 2
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
If you wish to compare two saved traces, place traces in view mode before saving them. This prevents the trace from being rewritten based on a state change from subsequent loads.
Limits
Displays all limits files you may wish to load to determine whether a trace has exceeded preset specifications (.LIM).
Limit sets can hold up to 200 points.
Limits can only be loaded individually.
Key Access:
File, Load, Type
When loading Limits files, be sure you have selected the appropriate
X Axis Units: frequency or time (
Display
,
Limits
,
X Axis Units
). If you are in time X-Axis Units, and you load frequency limits, all current limit line data will be erased and the analyzer will switch to frequency units.
The reverse of the this situation also holds true.
Sort
Corrections
Displays all corrections files you may wish to load (.CBL, .ANT, .OTH, .AMP).
Corrections provide a way to adjust the trace display for preset gain factors
(such as for cable loss). A correction set may hold up to 200 points.
Key Access:
File, Load, Type, More
Measurement Results
Displays all previously saved measurement results files you may wish to load. Measurement results files are saved in .CSV format (for importing into spreadsheets).
Key Access:
File, Load, Type, More
Accesses the
Sort
menu key.
Sort
accesses a menu of keys that allow you to view your saved files according to a selected file attribute.
The selections include,
By Date
,
By Name
,
By Extension
,
By Size
, and
Order Up Down
.
Order
(Up) allows you to view files in ascending order (for instance, A,B,C).
Order
(Down) allows you to view files in descending order (for instance, C,B,A).
Key Access:
File, Load
Destination
When
Type
is set to
Trace
,
Destination
allows you to direct your data to
Trace 1
,
Trace 2
, or
Trace 3
. If the data is for all three traces (for instance,
Source
was
All
when they were saved), the data will be returned to the original trace registers.
Chapter 2 89
Delete
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
Dir Up
Dir Select
When
Type
is set to
Limits
,
Destination
allows you to direct your data to
Limit 1
or
Limit 2
.
Key Access:
File, Load
Allows you to move up one directory level. If at the top level,
Dir Up
moves to the drive level, displaying the available disk drives.
Key Access:
File, Load
Accesses the highlighted directory on your display. If
[..] is highlighted, this key acts in the same manner as
Dir Up
.
Key Access:
File, Load
Allows you to delete files and directories.
Key Access:
File
Delete Now
Executes the delete function. If a directory is selected to be deleted, the message WARNING: You are about to delete the contents of directory XXXXXX
(where
XXXXXX is the full path and directory name) will appear on your display. After a successful delete, the message XXXXXX file deleted (where XXXXXX is the filename) will appear in the status line on your display.
Type
Key Access:
File, Delete
Allows you to select the type of file you want to delete.
Key Access:
File, Delete
All
Displays all files you may wish to delete.
Setup
Key Access:
File, Delete
,
Type
Displays all setup files you may wish to delete (.SET). A Setup file is a complete state of instrument parameters including traces, states, limits and corrections.
State
Trace
Key Access:
File, Delete
,
Type
Displays all state files you may wish to delete (.STA).
Key Access:
File, Delete
,
Type
Displays all trace files you may wish to delete (.TRC and .CSV).
Key Access:
File, Delete
,
Type
90 Chapter 2
Copy
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
Sort
Dir Up
Dir Select
Limits
Screen
Displays all limits files you may wish to delete (.LIM).
Key Access:
File, Delete
,
Type
Displays all screen files you may wish to delete (.GIF and .WMF).
Key Access:
File, Delete
,
Type
Corrections
Displays all corrections files you may wish to delete (.CBL, .ANT, .OTH,
.AMP).
Key Access:
File, Delete
,
Type
,
More
Measurement Results
Displays all previously saved measurement results files you may wish to delete. Measurement results files are saved in (.CSV) format (for importing into spreadsheets).
Key Access:
File, Delete, Type, More
Sort
accesses a menu of keys that allow you view the files you wish to delete, according to a selected file attribute. The selections include,
By Date
,
By Name
,
By
Extension
,
By Size
, and
Order Up Down
.
Order (Up)
allows you to view files you may wish to delete in ascending order (for instance, A,B,C).
Order (Down)
allows you to view files you may wish to delete in descending order
(for instance, C,B,A).
Key Access:
File, Delete
Allows you to move up one directory level. If at the top level,
Dir Up
moves to the drive level, displaying the available disk drives.
Key Access:
File, Delete
Accesses the highlighted directory on your display. If
[..] is highlighted, this key acts in the same manner as
Dir Up
.
Key Access:
File, Delete
Allows you to copy files from one directory to another or to one or more mass storage devices.
Key Access:
File
Copy Now
. Executes the copy function. If the copy is successful, the message xxxxx file copied (where xxxxx is the filename) will appear on the display.
Key Access:
File
,
Copy
Chapter 2 91
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
Type
. Allows you to select the type of file you want to copy.
Key Access:
File
,
Copy
All
. Displays all files you may wish to copy.
Key Access:
File
,
Copy
,
Type
Setup
. Displays all setup (.SET) files you may wish to copy. A Setup file is a complete state of instrument parameters including traces, states, limits and corrections.
When using a personal computer to copy Setup files, ensure the similarly named files with extensions like .s01, .so2, etc. are also copied.
These files are necessary to allow complete restoration of originally saved Setup.
Sort
.
State
Trace
.
.
Limits
.
Screen
.
Key Access:
File
,
Copy
,
Type
Displays all state (.STA) files you may wish to copy.
Key Access:
File
,
Copy
,
Type
Displays all trace (.TRC and .CSV) files you may wish to copy.
Key Access:
File
,
Copy
,
Type
Displays all limit (.LIM) files you may wish to rename.
Key Access:
File
,
Copy
,
Type
Displays all screen (.GIF and .WMF) files you may wish to rename.
Key Access:
File
,
Copy
,
Type
Corrections
. Displays all corrections (.CBL, .ANT,
.OTH, .AMP) files you may wish to rename.
Key Access:
File
,
Copy
,
Type
,
More
Measurement Results
. Displays all previously saved measurement results files you may wish to delete. Measurement results files are saved in (.CSV) format (for importing into spreadsheets).
Key Access:
File, Copy, Type, More
Sort
accesses a menu of keys that allow you to view the files you wish to copy according to a selected file
92 Chapter 2
Rename
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
attribute. The selection includes,
By Date
,
By Name
,
By
Extension
,
By Size
, and
Order Up Down
.
Order (Up)
allows you to view files you may wish to copy in ascending order (for instance, A,B,C).
Order (Down)
allows you to view files you may wish to copy in descending order (for instance, C,B,A).
Key Access:
File, Copy
Dir
From To
Dir Up
.
.
Dir Select
.
Allows you to select the source and destination directories for your copy on one or more drives.
Key Access:
File, Copy
Allows you to move up one directory level. If at the top level,
Dir Up
moves to the drive level, displaying the available disk drives.
Key Access:
File, Copy
Accesses the highlighted directory on your display.
Key Access:
File, Copy
Allows you to rename a file.
Key Access:
File
Rename Now
Executes the rename function. When the rename is complete, the message XXXXXX file renamed to
YYYYYY
(where XXXXXX and YYYYYY are the
filenames) will appear in the status line on your display.
Type
Key Access:
File, Rename
Allows you to select the type of file you want to rename.
Key Access:
File, Rename
All
Displays all files you may wish to rename.
Setup
State
Key Access:
File, Rename
,
Type
Displays all setup (.SET) files you may wish to rename. A Setup file is a complete state of instrument parameters including traces, states, limits and corrections.
Key Access:
File, Rename
,
Type
Displays all state (.STA) files you may wish to rename.
Key Access:
File, Rename
,
Type
Chapter 2 93
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
Sort
Name
Trace
Limits
Displays all trace (.TRC and .CSV) files you may wish to rename.
Key Access:
File, Rename
,
Type
Displays all limit (.LIM) files you may wish to rename.
Key Access:
File, Rename
,
Type
Screen
Displays all screen (.GIF and .WMF) files you may wish to rename.
Key Access:
File, Rename
,
Type
Corrections
Displays all corrections (.CBL, .ANT,
.OTH, .AMP) files you may wish to rename.
Key Access:
File, Rename
,
Type
,
More
Measurement Results
Displays all previously saved measurement results files you may wish to rename. Measurement results files are saved in (.CSV) format (for importing into spreadsheets).
Key Access:
File, Rename, Type, More
Sort
accesses a menu of keys that allow you to view the files you wish to rename according to a selected file attribute. The selections include,
By Date
,
By Name
,
By
Extension
,
By Size
, and
Order Up Down
.
Order (UP)
allows you to view files you may wish to rename in ascending order (for instance, A,B,C).
Order (Down)
allows you to view files you may wish to rename in descending order
(for instance, C,B,A).
Key Access:
File, Rename
Accesses the Alpha Editor and allows you to enter a filename. The external keyboard can also be used to enter a filename while the alpha editor is accessed.
Complete your entry by pressing
Return
or
Enter
.
Only capital letters (A-Z) and digits (0-9) may appear in file names
(8 characters, maximum). Additionally, file names include a 3 character extension which is automatically set by the instrument.
Dir Up
Key Access:
File, Rename
Allows you to move up one directory level. If at the top level,
Dir Up
moves to the drive level, displaying the available disk drives.
Key Access:
File, Rename
94 Chapter 2
Create Dir
NOTE
Format
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
Dir Select
Accesses the highlighted directory on your display.
Key Access:
File, Rename
Allows you to create subdirectories.
Key Access:
File, More
Create Dir
Now
Name
Executes the create directory function. When the directory has been created, the message Directory
XXXXXX created
(where XXXXXX is the directory
name) will appear in the status line on your display.
Key Access:
File, More, Create Dir
Accesses the Alpha Editor and allows you to enter a filename. The external keyboard can also be used to enter a filename while the alpha editor is accessed.
Complete your entry by pressing
Return
or
Enter
.
Key Access:
File, More, Create Dir
Only capital letters (A-Z) and digits (0-9) may appear in file names
(8 characters, maximum). Additionally, file names include a 3 digit extension which is automatically set by the instrument.
Dir Up
Dir Select
Allows you to move up one directory level. If at the top level,
Dir Up
moves to the drive level, displaying the available disk drives.
Key Access:
File, More, Create Dir
Accesses the highlighted directory on your display.
Key Access:
File, More, Create Dir
Formats a double-density floppy disk to 1.44 MB format. 720 kB disks are not supported.
Key Access:
File
,
More
Format Now
Executes the format function. After pressing
Format Now
, the following message will appear on the display: WARNING: You are about to destroy ALL data on volume A: Press Format Now again to proceed or any other key to abort.
During the formatting, Formatting Disk will appear on the display.
Once formatted, Volume A: formatted will appear in the status line on the display.
Chapter 2 95
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
File
When using a personal computer to manipulate Setup files
(filename.set) saved to a floppy, ensure the similarly named files with extensions like .s01, .s02, etc. are handled in a like manner. For example, if you rename of the .set file, you must rename all the .s0x files, as well. These files are necessary to allow complete restoration of the originally saved Setup.
Key Access:
File, More, Format
96 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Freq Count
Marker Count
On Off
NOTE
Resolution
Auto Man
Freq Count
Activates the
Marker Normal
function if there are no markers, and then turns the marker count function on.
Marker Count (On)
turns on the marker counter. If no marker is active before
Marker Count (On)
is pressed, a marker is activated at the center of the display. Press
Marker Count (Off)
to turn the marker counter off.
Press
Resolution (Man)
to change the marker counter resolution to an uncoupled value.
Marker Count frequency readings are not affected by the frequency offset function.
An asterisk (*) may appear in the upper-right area of the display along with the message Cntr 1 (the number in the message depends on the active marker). The ratio of the resolution bandwidth to span must be greater than 0.002 for the marker count function to work properly.
Marker Count: Widen Res BW
appears on the display if the bandwidth to span ratio is less than 0.002. Widen RES BW indicates that the resolution bandwidth must be increased or the span decreased.
Key Access:
Freq Count
Allows the resolution of the marker counter to be selected manually or auto-coupled. The marker counter has a resolution range of 1 Hz to
100 kHz. The available resolution values are 1 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz,
1 kHz, 10 kHz, and 100 kHz. The resolution can be changed by using the step keys or by entering the resolution using the numeric keypad or knob. The marker counter resolution can be auto coupled to the span by pressing
Resolution (Auto)
.
Key Access:
Freq Count
Chapter 2 97
Front-Panel Key Reference
FREQUENCY Channel
NOTE
CAUTION
Center Freq
Start Freq
Stop Freq
CF Step
Auto Man
FREQUENCY Channel
Activates the center frequency function, and accesses the menu of frequency functions. The center frequency, or start and stop frequency values appear below the graticule on the display.
Although the analyzer allows entry of frequencies greater than the specified frequency range, using frequencies greater than the frequency range of the analyzer is not recommended
When changing both the center frequency and the span, change the frequency first since the span can be limited by the frequency value.
When operating in dc coupled mode, take care to protect the input mixer by limiting the input level to 0 Vdc and +30 dBm.
Activates the center frequency function (when
Scale Type
is set to
Lin
) which allows you to set the horizontal center of the display to a specific frequency. When
Scale Type
is set to
Log
,
Center Freq
activates the center frequency function which allows you to move the average of the start and stop frequencies. In this scale type the center frequency value will not necessarily represent the horizontal center of the display.
Key Access:
FREQUENCY Channel
Sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule. The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies.
When these frequencies are activated, their values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span.
Key Access:
FREQUENCY Channel
Sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule. The left and right sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies.
When these frequencies are activated, their values are displayed below the graticule in place of center frequency and span.
Key Access:
FREQUENCY Channel
Changes the step size for the center frequency function. Once a step size has been selected and the center frequency function is activated, the step keys change center frequency by the step-size value. The step size function is useful for finding harmonics and sidebands beyond the current frequency span of the analyzer. When auto-coupled, the center frequency step size is set to one division (10 percent of the span).
Key Access:
FREQUENCY Channel
98 Chapter 2
Freq Offset
NOTE
NOTE
Signal Track
On Off
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
FREQUENCY Channel
Allows you to input a frequency offset value that is added to the frequency readout of the marker, to account for frequency conversions external to the analyzer. Offset entries are added to all frequency readouts including marker, start frequency, and stop frequency. Offsets may only be entered using the numeric keypad. Offsets are not added to the span or frequency count readouts. Entering an offset does not affect the trace display. When a frequency offset is entered, its value appears on the bottom of the display. To eliminate an offset, perform a
Factory
Preset
, or press
Freq Offset
,
0
,
Hz
.
When a frequency offset is entered, its value appears on the bottom of the display (as opposed to reference level offsets, which appear on the left side of the display). To eliminate an offset, press
Freq Offset
,
0
, and
Enter
. Pressing
Preset
also sets the offset to zero.
This function is not available when
FREQUENCY, Scale Type (Log)
is selected.
Frequency, Scale Type (Log)
is not available when utilizing the frequency offset function.
Key Access:
FREQUENCY Channel
Moves the signal that is nearest to the active marker to the center of the display and keeps the signal there. ST appears in the lower-left corner of the display. An (*) may appear in the upper-right corner of the display while the analyzer is verifying that it has the correct signal.
Pressing
Signal Track (Off)
;
Preset
(with
Preset Type
set to
Factory
); or
Marker
,
More
,
Marker All Off
turns off the signal track function.
When signal track is on and the span is reduced, an automatic zoom is performed and the span is reduced in steps so that the signal remains at the center of the display. If the span is zero, signal track cannot be activated.
Key Access:
FREQUENCY Channel
If no marker is active, pressing
Signal Track (On)
will activate a marker, perform a peak search, and center the marker on the display.
Switching to zero span sets
Signal Track (Off)
.
FREQUENCY, Scale Type (Log)
and
Segmented (On)
are not available when
Signal Track (On)
is selected.
Chapter 2 99
Scale Type
Log Lin
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
FREQUENCY Channel
Agilent ESA-E Series only (E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B and
E4407B). Scales the horizontal (x-axis or frequency) graticule divisions logarithmically when
Scale Type (Log)
is selected. When
Scale Type (Lin)
is selected, the horizontal divisions are linearly scaled.
In
Scale Type (Log)
, the number of sweep points is limited to a multiple of the number of sweep segments. For example, if you select 308 points when 3 segments are required to create a logarithmic display, the points will be set at 306 points. The span determines the minimum number of sweep points. Pressing
Preset
(when
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
) sets
Scale Type to Lin
.
Sweep time is auto-coupled when
Scale Type (Log)
is selected.
Marker Span Pair, Frequency Offset, Input Mixer (Ext), Segmented (On)
,
Signal Track (On)
, and
Demod View (On)
, are not available when
Scale
Type (Log)
is selected.
FREQUENCY, Scale Type (Log)
is not available when
Frequency Offset
,
Segmented (On)
,
Input Mixer (Ext)
,
Zero Span, Signal Track (On)
is selected.
Key Access:
FREQUENCY Channel
100 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Help
Help
Accesses a short description of any front panel or menu key. After pressing
Help
, an explanation of the next key pressed will appear on the display. After the information is displayed, press any key to remove the help window. Pressing
ESC
allows you to remove the help window without changing functions.
Chapter 2 101
Front-Panel Key Reference
Input/Output
Input Z Corr
50
Ω 75Ω
Coupling
AC DC
Table 2-1
CAUTION
Input/Output
Sets the input impedance for voltage-to-power conversions. The impedance you select is for computational purposes only, since the actual impedance is set by internal hardware to 50
Ω (except for
Option 1DP). The default is 50
Ω (75 Ω with Option 1DP). Setting the computational input impedance to 75
Ω is useful when using a 75 Ω to
50
Ω adapter to measure a 75 Ω device on an analyzer having a 50 Ω input impedance.
Key Access:
Input/Output
Only available in Agilent models E4402B or E4407B with Option UKB,
and E4404B or E4405B. Specifies alternating current (ac) or direct current (dc) coupling at the analyzer input. Selecting ac coupling blocks any dc voltage at the analyzer input, but also decreases the frequency range of the analyzer. Input coupling is set to ac by an instrument preset (With
Preset Type
set to
Factory
). Some amplitude specifications apply only when coupling is set to dc. Refer to the appropriate amplitude specifications and characteristics for your analyzer.
Selecting Input Coupling
ESA Model # AC
Frequency Range
100 kHz to 3 GHz
DC
Frequency Range
100 Hz to 3 GHz E4402B with
Option UKB
E4404B
E4404B with
Option UKB
E4405B
E4405B with
Option UKB
E4407B with
Option UKB
100 kHz to 6.7 GHz
100 kHz to 6.7 GHz
9 kHz to 6.7 GHz
100 Hz to 6.7 GHz
100 kHz to 13.2 GHz 9 kHz to 13.2 GHz
100 kHz to 13.2 GHz 100 Hz to 13.2 GHz
10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 100 Hz to 26.5 GHz
When operating in dc coupled mode, ensure protection of the input mixer by limiting the input level to 0 Vdc, +30 dBm.
Key Access:
Input/Output
102 Chapter 2
Amptd Ref
(f=50 MHz)
On Off
Amptd Ref Out
(f=50 MHz)
On Off
Input Mixer
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Input/Output
Agilent E4401B and E4411B only. Turns the internal amplitude reference signal on or off. When the internal amplitude reference signal is on, the RF input is disabled.
Key Access:
Input/Output
Agilent E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B and E4408B only.
Turns the external amplitude reference signal on or off.
Key Access:
Input/Output
Agilent E4407B with Option AYZ only. Accesses the following Input
Mixer menu keys:
Key Access:
Input/Output
Input Mixer
Int Ext
Allows you to select either the internal or an externally connected mixer as the input device. Selecting
Input Mixer (Ext)
activates all other keys in the Input
Mixer menu and changes the attenuator annotation to
Ext Mix
. When
Input Mixer (Ext)
is selected, the attenuator function in the
AMPLITUDE
key menu is unavailable.
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
When
Input Mixer (Ext)
is selected,
FREQUENCY, Scale Type (Log)
is not available.
NOTE
NOTE
Input Mixer (Ext)
is not available when
FREQUENCY, Scale Type (Log)
is selected.
Ext Mix Band
Accesses the Ext Mix Band key menus and allows you to select one of the pre-defined bands corresponding to the external mixer being used. The start and stop frequencies and a letter corresponding to the waveguide band in use, appears on each menu key. If
Mixer Type (Presel)
is selected, selecting
(K)
,
(E)
,
(W)
,
(F)
,
(D)
,
(G)
,
(Y)
, or
(J)
is not allowed. If
Harmonic (Man)
is selected, the word
User
will appear on the
Ext Mix Band
key.
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
Segmented sweep is only operable for this function when center frequency and span are set within the frequency band of the mixer. If the mixer range is changed, segmented sweep is turned off.
Chapter 2 103
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Input/Output
Signal Ident
On Off
Activates a signal identification algorithm when
Signal Ident (On)
is selected, that either removes or aids with the identification of multiple and image responses of true input signals. Multiple and image responses maybe generated when using unpreselected external mixers.
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
Segmented sweep is not available when
Signal Ident (On)
is selected.
If the input signal is too broad band or unstable for the identification process to properly identify it, turn off the signal identification and look for two similar responses separated by approximately 642.8 MHz (twice the 321.4 MHz first IF). If a “–” mixer mode (for example: 8–) is active, the right member of the response pair is the correct response; if a “+” mixer mode is active, the left member of the response pair is the correct response.
The amplitude accuracy of the analyzer is degraded when signal identification is active, and the message
Signal Ident On, Amptd Uncal
will appear on the display.
104 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Input/Output
Signal ID
Mode
Allows you to select either of the following types of signal identification methods:
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
Image Suppress
Selects a signal identification mode that attempts to suppress all but valid responses by mathematically removing all image and multiple responses of signals present at the mixer input. The analyzer internally acquires the data in a two sweep sequence, operates on the acquired data, and displays the result in Trace 1. Since two measurements are taken for each display cycle, the display update rate is reduced.
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
,
Signal ID Mode
Image Shift
Allows the analyzer, in a two sweep sequence, to place data from the first sweep in Trace 1, and data from the second (frequency shifted) sweep in
Trace 2. Signal responses of Trace 1 and
Trace 2 having the same horizontal position are considered to be in the current band and therefore can be analyzed with the amplitude and frequency measurement systems of the analyzer. All other responses are invalid and should be ignored.
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
,
Signal ID Mode
Mixer Config
Accesses the Mixer Config menu keys allowing you to manually set the harmonic, control the preselected mixers, and adjust the internal bias source for use with mixers requiring bias.
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
Harmonic
Auto Man
The harmonic value with its associated sign is automatically determined from the Ext Mix Band selected when in
Harmonic (Auto)
mode.
Harmonic (Man)
allows you to enter a harmonic value when required. If the harmonic mode for the external mixer is listed as “8 –”, for example, enter the harmonic
Chapter 2 105
Front-Panel Key Reference
Input/Output
Mixer Type
Presel Unpre
Allows you to select which type of mixer is in use.
Mixer Type (Presel)
activates a tuning signal that is routed to the
PRESEL TUNE OUTPUT
connector on the rear panel of the analyzer. This signal has a sensitivity of 1.5V/GHz of the LO frequency and drives the tune input of the HP/Agilent 11974 series of preselected mixers. The sweep rate in
Presel
mode is limited to 40 MHz/msec.
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
,
Mixer Config
Mixer Bias
On Off
number as “– 8”. The minus sign indicates that the tuned frequency is below the desired LO harmonic by the
IF of 321.4 MHz. Similarly, if the harmonic mode of the external mixer is listed as “8 +”, enter the harmonic number as “8”.
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
,
Mixer Config
Mixer Bias
(On)
activates and allows adjustment of an internal bias source for use with external mixers. The bias signal is present on the center conductor of the IF INPUT connector on the front panel. The mixer bias will be
Off
if
Harmonic (Auto)
and
Mixer Type (Presel)
is selected.
Key Access:
Input/Output
,
Input Mixer
,
Mixer Config
106 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Marker
Select Marker
1 2 3 4
Normal
Delta
Marker
Accesses the marker control keys which select the type and number of markers and turns them on and off. Markers are diamond-shaped characters that identify points of traces. Up to four pairs of markers may appear on the display simultaneously; only one pair can be controlled at a time. The marker that is controlled is called the “active” marker. Pressing
Marker
activates the
Normal
menu key.
Selects one of the four possible markers. A marker that has already been turned on will become active when it is selected. If a marker has been turned on and assigned to a specific trace, it will become active on that trace if that marker is selected.
Key Access:
Marker
Activates a single frequency marker at the center position of the active trace if a marker is not already displayed. If a marker is displayed before the
Normal
function is enabled, the marker is enabled at the position of the selected marker. The marker number is indicated above the marker. Use the data controls to position the marker. The knob and/or Up/Down keys move the marker left or right. If a value is entered from the numeric keypad, the marker is moved to the trace point nearest to that value. Annotation in the active function block and in the upper-right corner of the display indicates the frequency and amplitude of the marker (time and amplitude, if in zero span.) The marker stays on the trace at the horizontal screen position where it was placed unless
Signal Track
, or a “marker to” key function (such as
Mkr
→
CF
,
Mkr
→ RL
,
Mkr
→ CF STEP
,
Mkr
∆ Span
, or
Min Search
) is selected.Pressing
Normal
turns off the
Delta
function and moves the active marker to the delta marker position.
Key Access:
Marker
Activates a second marker at the position of the first marker. (If no marker is present, two markers appear at the center of the display.) The amplitude and frequency (or time) of the first marker is fixed. The marker number is indicated above the delta marker, and the same number is indicated with an R (for example, 1R) above the reference marker. Use the data controls to position the delta marker. Annotation in the active function block and in the upper-right corner of the display indicates the frequency (or time) and amplitude differences between the two markers. The markers will be turned off if the scale type is changed between log and linear. (For information on using this function while in segmented sweep, refer to
“Interaction with Other Analyzer Functions”
in the segmented sweep section of this chapter which begins on
.)
Key Access:
Marker
Chapter 2 107
NOTE
NOTE
Delta Pair
Ref Delta
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Marker
Pressing
Delta
again moves the reference marker to the active marker position, so you can make delta measurements from differing reference points without having to turn off the markers and begin again.
The delta marker function permits signal-to-noise measurements provided the signal is a single spectral component (sinusoid). Place a normal marker on the signal, press
Delta
, place the delta marker in the noise, and activate
Marker Noise
(see below). The indicated amplitude difference is signal-to-noise/Hz.
Enters a mode that allows adjustment of both the
Ref
(start) and
Delta
(stop) markers independently. Pressing
Delta Pair
, toggles between the reference and delta markers. The start marker number is indicated with a number and an R above the marker (for example, 1R) and the delta marker is indicated with a marker number. This mode is useful in functions such as
Band Power
. (For information on using this function
while in segmented sweep, refer to “Interaction with Other Analyzer
in the segmented sweep section of this chapter which begins on
.)
Key Access:
Marker
Ref and Delta markers maintain their displayed x-axis location, but not their frequency values when you change a parameter that redefines the x-axis scale. Reset these markers when parameters such as Span or
Center Freq are changed.
Span Pair
Span Center
NOTE
Enters a mode that allows adjustment of both the ref and delta markers. Pressing
Span Pair
, toggles between the span and center markers. The start marker number is indicated with a number and an R above the marker (for example, 1R) and the stop marker is indicated with a marker number. Adjusting the span changes the frequency difference between the two markers while maintaining the midpoint between the two markers at a fixed frequency. Changing the center changes the center point between the two markers while maintaining the frequency difference. This mode is useful in functions such as
Band Power
. (For information on using this function while in segmented sweep, refer to
“Interaction with Other Analyzer Functions”
in the
segmented sweep section of this chapter which begins on “Segmented” on page 149 .)
Span Pair is not available when
FREQUENCY
,
Scale Type (Log)
is selected.
Key Access:
Marker
108 Chapter 2
Off
Select Marker
1 2 3 4
Marker Trace
Auto 1 2 3
Readout
Front-Panel Key Reference
Marker
Turns off the marker that has been selected by the
Select Marker 1 2 3 4
key.
Off
also turns off functions related to the selected marker such as signal track and demodulation. It also removes marker annotation from the display.
Key Access:
Marker
Selects one of the four possible markers. A marker that has already been turned on will become active when it is selected. If a marker has already been turned on and assigned to a specific trace, it will become active on that trace if that marker is selected.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
Assigns a marker to a trace. Pressing
Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3
will activate a marker on trace 1 if there are no markers turned on. If a marker is currently active, press
Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3
until
1
,
2
, or
3
is underlined. The active marker will be moved to the selected trace.
Selecting the
Auto
mode will move the marker to the trace that is automatically selected. The selection order is to look for the lowest numbered trace in the following order of trace modes: clear-write, max- hold, min-hold, view-mode. If there are no traces in any of these modes, it selects trace 1.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
Accesses the following menu keys that allow you to change the active marker readout.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
Frequency
Sets the marker to
Frequency
. The default selection in non-zero spans, displays the absolute frequency of a normal marker or the frequency of the delta marker relative to the reference marker.
Period
Time
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
,
Readout
Sets the marker readout to
Period
. Displays the reciprocal of the above frequency.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
,
Readout
Sets the marker readout to
Time
. The default selection in zero span, displays the time interval between a normal marker and the start of the sweep or the time of the delta marker relative to the reference marker.
Key Access:
Marker, More, Readout
Inverse Time
Sets the marker readout to
Inverse Time
. Displays the reciprocal of the above time interval.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
,
Readout
Chapter 2 109
Function
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Marker
Accesses the following marker function menu keys listed below.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
Band Power
Indicates the power over that part of the trace between the reference and active markers. If only one marker is present when you press
Band Power
, a second marker is placed at the same location as the first marker. To reposition the markers, press
Marker
to access
Delta Pair
and
Span Pair
keys. If
Detector (Auto)
is selected, average detection is used for RBW
≥ 1 kHz, and Sample detection is used for RBW
< 1 KHz.
The repeatability of your band power marker measurement can be impacted by the current number of sweep points being used. If you only have a few sweep points in the measurement band of interest, then small changes will have a direct impact on the measurement result. Increasing your number of sweep points will decrease that affect and improve the repeatability.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
,
Function
For best accuracy, set the video bandwidth to at least ten times the resolution bandwidth to minimize its averaging effect.
Band Power
has no meaning in zero span, and the indicated value is independent of signal level and marker placement.
Marker Noise
Reads out the average noise level, referenced to a 1 Hz noise power bandwidth. If no marker is present, a marker appears at the center of the display. When
Marker Noise is enabled in resolution bandwidths of
1 kHz and above, the auto coupled detector selection is set to Average and the Avg Type is set to Power because the trade-off between sweep time and variance of the result is best with power Average detection. (When the
Average
detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear, the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds.) In resolution bandwidths < 1 kHz, the auto coupled detector selection is Sample. However, the Marker
Noise function generates appropriately corrected values for all supported detector modes. If the marker delta function is on and the noise marker is activated and moved to measure the noise floor, the marker readout will display the signal-to-noise ratio.
110 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Marker
NOTE
NOTE
Off
Marker Table
On Off
Marker All Off
You can use
Delta
and
Marker Noise
to indicate noise level relative to sinusoidal signal (signal to noise). Activate the delta marker before pressing
Marker Noise
or the reference marker units may be incorrect.
The noise marker averages 5% of the trace data values
(one-half a horizontal division), centered on the location of the marker on the frequency or time scale. Marker noise indicates noise power density per Hertz or noise voltage per root Hertz depending upon the amplitude units selected. The number of sweep points is noted in parenthesis to the right of the sweep time in the lower right corner of the graticule.
Note that the data values averaged will not always be symmetrical with respect to the marker position. If the marker is positioned within 2.5% of the beginning of the trace (one-quarter division), the trace data values in the first half-division will be averaged. Similarly, if the marker is positioned within 2.5% of the end of the trace, the trace data values in the last half-division will be averaged.
Do not use Marker Noise to evaluate the displayed average noise level of the analyzer relative to the specification. Read the displayed average noise level directly from the display or use the normal marker. Refer to
Application Note 150 for a discussion of how noise is displayed on a spectrum analyzer.
To guarantee accurate data for noise-like signals, a correction for equivalent noise bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth is measured and included in the measurement. The Marker Noise function accuracy is optimal when the detector is set either to Average or to
Sample because neither of these detectors peak-biases the noise.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
,
Function
Turns off the active function markers.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
,
Function
Compresses the graticule and displays marker information in a table.
The information includes the marker number, trace number, marker type, X axis value, and the amplitude.
Key Access:
Marker
,
More
Turns off all of the markers, including markers used for signal track and demodulation. Marker annotation is also removed.
Chapter 2 111
Front-Panel Key Reference
Marker
→
Mkr
→ CF
NOTE
Mkr
→ CF Step
Mkr
→ Start
Mkr
→ Stop
Mkr
∆ → Span
NOTE
Mkr
→ Ref Lvl
Marker
→
Accesses the following marker function menu keys:
Sets the center frequency of the analyzer to the marker frequency. In
Delta mode,
Mkr
→ CF
sets the center frequency to the marker delta value.
Mkr
→ CF
is not available in zero span.
When the frequency scale is in log mode, the center frequency is not at the center of the display.
Key Access:
Marker
→
Changes the center-frequency step size to match the value of the active marker. Press
Frequency
then
CF Step Auto Man
to view the step size. If marker delta is active, the step size will be set to the frequency difference between the markers. This function can be used to step from one signal harmonic to another.
Mkr
→ CF Step
is not available in zero span.
Key Access:
Marker
→
Changes the start frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the active marker. In Delta mode,
Mkr
→ Start
sets the start frequency to the marker delta value.
Mkr
→ Start
is not available in zero span.
Key Access:
Marker
→
Changes the stop frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the active marker. In Delta mode,
Mkr
→ Stop
sets the stop frequency to the marker delta value.
Mkr
→ Stop
is not available in zero span.
Key Access:
Marker
→
Sets the start and stop frequencies to the values of the delta markers.
The marker is then set to normal at the center frequency.
Mkr
∆ → Span is not available if the marker is off, or in zero span.
Key Access:
Marker
→
The above menu keys are not available when
Segmented (On)
is selected.
Changes the reference level to the active marker value, moving the marked point to the reference level (top line of the graticule). In Delta mode,
Mkr
→ Ref Lvl
sets the reference level to the amplitude difference between the markers. (For example, if the difference is –15 dB, the reference level will be set to –15 dBm.)
Key Access:
Marker
→
112 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
MEASURE (Spectrum Analysis Mode)
NOTE
Meas Setup
MEASURE (Spectrum Analysis Mode)
In the Spectrum Analysis mode (see the
Mode
key), this key displays a menu that lets you make transmitter power measurements such as adjacent channel power, occupied bandwidth, and harmonic distortion measurements, refer to Volume 2, One-Button Power Measurements
User’s and Programmer’s Reference for more information about these measurements. If other modes are available and have been selected, the measurements for that particular mode will be displayed. Some common settings can be made for these measurements using the function under the
Mode Setup
key. For example, you may select one of several radio standards available by pressing
Mode Setup
,
Radio Std
.
The measurements described in Volume 2, One-Button Power
Measurements User’s and Programmer’s Reference are available in SA mode (see
Mode
key). Other measurements are available in other modes if an optional personality is installed, use the appropriate user’s guide for information about those modes.
Displays the setup menu for the currently selected measurement. The
Meas Setup
menu choices depend on the currently selected Mode and
Measurement. This menu is empty if no measurement is active. No measurement is active if
Meas Off
is selected in the
Measure
menu.
Chapter 2 113
Front-Panel Key Reference
Meas Control
Restart
Measure
Single Cont
Pause
Meas Control
If a measurement is active, then this key accesses a menu to pause, resume, or restart one of the measurements available in the
MEASURE
key menu.
Meas Control
also allows you to select between continuous and single sweeps/measurements.
Press
MEASURE
and then select one of the available measurements.
Once the desired measurement is selected, press
Meas Control
.
Meas
Control
accesses the following keys:
Performs the same functions as the
front-panel key.It repeats your measurement from the beginning. Pressing
Restart
while a measurement is being made will halt the current measurement at the first possible stopping point and repeat the measurement.
Key Access:
Meas Control
Measure (Single)
takes one measurement sweep and display the measurement results.
Measure (Cont)
allows you to continuously run a measurement, displaying the results after each measurement cycle.
Key Access:
Meas Control
Pauses the measurement. Pressing
Pause
will toggle between pausing and resuming your measurement. The key label will toggle between
Pause
and
Resume
. If an averaged measurement was in progress, the average counter is frozen and the measurement sweeping is halted.
Key Access:
Meas Control
114 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
MODE
MODE
Selects the measurement mode of your analyzer.
Spectrum Analysis
mode is the default mode and is for general purpose measurement use.
Additional measurement modes can be added to your instrument memory. Example modes include Phase Noise (requires Option 226),
Noise Figure (requires Option 219), GSM (requires Option BAH) and cdmaOne (requires Option BAC).
Other modes, besides Spectrum Analysis, must be installed/licensed in your instrument before they will appear in the
Mode
menu. Refer to the individual measurement personality mode manuals for instructions on how to install the firmware. Some modes also require the presence of specific hardware.
Selects the spectrum analysis measurement mode for your analyzer.
Spectrum
Analysis
Mode Setup
(Spectrum
Analysis Mode)
Enables you to change measurement settings common to all measurements in the
MEASURE
menu. In Spectrum Analysis mode, there are several built-in power measurements. Parameters that you set in the Mode Setup menu affect all of these measurements, see
Volume 2, One-Button Power Measurements User’s and Programmer’s
Reference for more information.
Chapter 2 115
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Next Window
Next Window
Allows you to select the active window in functions which support split-screen display modes, such as zone span. In split-screen display modes, pressing
Zoom
allows you to switch between split-screen and
full-sized displays of the active window. See also “Zoom” .
The active window is indicated by a solid green box around the window.
116 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Peak Search
NOTE
Meas Tools
Peak Search
Places a marker on the highest peak based on the settings of the
, for more information on the effect of setting
Peak Search Type
to
Max Value
or
Excursion & Threshold
. When you preset the analyzer, the
Peak Search
Type
is set to
Max Value
unless you save
Peak Search Type
(Excursion &
Threshold) as part of the user preset conditions and set
Preset
to
User
.
, for more information on presetting the analyzer.
All peak search functions ignore the LO feedthrough. The process for determining if the Peak is the LO feedthrough takes into account Start
Frequency, Span, Resolution Bandwidth, Resolution Bandwidth shape factor, and Frequency Accuracy. If there is no point of inflection within the LO feedthrough range, the point on the trace with maximum amplitude, that is higher in frequency than the LO feedthrough range, will be selected. Peak Search may locate the LO feedthrough when
FREQUENCY
,
Scale Type
(Log) is selected.
Accesses the following frequently used menu keys which are replicated here for your convenience.
Peak Search
Performs peak search as described above.
Key access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
Next Pk Right
Refer to
.
Key access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
Next Pk Left
Refer to
of this chapter.
Delta
Function
Key access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
Refer to
Mkr
→ CF
Key access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
Refer to Mkr
→ CF on page 120.
Key access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
Mkr
→ Ref Lvl
Refer to Mkr
→ Ref on page 121.
Key access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
Refer to
.
Key Access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
Band Power
Refer to “Band Power” on page 110
.
Key Access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
,
Chapter 2 117
Next Peak
Next Pk Right
Next Pk Left
Min Search
Pk-Pk Search
Continuous Pk
On Off
Front-Panel Key Reference
Peak Search
Function
Marker Noise
Refer to
Key Access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
,
Function
Off
Refer to
Key Access:
Peak Search
,
Meas Tools
,
Function
Places the marker on the next highest peak. The signal peak must exceed the peak threshold value by the peak excursion value. If there is
no peak, the marker will not move. (Also see the
and
key descriptions.)
Key Access:
Search
Moves the marker to the next peak to the right of the current marker.
The signal peak must exceed the peak threshold value by the peak excursion value. If there is no peak to the right, the marker will not move and the No Peak Found error message will appear on the
key descriptions.)
Key Access:
Search
Moves the marker to the next peak to the left of the current marker.
The signal peak must exceed the peak threshold value by the peak excursion value. If there is no peak to the left, the marker will not move and the No Peak Found error message will appear on the display. (Also see the
key descriptions.)
Key Access:
Search
Moves the active marker to the minimum detected amplitude value.
Key Access:
Search
Finds and displays the frequency (or time, if in zero span) and amplitude differences between the highest and lowest trace points.
Key Access:
Search
When a marker is placed on a signal and
Continuous Pk (On)
is pressed, the marker will remain on the signal even if the signal frequency changes, as long as the amplitude of the signal does not change by more than 3 dB from one sweep to another.
If the signal is lost, an attempt will be made to find it again and maintain the marker on the signal peak. If there are other signals on screen near the same amplitude, one of them may be found instead.
Signals near 0 Hz cannot be maintained effectively, because they cannot
118 Chapter 2
NOTE
N dB Points
On Off
Search Criteria
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Peak Search
be distinguished from the LO feedthrough, which is excluded by intent from the search algorithm.
This function is intended to maintain the marker on signals with a frequency that is changing, and an amplitude that is not changing.
Key Access:
Search
,
More
Activates the N dB function. Pressing
N dB Points (On)
turns on the
N dB feature and activates two arrows that are N dB down from the marker. The frequency difference between the two arrows will be displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the display. If the feature is unable to find data N dB below the marker, the value of –100 Hz will be displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
For example, N dB Points can be used to measure the 3 dB bandwidth of a filter in a transmission test with the tracking generator. The default value is –3 dB. Possible values range from
−1.00 dB to
−80.00 dB. You can enter values to a resolution of 0.01 dB using the numeric key pad, 0.1 dB using the knob, or 10 dB using the step keys.
The N dB function follows the active marker. If you turn on a marker after N dB Points has been activated, the arrows will follow that marker. If the marker associated with N dB Points moves, the arrows will move with the marker unless there is no data N dB below the marker.
Key Access:
Search
,
More
Accesses the following menu keys:
Key access:
Search
,
More
Peak Excursion
Sets the minimum amplitude variation of signals that the marker can identify as a peak. If a value of 10 dB is selected, the marker moves only to peaks that rise and fall more than 10 dB above the peak threshold value.
Pressing
Preset
(when
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
) or turning on power resets the excursion to 6 dB and the threshold to 90 dB below the reference level.
Two signal peaks, which are so close together that the amplitude drop between them is less than the peak-excursion value, are not recognized as two peaks. A signal peak is recognized only if it has a peak excursion drop above the noise floor, on both sides of the signal.
When the peak excursion value is 6 dB or higher, the marker-peaking functions do not recognize signals less than the peak excursion value above the noise floor. To correct this, when measuring signals near the noise floor, the excursion value can be reduced even further.
Chapter 2 119
Front-Panel Key Reference
Peak Search
To prevent the marker from identifying noise as signals, reduce the noise floor variance to a value less than the peak-excursion value by reducing the video bandwidth or by using video averaging.
Key access:
Peak Search
,
More
,
Search Criteria
Peak Threshold
Sets the minimum amplitude of signals that the marker can identify as a peak. For example, if a value of –90 dBm is selected, the marker moves only to peaks that rise and fall more than the peak excursion value above –90 dBm. Pressing
Preset
or turning the Power on resets the excursion to 6 dB and the threshold to
−90 dBm.
The value of the threshold appears in the active-function block and on the lower-left side of the display. The threshold level does not influence the trace memory or marker position. The value of the peak threshold level can be changed using the step keys, the knob, or the numeric keypad. Pressing any digit, 0 through 9, on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu.
Key access:
Peak Search
,
More
,
Search Criteria
Peak Search
Type
Allows you to select the peak search mode.
Key access:
Peak Search
,
More
,
Search Criteria
Max Value
When
Peak Search Type
is set to
Max
Value
, a peak search places a marker on the highest peak, excluding the LO feedthrough peak.
Key Access:
Peak Search
,
More
,
Search
Criteria
,
Peak Search Type
Excursion &
Threshold
When
Peak Search
is set to
Excursion &
Threshold
, a peak search places a marker on a peak that meets the
Peak
Excursion
and
Peak Threshold
parameters. If
Peak Search Type
is set to
Excursion &Threshold
and no peak satisfies the selected parameters, a marker is placed at the center of the trace, and the error message, No Peak
Found
on page 155 , to remove the error
message.
Key Access:
Peak Search
,
More
,
Search
120 Chapter 2
Peak Table
Front-Panel Key Reference
Peak Search
Criteria
,
Peak Search Type
Accesses the following
Peak Table
menu keys:
Key Access:
Peak Search
,
More 1 of 2
Peak Table
On Off
Displays a list of up to ten signal peaks that is updated at the end of each sweep. The peaks can be sorted in order by descending amplitude or by ascending frequency. Peaks above or below the display line can be excluded from the table. The peak table function works with trace 1 only.
Key Access:
Search
,
More
,
Peak Table
Peak Sort
Freq Amptd
Switches the peak table sorting routine between listing the peaks in order by descending amplitude or by ascending frequency.
Key Access:
Search
,
More
,
Peak Table
Peak Readout
Accesses the following
Peak Readout
menu keys:
Key Access:
Search
,
More
,
Peak Table
Normal
Shows up to ten signal peaks.
Key Access:
Search
,
More
,
Peak Table
,
Peak Readout
> Display Line
Shows only peaks above the display line.
Key Access:
Search
,
More
,
Peak Table
,
Peak Readout
< Display Line
Shows only peaks below the display line.
Key Access:
Search
,
More
,
Peak Table
,
Peak Readout
Chapter 2 121
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Preset
Preset
Provides a known convenient starting point of the instrument state for making measurements. You can select whether a user preset, mode preset, or factory preset is performed. When you press
Preset
, the default is
Mode
preset, which will set the analyzer to the default state for the current mode. The user preset is user-defined using the
Save
User Preset
function in the
System
menu (Press
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Save User Preset
.) The
Preset Type
selection (
User
,
Mode
or
Factory
) can be set by pressing
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Preset Type.
The
Preset
menu keys are only available when the
Preset Type
key in the
System
menu is set to
User
. Press
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Preset
Type
,
User
.
If
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
in the
System
menu:
Pressing the
Preset
front-panel key performs a factory preset, which performs the following:
• Resets the analyzer to Spectrum Analyzer (SA) mode.
• Brings up the
Freq/Channel
menu.
• Sets certain conditions to their default values.
• Performs a processor test, but does not affect alignment data.
• Clears both the input and output buffers and clears all trace data.
• Sets the amplitude values of trace 2 and 3 to the bottom of the screen.
• Amplitude-correction factors are turned off, but remain in analyzer memory.
• Limit line testing is turned off, but the limit line tables remain in analyzer memory.
• Segmented sweep is turned off, but the segmented sweep tables remain in analyzer memory.
• The status byte is set to 0.
See Table 2-2 on page 123 for the conditions established by performing
a factory preset.
For Agilent E4402B or E4407Bwith Option UKB, E4404B, and E4405B only, you can specify alternating current (ac) or direct current (dc) coupling at the analyzer input. Selecting ac coupling blocks any dc voltage at the analyzer input, but also decreases the frequency range of the analyzer. Make sure the analyzer is dc coupled when measuring below 100 kHz for Agilent E4402B, E4404B, and E4405B and below
10 MHz for Agilent E4407B. (See “Input/Output”
in this chapter for more information on this setting.)
If
Preset Type
is set to
User
in the
System
menu:
122 Chapter 2
NOTE
NOTE
Table 2-2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Preset
Pressing the
Preset
front-panel key brings up the
User Preset
,
Mode
Preset
, and
Factory Preset
menu keys.
• If
User Preset
is pressed, the user preset state is recalled. To set the user preset state, change the analyzer settings as desired, then press
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Save User Preset
.
• If
Mode Preset
is pressed, the current mode settings are reset to the factory defaults. Pressing
Mode Preset
does not change the mode.
• If
Factory Preset
is pressed, a factory preset will be performed as described above.
Recalling any state, including the user preset state, will affect the conditions of more parameters than are affected by a factory preset. For example, external preamp gain and input impedance correction are not affected by a factory preset but may be affected by a user preset.
In the
System
menu, if
Power On
is set to
Preset
, and
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
, turning on the analyzer performs a factory preset. The last state of the analyzer (before it was turned off) is recalled if
Power On
is set to
Last
. The user preset state is recalled if
Power On
is set to
Preset
and
Preset Type
is set to
User
.
Factory Preset Conditions
Amplitude correction factors
Amplitude Ref (Signal)
Amplitude units off off
50
Ω input – dBm log
75
Ω input – dBmV log on Annotation and graticule display
Attenuation
Center frequency:
E4401B and E4411B
E4402B and E4403B
E4404B
E4405B
E4407B and E4408B
CF step size
Coupled functions
Detector
Display line level
10 dB (auto-coupled)
750 MHz
1.5 GHz
3.35 GHz
6.6 GHz
13.25 GHz
10% of span all set to AUTO
Peak (auto-coupled)
–25 dBm, display off
Chapter 2 123
Table 2-2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Preset
Factory Preset Conditions (Continued)
Frequency (scale type)
Frequency offset
IF Gain
Input Coupling
1
E4402B & E4407B with
Option UKB, E4404B, and
E4405B
Int Preamp
Limit line testing
Log scale (Amplitude)
Marker count
Marker counter resolution
Markers
Max Mixer level
Measure
Radio Std
Reference level
Reference level offset
Reference level position
Resolution bandwidth
Span
E4401B and E4411B
E4402B and E4403B
E4404B
E4405B
E4407B and E4408B
Speaker
SRQ mask
Start Frequency
Linear
0 Hz
Auto
AC
1.5 GHz
3.0 GHz
6.7 GHz
13.2 GHz
26.5 GHz
Off
40
0 Hz off off
10 dB/division off auto-coupled off
–10 dBm
Meas Off
None
0 dBm in power-on units
0 dB top (10th) graticule
3 MHz (auto-coupled)
124 Chapter 2
Table 2-2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Preset
Factory Preset Conditions (Continued)
Stop Frequency
E4401B and E4411B
E4402B and E4403B
E4404B
E4405B
E4407B and E4408B
State Registers
Segmented Sweep
Sweep
Points
Sweep Time
E4401B and E4411B
E4402B and E4403B
E4404B
E4405B
E4407B and E4408B
1.5 GHz
3.0 GHz
6.7 GHz
13.2 GHz
26.5 GHz unaffected off continuous
4 ms (auto coupled)
5 ms (auto coupled)
16.75 ms (auto coupled)
33 ms (auto coupled)
265 ms (auto coupled)
Sweep 401
Threshold level –90 dBm, display off
Title cleared
Trace 1
Trace 2 clear-write blank, at bottom of display
Trace 3
Trigger
Trig Delay Off
Trig Offset Off
VBW/RBW ratio
Video averaging blank, at bottom of display free run
1
µsec
0 sec
1.000 X (auto-coupled) off
Video bandwidth 3 MHz (auto-coupled)
1. E4401B, E4402B without Option UKB, E4403B, and E4411B have fixed AC coupling. E4407B without Option UKB and E4408B have fixed DC coupling.
Chapter 2 125
Front-Panel Key Reference
Preset
User Preset
Mode Preset
Factory Preset
This key is only available when the
Preset Type
key is set to
User
. Press
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Preset Type
,
User
.
User Preset
loads the analyzer configuration that existed when
Save
User Preset
was pressed. If
Save User Preset
has never been pressed, the factory preset state is loaded. If the user preset state has been saved but the load fails for any reason, the error message: Unable to load user state
is displayed in the status line and the state is reset to whatever it was before the
Preset
key was pressed. This can sometimes happen if firmware has been upgraded or applications have been
(un)installed after the user preset state was saved.
Save User Preset
can be accessed by pressing
System
,
Power On/Preset
.
Key Access:
Preset
This key is only available when the
Preset Type
key is set to
User
. Press
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Preset Type
,
User
.
Mode Preset
does not change the mode. It only resets the current mode settings to the factory defaults and to continuous sweeps/measurements.
Key Access:
Preset
This key is only available when the
Preset Type
key is set to
User
. Press
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Preset Type
,
User
.
A factory preset is executed so all of the instrument modes are returned to the factory default state (i.e. Spectrum Analysis Mode and continuous sweep.) If you are not already in the spectrum analysis mode, it switches to that mode. A factory preset will not reset
“persistent” functions such as GPIB address, time/date display style, or auto alignment state to the factory defaults.
Key Access:
Preset
Save User Preset
This key is only available when the
Preset Type
key is set to
User
. Press
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Preset Type
,
User
.
This key saves the current state of the analyzer into the
User Preset
state for recalling when the instrument is user preset. After you save a state here, you must go to the
Preset Type
key and select
User
in order to have this state used as the preset state.
Key Access:
Preset
126 Chapter 2
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Option A4H (GPIB and Parallel) or Option 1AX (RS-232 and Parallel) only.
initiates an output of the display data, without an external controller, to a previously specified graphics printer.
Refer to “Printer
Setup and Operation” in your Getting Started or
Programmer’s Guide for detailed information about printing.
Press the
key to immediately print the screen to the currently-defined printer. The screen remains frozen (no further sweeps are taken) until the data transfer to the printer is complete. Refer to the
key description in this chapter for more information about the structure and definitions of the printer keys.
If you need to abort a print in progress, use the
ESC
(escape) key.
Printing requires an I/O interface. The Agilent ESA Spectrum
Analyzers Programmer’s Guide, included with the optional interfaces, provides interface details. Refer to “Printer Setup and Operation” in the
Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzers Getting Started Guide for more information about printing.
Chapter 2 127
Front-Panel Key Reference
Print Setup
Printer Type
Define Custom
Print Setup
Option A4H (GPIB and Parallel) or 1AX (RS-232 and Parallel) only.
Accesses the menu keys which allow you to define a printer and select printer options.
Accesses the Printer Type menu keys. When you connect your printer and press the
key, the analyzer will attempt to identify your printer. If identification is unsuccessful,
None
or
Custom
will automatically be set in the Printer Type menu.
Key Access:
Print Setup
None
The Printer Type will automatically be set to when you press the
key with an unsupported printer connected to your analyzer.
None
Custom
Auto
Key Access:
Print Setup
,
Printer Type
When you press the
key and the analyzer cannot identify your printer,
Custom
will automatically be set in the Printer Type menu. Setting the Printer Type menu key to
Custom
allows you to define your printer using the
Define Custom
menu keys.
Key Access:
Print Setup
,
Printer Type
When
Auto
is selected, and the
key is pressed, the analyzer will attempt to communicate with the printer and obtain its identification. If the printer is identified, the print will be successful and no message will appear on the display. If the analyzer is not able to identify the printer, the Printer Type will automatically be set to
Custom
and an error message asking you to press
Define Custom
to set up your printer will be displayed.
If the printer is not supported, the Printer Type will automatically be set to
None
and an error message will inform you that your printer is unsupported.
Key Access:
Print Setup
,
Printer Type
Allows you to define your printer.
Key Access:
Print Setup
,
Printer Type
Language
PCL3 PCL5
Allows you to define your printer as a Hewlett-Packard
PCL3. (Most DeskJets) or Hewlett-Packard PCL5
(LaserJets and DeskJets: 1100,1200,1600,2000 series) printer.
Key Access:
Print Setup
,
Define Custom
128 Chapter 2
Orientation
Prints/Page
1 2
Eject Page
Page Size
Color
On Off
Front-Panel Key Reference
Print Setup
Color Capable
Yes No
Allows you to define the color capability of your printer.
Key Access:
Print Setup
,
Define Custom
Allows you to select either
Portrait
or
Landscape
printing. The
Orientation
key will not function with a PCL3 (HP DeskJet) printer.
Key Access:
Print Setup
Selects the number of prints per page when orientation is set to
Portrait
.
In
Landscape
printing,
Prints/Page
is always set to 1.
Key Access:
Print Setup
Ejects your printed page.
Key Access:
Print Setup
Allows you to select from the following page sizes:
Executive
,
Letter
,
Legal
,
Ledger
,
A4
, and
A3
.
Key Access:
Print Setup, More
Allows you to select between color or black and white printing. This key will not function when pressed unless the connected printer supports color.
Key Access:
Print Setup
,
More
Chapter 2 129
Front-Panel Key Reference
Restart
Restart
If no measurement is active and
Sweep (Single)
is selected, a new sweep is initiated. When in
Average (On)
mode, (
BW/Avg
,
Average
) the averaging function is restarted (the trace is reset and the average number is reset to zero).
If a one-button measurement is selected, it restarts a previously paused measurement at the beginning. If the measurement is active, it will stop it as soon as possible and restart it from the beginning.
Key Access: Front-panel key. It can also be found under
Meas Control
.
130 Chapter 2
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Return
Return
Returns you to the previous menu. Repeated presses of this key move back through previously selected menus (including previous pages selected by the
MORE
key.
When a menu requiring a yes or no key press has been accessed, the
Return
key will not respond.
When entering an alphanumeric value (a screen title or filename), pressing
Return
terminates the entry.
Chapter 2 131
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Save
Save
Executes a save operation as though you were in the
File
,
Save
menu and had pressed
Save Now
. If you have previously used the
File
,
Save
,
Save Now
keys to setup and save a file, the
Save
hardkey will save your file in the same format and to the same location using a new automatically generated filename. If you have not saved a file since power on, a state file (.STA format) will be saved to the C: drive.
For example, if you use the
File
,
Save
menu to configure the analyzer to save Trace 1 in .CSV format on the C: drive, using the automatically generated file name (TRACE001.CSV), then every time the front panel
Save
key is pressed, Trace 1 will be saved in .CSV format and the filename will be incremented (TRACE002.CSV, TRACE003.CSV). This provides a convenient format for saving several files with the same format quickly.
In the event that a valid save cannot be performed because a drive has not been selected, the
Save
key will report the error No drive selected
. In this case, press
File
,
Save
and select a drive.
132 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Single
Single
When analyzer is in continuous sweep mode and not in a measurement
(
Measure
,
Meas Off
), this key changes the sweep control to single sweep and executes a sweep after the trigger condition is met. If the analyzer is already in single sweep, pressing
Single
executes a new sweep after the trigger condition is met.
If Average is on (
BW/Avg
,
Average (On)
), pressing
Single
resets the average trace and starts the average again from a count of zero. Sweeps are averaged until N sweeps are then taken (where N is the average number), and then the sweep is halted.
Some one-button measurements require more than one sweep to complete the measurement. The measurements selected from the functions under the
MEASURE
key set the trigger system to be initiated only once. In this case the trigger condition can be met only once and then all the necessary sweeps will be executed to make the measurement.
Chapter 2 133
CAUTION
NOTE
Amplitude
On Off
CAUTION
Front-Panel Key Reference
Source
Source
Accesses the tracking generator key functions (Options 1DN or 1DQ only). Without Option 1DN or 1DQ, pressing
Source
will cause the error message Option not installed to appear on the analyzer display.
If
Auto Align
is on, the 3 GHz tracking generator will be momentarily retuned to approximately 1.557 GHz between most sweeps. Some devices under test (for example, amplifiers with AGC) may be susceptible to damage due to this momentary retuning. To avoid this momentary retuning, turn the auto align off by pressing
System
,
Alignments
,
Auto Align
,
Off
. Refer to the Specifications Guide for your instrument to learn more information about using the analyzer with
Auto Align set to off.
The output frequency of the 3 GHz tracking generator may not exactly match the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer. This is probably not a problem when using wide resolution bandwidths. However, narrowing the RBW may cause a drop in the displayed signal amplitude as the frequency offset puts the signal out of the center of the RBW filter. For narrower RBWs you may need to do a tracking peak to adjust the tracking generator frequency. See the
Tracking Peak
and
Man
Tracking Adjust
.
Activates (
On
) or deactivates (
Off
) the output power of the tracking generator. The power level can then be adjusted using the numeric keypad, step keys, or knob. Pressing any digit, 0 through 9, on the numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu. See the specifications chapter in the calibration guide for the available output power for your tracking generator.
Key Access:
Source
Power-level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be accidentally damaged. This is because the actual source amplitude will be greater than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer, when the power sweep function is being used.
The source amplitude value is used as the starting amplitude for a power sweep. The ending amplitude for a power sweep is higher then the source amplitude value and it may actually be set to values beyond specified output levels. Therefore, exercise caution when connecting a power-level sensitive device to the tracking generator output.
134 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Source
NOTE
NOTE
Power Sweep
On Off
CAUTION
Attenuation
Auto Man
For spectrum analyzers with Option 1DN or Option 1DQ, the tracking generator must be turned on (
Source
,
Amplitude (On)
) before you set up the segmented sweep table.
When
Amplitude (Off)
is selected, the output attenuation on the Agilent
E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B is set to the maximum attenuation.
Sets the power-sweep function to
On
or
Off
. The value of the power-sweep range is displayed in the active-function block when you press
Power Sweep (On)
. The analyzer continues to sweep the specified frequency range when power sweep is on. (To do a power sweep at a fixed frequency, set the analyzer to zero span at the desired frequency.)
The available power-sweep range is a function of the source attenuator setting. For your instrument’s available power sweep range refer to the appropriate Specifications Guide for your analyzer.
The output power of the tracking generator is swept according to the sweep rate of the analyzer. The output power is always swept from the source power setting to a higher power setting (negative source power sweep values are not allowed).
Power-sweep measurements are particularly useful in making gain compression measurements or output power versus frequency measurements.
When using the power sweep functionality, the actual source amplitude will be greater than the source amplitude indicated. The source amplitude value is the starting amplitude for a power sweep, so the ending amplitude for a power sweep will be higher then the displayed value. As a result, exercise caution when connecting a power-level sensitive device to the tracking generator output.
Key Access:
Source
Allows you to select between automatic and manual adjustment of the tracking generator’s output attenuator. The Agilent E4401B and
E4411B can be manually adjusted from 0 to 60 dB in 10 dB steps. All other Agilent ESA analyzers can be manually adjusted from 0 to 56 dB in 8 dB steps. When auto-coupled, the attenuation function automatically adjusts the attenuator to yield the source amplitude level specified by the
Amplitude On Off
softkey function. For the Agilent
E4401B and E4411B, press
Attenuation (Man)
for power sweeps greater than 10 dB.
Key Access:
Source
Chapter 2 135
Amptd Step
Auto Man
Amptd Offset
Normalize
NOTE
CAUTION
Front-Panel Key Reference
Source
Allows you to set the step size of the power level range of the tracking generator. The default setting is one vertical scale division when in a logarithmic amplitude scale.
Key Access:
Source
Offsets the displayed power of the tracking generator. Using the amplitude offset capability of the tracking generator allows you to take system losses or gains into account, thereby displaying the actual power delivered to the device under test.
Key Access:
Source
Key Access:
Source
Store Ref
(1
→ 3)
Copies trace 1 into trace 3.
Store Ref (1
→ 3)
must be pressed before pressing
Normalize (On)
. If
Normalize (On)
is pressed before
Store Ref (1
→ 3)
, the error message:
Store reference trace before turning on
Normalize
is displayed in the status line, however
Normalize has been activated.
Key Access:
Source
,
More
,
Normalize
Normalize
On Off Normalize (On)
Activates the normalize function. On each sweep, the normalized trace (Trace 3) is subtracted from Trace 1 and the result is added to the normalized reference level. The display shows the result of the following calculation:
Trace 1 – Normalized Trace + Normalized Reference
Level
The trace data is normalized with respect to the normalized reference level, even if the value of the normalized reference level is changed. This function remains in effect on all subsequent sweeps until it is turned off.
Segmented sweep is not available when
Normalize (On)
is selected.
Trace 1 should be in clear write mode prior to setting normalize to on.
The normalize function is most useful for applying correction data to a trace while making a stimulus response measurement with a tracking generator. For example, connect the cables and a thru line, in place of the device to be measured, between the tracking generator and the analyzer input. Notice that the frequency response is not perfectly flat, showing the
136 Chapter 2
Tracking Peak
Front-Panel Key Reference
Source
response of the cables, as well as the flatness of both the tracking generator and the analyzer.
Now press
Store Ref (1
→ 3)
,
Normalize On
. Notice that the displayed trace is now flat, or normalized. The position of the normalized trace can now be moved to a different position on the display by changing the normalized reference position. This may be useful if the device to be tested has positive gain, such as an amplifier. Now replace the thru line with the device under test, and an accurate measurement of the gain or loss can be made.
Key Access:
Source
,
More
,
Normalize
Norm Ref Lvl
Sets the level (in dB) of the normalized reference.
Key Access:
Source
,
More
,
Normalize
Norm Ref Posn
Offsets the displayed trace without affecting the instrument gain or attenuation settings. This allows the displayed trace to be moved without decreasing measurement accuracy. The normalized reference position is indicated with a (>) character on the left side of the display and a (<) character on the right side of the display.
Key Access:
Source
,
More
,
Normalize
Ref Trace
View BLank
Allows you to view or blank the reference trace on the display.
Key Access:
Source
,
More
,
Normalize
Agilent E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B only.
Activates a routine that automatically adjusts fine frequency tracking to obtain the peak response of the tracking generator on the spectrum analyzer display. Tracking Peak is performed in the current resolution bandwidth.
The output frequency of the tracking generator is not exactly matched to the input frequency of the spectrum analyzer which causes tracking error. As you narrow the resolution bandwidth (RBW) you may see the displayed signal level decrease. This is because a frequency offset means the signal will not be at the center of the analyzer’s RBW. The tracking peak process will minimize this error. It can be done automatically with
Tracking Peak
or manually with
Man Track Adj
. (With very narrow RBWs, the manual process may be faster.)
Tracking error is more of a problem when using narrow RBWs or testing a device under test (DUT) with high Q. With a high Q DUT, the tracking generator signal may need to be connected directly to the input of the analyzer, rather than through the DUT, while you do the tracking
Chapter 2 137
Man Track Adj
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Source
peak. For the best measurement accuracy, a tracking peak should be done whenever you reduce the analyzer RBW (especially if the amplitude decreases).
Key Access:
Source
,
More
Agilent E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B only.
Allows you to adjust the frequency of the tracking generator oscillator manually using the step keys, knob, or numeric keypad. The tracking adjust is tuned to maximize the amplitude of the trace.
Key Access:
Source
,
More
When
Source
is On, resolution bandwidths < 1 kHz are not available.
When the resolution bandwidth is < 1 kHz,
Source
may not be turned on.
138 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
SPAN X Scale
NOTE
Span
Span Zoom
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Full Span
Zero Span
SPAN X Scale
This menu may change if one-button measurements are selected. Some measurements will alter the
Span X
menu keys to make the measurement easier to use.
Activates the
Span
function and accesses the menu of span functions.
Pressing
SPAN X Scale
allows you to change the frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency. The frequency-span readout describes the total displayed frequency range. To determine frequency span per horizontal graticule division (when the frequency scale type is set to linear), divide the frequency span by 10.
Allows you to enter a span frequency range value.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
Performs an automatic zoom so that the signal at the marker remains at the center of the display. If a marker is already on, the zoom begins at the frequency of the marker. If a marker is not already on, a marker is placed on the highest on-screen signal (ignoring the LO feedthrough).
Signal-track is turned on, and the span function is activated. Entering a new span value causes the analyzer to change the span in steps, keeping the signal centered on the screen until the desired span is reached. The analyzer is left in Signal Track mode. Pressing
Span Zoom
performs the routine similar to pressing the following keys:
Search
,
Frequency
,
Signal Track (On)
, and
Span
.
Span Zoom
is not available when the
Frequency
,
Scale Type (Log)
is selected.
Span Zoom leaves the analyzer in Signal Track mode.
Span Zoom is not available when
Segmented (On)
is selected.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
Changes the analyzer span to full span showing the full frequency range of the analyzer. In external mixing mode, pressing
Full Span
changes the analyzer span to the specified range for the selected external mixing band. Full span sets
Signal Track (Off)
and
Segmented (Off)
.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
Changes the frequency span to zero. In this mode, the current center
Chapter 2 139
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Last Span
Zone
Front-Panel Key Reference
SPAN X Scale
frequency is displayed in the time domain (the x-axis is displayed in units of time), like a conventional oscilloscope.
Sweep times faster than those in the frequency domain display mode are available if Option AYX or B7D are installed.
Resolution Bandwidths less than 1 kHz are unavailable when in zero span if the sweep time is being achieved by utilizing the Option AYX or
B7D.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
Sweep times that would require Option AYX or Option B7D are not available in zero span if the Resolution Bandwidth is less than 1 kHz.
Zero Span is not available when
Segmented (On)
is selected. Segments in the segmented sweep function can be set to zero span by setting the span parameter in the segmented sweep editor to 0 Hz. (
Sweep,
Segmented, Modify, Edit, Span
)
The minimum number of sweep points in zero span varies with firmware revision:
Firmware Revision
≤ A.03.03
A.04.xx
≥ A.05.00
Minimum # of Sweep Points in Zero Span
401 (fixed)
101
2
Zero Span sets
Signal Track (Off)
and
FREQUENCY, Scale Type
to linear mode.
Changes the analyzer frequency span to the previous span setting. If pressed after
Signal Track
is turned off, the span setting returns to the span that was in effect before
Signal Track
was turned on. This is true, even if
Signal Track
was turned on as part of
Span Zoom
. Last span sets
Segmented (Off)
. The state of
Frequency, Scale Type Log Lin
is included in the recalled information.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
Accesses menu keys that allow you to control the two-window zone function. This function allows you to have an upper window with a broad display of frequency and two zone markers (vertical bars) that define the span for the lower window.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
140 Chapter 2
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
SPAN X Scale
Zone
On Off Zone (On)
allows you to change from a one-window to a two-window display. The top window will display the trace with two vertical lines (Zone Markers) displayed at center frequency plus and minus 5% of the current span. (You can change the default zone frequency and zone span values using the
Zone Center
and
Zone Span
keys.) The top window will be inactive.
The bottom window will display the section of the trace in the top window that is between the Zone Markers.
The span of the bottom window is 10% of the span of the top window. (You can change the default zone frequency and zone span values using the
Zone Center
and
Zone Span
keys.) When first activated, both windows have the same center frequency. The bottom window is active and the sweep time, resolution bandwidth, and video bandwidth have been coupled to the bottom window span.
There are separate annotations for frequency, bandwidth, sweep time, reference level, amplitude scale and scale/div for each window. The values for these parameters can be changed for each window independently.
To activate the top window, press the
Next Window
key located below the display. The active window is distinguished by a green border. Only the active window will have a sweep taken and updated to the display. When the active window is toggled, the state for the active window is saved, and the last state of the inactive window is recalled. When the window becomes inactive, its data invalid indicator will appear on the display. The data invalid indicator will remain until the window becomes the active window and a complete sweep has been executed. Pressing
Zoom
will change to a one-window display showing only the active window.
Pressing
Zoom
again will return you to the two-window display. Pressing
Zone (Off)
will return you to a one-window display of the active window.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
,
Zone
Pressing
Zoom
will set
Zone (On)
, if it is off.
Zone Center
Allows you to change the frequency of the zone markers without changing the zone span. The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone in the upper window.
They determine the frequency range displayed in the
Chapter 2 141
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
SPAN X Scale
Zone Span
lower window. As the zone markers in the upper window are moved, the center frequency of the lower window is changed but the lower window will not be updated to reflect the change unless it is selected as the active window. (See
Zone On Off
.)
The center frequency for the lower window is not limited by the selected start and stop frequencies in the upper window. However, if the frequency span of the lower window is outside of the span for the upper window, the vertical span markers will be displayed at the edge of the graticule. When the lower window is active, the
FREQUENCY Channel
key will allow you to change
Zone Center
. Any change to the lower window while it is active will change the center frequency.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
,
Zone
Allows the span of the zone markers to be changed without changing the center frequency. The zone markers are vertical lines marking the zone in the upper window. They determine the frequency range displayed in the lower window. As the zone markers are moved, the span of the lower window is changed but the lower window will not be updated to reflect the change unless it is selected as the active window.
(See
Zone On Off
.)
The span limit of the lower window is the same as the span limit of the analyzer. The span for the lower window is not limited to the selected span of the upper window. However, if the frequency span of the lower window is outside of the span of the upper window, the vertical span markers will not be displayed. When the lower window is active, the
SPAN X Scale
key will change
Zone Span
, and any change to
Zone Span
while the lower window is active, will change the span.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
,
Zone
Zone Span is not available when
Segmented (On)
is selected.
Zone Pk Right
Finds the next peak to the right of the zone center frequency on the upper window trace and then moves the zone so that it is centered around the new peak. The zone span is not changed. The center frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zone center frequency. The lower window will not be updated until it is made active. If no peak is found, the zone will not be moved. A signal must obey the parameters defined in
Search
,
Search Param
to be identified as a peak
142 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
SPAN X Scale
signal. Pressing
Zone Pk Right
will have no effect if the upper window is not the active window or if it is in zero span.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
,
Zone
Zone Pk Left
Finds the next peak to the left of the zone center frequency on the upper window trace and then moves the zone so that it is centered around the new peak. The zone span is not changed. The center frequency of the lower window changes to reflect the new zone center frequency. The lower window will not be updated until it is made active. If no peak is found, the zone will not be moved. A signal must obey the parameters defined in
Search
,
Search Param
to be identified as a peak signal. Pressing
Zone Pk Left
will have no effect if the upper window is not the active window or if it is in zero span.
Key Access:
SPAN X Scale
,
Zone
Chapter 2 143
Front-Panel Key Reference
Standby
Standby
Removes power from the analyzer, except for a small portion of circuitry inside the switching power supply. No internal time base circuitry, or any other function outside of the power supply is powered when the analyzer is in “standby.”
144 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
Sweep Time
Auto Man
NOTE
Sweep
Activates the sweep time function and accesses the following menu keys:
Selects the length of time the analyzer takes to tune across the displayed frequency span (or, in zero span, the time the analyzer takes to sweep the full screen). Reducing the sweep time increases the sweep rate. The sweep time can be changed using the step keys, the knob, or the numeric keypad.
In non-zero spans:
When the sweep time is auto-coupled, the analyzer selects the optimum
(shortest) sweep time for the current settings. This selection process is influenced by several factors:
• The maximum tuning rate of the spectrum analyzer
• The selected Resolution Bandwidth and Video Bandwidth filters
• The maximum sample rate of the Analog-to-Digital converter (ADC)
(Trace data are digitized and stored in memory)
• The number of trace points (
Sweep, Points
)
• The Amplitude Scale (logarithmic or linear)
• The Detector mode
You may select a sweep time less than the auto-coupled value; however this may generate measurement errors. If this happens, the error message: Meas Uncal will appear in the upper right corner of the display. When the
Average
detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear, the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds.
In zero span:
The minimum sweep time is determined by the maximum sample rate of the ADC and the number of sweep points. With Option B7D, the fastest sweep time is 2.5 microseconds (with 101 sweep points). As the number of points increases, the sweep time increases. With Option
AYX, the fastest sweep time is 5 microseconds (with 101 sweep points).
With neither option installed, the fastest sweep time is 1 millisecond
(with 101 sweep points) and 4 milliseconds (with 401 sweep points).
When the
Average
detector is selected and the amplitude scale is linear, the fastest sweet time is 8 milliseconds.
With firmware A.08.00 and greater, in zero span, the auto/manual function of this key is not applicable. When
Sweep Time (Auto)
is selected in non-zero span, any changes to Sweep Time while in zero span will revert to the Auto value when you return to non-zero span.
When
Sweep Time (Man)
is selected in non-zero span, any changes to
Sweep Time while in zero span will be maintained when you return to non-zero span.
Chapter 2 145
Sweep
Single Cont
Auto Swp
Coupling
SR SA
Gate
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
The maximum sweep time is 4000 seconds for any set of conditions.
Refer to your instrument’s appropriate Specifications Guide for more information about Sweep Time and its relation to other instrument settings.
Key Access:
Sweep
Switches the analyzer between the continuous-sweep mode and the single-sweep mode. Pressing
Sweep (Single)
puts the analyzer in single-sweep mode. Press
Single
on the front panel, to enable a sweep when in single-sweep mode. When
Sweep (Cont)
is selected, one sweep follows another as soon as it is triggered. Pressing
Preset
(When
Preset
Type
is set to
Factory
) or turning the power on, sets the sweep mode to continuous sweep.
Key Access:
Sweep
Selects stimulus-response (SR) or spectrum-analyzer (SA) (default) auto-coupled sweep times. In stimulus-response mode, auto-coupled sweep times are usually much faster for swept-response measurements.
Stimulus-response auto-coupled sweep times are typically valid in stimulus-response measurements when the system’s frequency span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test.
Key Access:
Sweep
Requires Option 1D6 (Time Gate). Accesses the following menu keys that allow you to setup various gate parameters:
Key Access:
Sweep
Gate On Off
Requires Option 1D6 (Time Gate). Turns the gate function on and off. When set to
Gate (On)
, the video signal that is digitized is controlled by the gate circuitry. The gate circuitry switches between two states. When the gate is “open”, the normal video signal of the analyzer is passed through the video filters to the peak detectors and digitizer of the analyzer. When the gate is “closed”, the video filters, peak detectors, and digitizer are given a signal at the bottom of the display.
The gate function requires that a gate trigger signal be connected to the
GATE TRIG/EXT TRIG IN (TTL)
input on the rear panel. When the gate function is on, the state of the gate appears at the
GATE/HI SWP OUT (TTL)
rear panel connector. A TTL high output indicates that the gate is open. The gate out signal is only valid while the analyzer is sweeping. Between sweeps, the gate out signal is invalid. You can adjust the gate delay and gate length using an oscilloscope to view the gate out signal.
The analyzer sweep time should be set to a large value
(50 sec) during the adjustment so that the gate signal is
146 Chapter 2
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
valid most of the time. When the adjustment is done you can set the analyzer back to the desired sweep time, or set it back to
Auto Couple
.
Key Access:
Sweep, Gate
Trig Delay (On)
and
Gate (On)
cannot be active at the same time. If
Trig Delay (On)
has been previously selected, it will be reset to
Trig Delay (Off)
when
Gate (On)
is selected. Conversely, if
Gate (On)
has been previously selected, it will be reset to
Gate (Off)
when
Trig Delay (On)
is selected.
If
Gate (On)
is selected without an external trigger signal present, operating other functions, such as: tracking, frequency count, or preselector centering, may cause the analyzer to stop functioning until it is powered on again.
Gate Control
Edge Level
Edge Gate
Allows you to select between
Edge
and
Level
triggering of the gate.
Gate Control (Edge)
opens the gate in response to an edge trigger on the trigger input after a delay set in
Gate Delay
. The gate stays open for the selected
Gate Length
. When
Gate Control (Level)
is selected, the gate is open as long as the trigger input is true, as defined under the
Level Gate
key.
Key Access:
Sweep
,
Gate
Accesses menu keys that allow you to set up edge triggering.
Key Access:
Sweep
,
Gate
Slope Pos Neg
Sets the polarity for edge triggering of the gate. When
Slope (Pos)
is pressed, a positive-going edge will trigger the opening of the gate, after the delay set with the
Gate Delay
key. When
Slope (Neg)
is pressed, a negative-going edge will trigger the opening of the gate after the set delay.
Gate Delay
Key Access:
Sweep
,
Gate
,
Edge Gate
Controls the length of time from the trigger until the gate is turned on.
Key Access:
Sweep
,
Gate
,
Edge Gate
Gate Length
Controls the length of time that the gate is on when using edge triggering to control the gate.
Chapter 2 147
Points
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
Key Access:
Sweep
,
Gate
,
Edge Gate
Level Gate
High Low
Sets up level polarity that will open the gate. Requires
Option 1D6.
Level Gate (High)
Selects a high TTL level to open the gate.
Level Gate (Low)
selects a low TTL level to open the gate.
Key Access:
Sweep
,
Gate
Allows you to set the number of points per sweep, from 101 to 8192 in non-zero span and 2 to 8192 in zero span (firmware revision A.05.00 and greater). Use the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad to set this value. When the sweep time is limited by the Analog to Digital
Converter (ADC) sample rate, the sweep time changes with the number of points selected. The greater the number of points, the longer the sweep time becomes. If
Preset
is pressed (and
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
), or the analyzer power is cycled, the number of points per sweep will default to 401. The current value of points is displayed next to the sweep time.
When
FREQUENCY
,
Scale Type (Log)
is selected, the desired number of sweep points may not be possible. Refer to
“Scale Type Log Lin” on page 100 for more information.
Changing the number of points has several effects on the analyzer.
Since markers are read at the point location, the marker reading may change. Press
Peak Search
, again for greater accuracy in the marker reading. All trace data for the current window is cleared. If in continuous sweep mode, (
Sweep
,
Sweep (Cont)
), a new sweep begins immediately. If average is on (
BW/Avg
,
Average (On)
), the averaging starts over with a count of 0. With firmware revisions prior to A.08.00, if Limit Lines are on (
Display
,
Limits
,
Modify
,
Limit 1 or 2 (On)
), they are turned off.
Key Access:
Sweep
By selecting a number of sweep points greater than 401, you are optimizing frequency resolution and accuracy while accepting a reduced measurement speed. In addition to sweep points, the span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, average detection and center frequency will also affect measurement speed.
This function is not available when signal identification is on
(Input/Output, Input Mixer, Signal Ident (On)).
When zone span is on (
Span
,
Zone
.
Zone (On)
), each window has its own value for points.
This feature is not available in the ESA-L Series. The number of points per sweep for these models is always set to 401.
148 Chapter 2
Segmented
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
Accesses the segmented sweep function and its editor.
Segmented sweep is a method in which you can select multiple frequency bands (a maximum of 32), specify their parameters individually, and display them as a single trace. This function of the analyzer results in faster measurements and provides greater detail and resolution in particular bands of interest. To set the parameters of individual segments, go to the editor (
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Edit
) and refer to the parameter key descriptions below. For measurement examples of the segmented sweep function, refer to the Agilent ESA
Spectrum Analyzers Measurement Guide.
Key Access:
Sweep
This feature is only available on ESA-E series analyzers (E4401B,
E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B) with firmware revision
≥ Α.05.00.
Segmented On Off
Turning segmented sweep on (
Sweep
,
Segmented
,
Segmented (On)
) displays each sweep segment from left to right in order of increasing start frequency. When segments have the same start frequency, the segments are displayed in order of increasing stop frequency.
Overlapping segments are acceptable. (Note however; the reference marker for a marker delta will be displayed in the first segment).
Segments are demarcated by vertical lines. The width of a given segment is determined by the ratio of the number of sweep in the segment to the number of sweep in the total trace. For example, if there are five segments with 101 sweep each (505 total), each segment occupies 20% of trace. If you increase the number of in one of the segments to 404 (808 total), that segment will occupy half of the trace; the other four segments, 12.5% each. You can define up to 32 segments with a total maximum number of sweep equal to 8192.
Frequency
,
Scale Type (Log)
is not available when
Segmented (On)
is selected.
Key Access:
Sweep
,
Segmented
Modify
Accesses the segmented sweep editor described below.
Key Access:
Sweep
,
Segmented
Chapter 2 149
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
Segmented Sweep Editor
When the editor is entered (
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Edit
), the segmented sweep mode is turned on, and a dual-display appears. The upper window shows the trace, displayed as described above. The lower window shows the editor data in tabular form: one segment per row with segment number and parameter values occupying the seven columns. The paramenters that can be set are:
• Center Freq
• Span
• Resolution BW
• Video BW
• Sweep Time (Zero Span only)
The trace is updated after each segment has a complete row of data entered. Although thirty-two segments are possible, only 8 rows of data are shown in the table at a time.
Use the tab keys or softkey menu to navigate the editor. When defining a new segment, you may use the numeric keypad to set values. Pressing
Enter
places the value in the table and highlights the next parameter available for modification.
The order of the segments may change when you enter center frequency or span because the sequence is based upon increasing start frequency.
Various parameters are coupled to ensure accurate measurements. You will not be able to enter a value that would result in a measurement that is uncalibrated.
Amplitude parameters are common to all segments and are defined via
the amplitude softkey menu. Refer to “AMPLITUDE Y Scale” on page 40 for more information.
The data in the segmented sweep table is retained through a power cycle. Table values can only be deleted by the
Delete
keys described below.
To exit the editor press any key except
,
Help,
and the viewing angle adjustments.
Exiting the editor does not turn off segmented sweep.
Segmented (Off)
must be selected.
150 Chapter 2
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
Interaction with Other Analyzer Functions
Certain conditions prevent segmented sweep from being activated, while others cause this mode to be turned off. For analyzers with
Option AYZ, the mixer frequency range (
Input
,
Input Mixer (Ext)
,
Ext Mix
Band
) must be set to include the frequencies of interest in the segmented sweep table. If the mixer range is not the same, segmented sweep will not turn on. If the mixer range is changed, segmented sweep will be turned off.
Segmented sweep is not available when the following analyzer functions are turned on: Demod, Signal ID, and Signal Track. In addition, keys which access these functions are grayed out if segmented sweep is on. This is also true for the following functions: Mkr
→CF,
Mkr
→CF Step, Mkr→CF Start, Mkr→CF Stop, Mkr∆→Span, Span
Zoom, Zone Span, and Zero Span.
Confining marker pairs (marker delta, delta pair, and span pair) to one segment facilitates interpretation of marker readings. However, marker pairs can provide useful information across segments. Amplitude readings are straightforward because the y-axis is consistent over all segments. Frequency or time readings require consideration of differences in sweep time, number of, and span when interpreting measurements across segments.
Marker delta functions differently depending upon the type of segment in which it is activated. If you turn on marker delta in a segment set to
0 Hz span, it remains in that segment and provides amplitude and time difference measurements. If you initiate a marker delta in a non-zero span segment, it will function across segments and continue to display frequency and amplitude information.
Delta pair and span pair function similarly to marker delta in segmented sweep with some characteristics which need to be noted.
When a delta or span pair is initiated in segmented sweep, the analyzer defaults to the frequency domain. If you wish to make time measurements in a zero-span segment, the domain must be set to time
(
Marker
,
More
,
Readout
,
Time
). The delta or span pair can traverse all segments without regard to the type of segment in which they were initiated.
Turn markers off (
Marker
,
Off
) when entering or exiting segmented sweep (
Segmented
,
Segmented (Off)
).
Performing a factory preset will turn segmented sweep off. This is also true if you select full span or last span.
Functions which are parameters of segmented sweep are not available when accessed by pressing the following front-panel keys:
Auto Couple
,
BW/Avg
(
Resolution BW
and
Video BW
),
Frequency
(the entire softkey menu),
Span
(see above), and
Sweep
(
Sweep Time
and
Points
).
Chapter 2 151
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
When the sweep trigger is set to any of the trigger selections other than free run, no sweep occurs until the trigger condition is met. Once the trigger occurs, all segments are swept, completing the entire trace.
For spectrum analyzers with Option 1DN or Option 1DQ, the tracking generator must be turned on (
Source
,
Amplitude (On)
) before you set up the segmented sweep table.
The on/off state of the segmented sweep mode and the segmented sweep table can be saved as a “state” type file (see
) or as part of the power on/preset function (see
“Power On/Preset” on page 156 ).
When loading a “state” type file, segmented sweep will not turn on if any of the parameters in the file contain optional instrument settings not currently loaded on the analyzer or frequency settings outside the current range of the analyzer.
Edit
Accesses the segmented sweep editor, where a maximum of thirty-two segments can be defined by the segment number and the six parameters described below. Use the data control keys described in the
Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzer Getting Started Guide to enter the setting as each parameter is highlighted.
Refer to the “Editor” section above for more information.
Key Access:
Sweep
,
Segmented
,
Modify
Segment
Allows you to select a previously defined segment or the next segment for modification. Use the numeric keypad to select a specific segment or press the
Tab
keys to access adjacent segments.
Key Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify
,
Edit
Center Freq
Allows you to specify the center frequency for a particular segment using the data control keys. For more information on this function, refer to
.
Key Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify
,
Edit
Span
Allows you to select a frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency for the current segment using the data control keys.
152 Chapter 2
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
The order of the segments may change when you enter center frequency or span because the sequence is based upon increasing start frequency.
Refer to the “Displaying the Trace” section above, for clarification.
Res BW
Points
Video BW
Zero span is available for any or all segments. It must be set by pressing
Span
,
0
,
Hz
. For more information on this function, refer to
.
Key Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify
,
Edit
Allows you to select the resolution bandwidth to a value between 1 kHz and 5 MHz for the current segment using the data control keys. For more information on this function, refer to
.
Key Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify
,
Edit
Allows you to set the video bandwidth for the current segment to a value between 30 Hz and 3 MHz. For more
information, refer to “Video BW Auto
Key Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify
,
Edit
Allows you to set the number of points for the current segment. The minimum number of points in a zero span segment is 2; in a non-zero-span segment, 101. The maximum number of points in the total sweep is 8192. If you exceed the number of points available in one segment, the message: Too much data; total sweep points limited will be displayed in the status line
(yellow on color displays).
Key Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify
,
Edit
Sweep Time
Allows you to set the sweep time for the current zero span segment. For a non-zero span segment, the sweep time is auto-coupled to Span, Resolution
Bandwidth, and Video Bandwidth and cannot be manually defined. The
Chapter 2 153
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Sweep
minimum sweep time is displayed.
Refer to
“Sweep Time Auto Man” on page 145 for more information.
Key Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify
,
Edit, More
The parameters for each segment are limited to ensure the occurrence of only calibrated measurements.
Delete Segment
Deletes the highlighted segment.
Key Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify
,
Edit, More
Delete
Segment
Initiates the deletion of all segments. After pressing this key once, the message: If you are sure, press key again to delete
will be displayed. Pressing
Delete
again will complete the process.
Key Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify
154 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
Show Errors
System (Local)
Accesses the System menu keys. Pressing
System (Local)
after the analyzer has been placed in the remote mode, places the analyzer in the local mode and enables front-panel control. During remote operation, R appears in the upper-right corner of the screen. R, T, L, or S may appear during remote operation, indicating talk, listen, or service request.
Pressing the
System (Local)
key removes the R symbol in the upper-right corner.
Accesses a display of the last 30 errors reported. The most recent error will appear at the top of the list. The first error listed will be the first error removed if the error list is longer than 30 entries. If the same error message occurs several times the error message will be incremented rather than added to the list as a new error message.
The date and time identify the first time and the last time (if there is more than one of the same type of error) an error occurred. The number of identical errors is shown, and the error number is also shown with firmware revision A.08.00 and later.
Key Access:
System
Prev Page
Allows you to access the previous page of error messages. It is grayed out if you are on the first page or only one page exists.
Next Page
Key Access:
System
,
Show Errors
Allows you to access the next page of error messages. It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists.
Key Access:
System
,
Show Errors
Verbose SCPI
On Off
The information in the Error History Screen is formatted to fit the screen size. Additional information is available via the SYSTem:ERRor? command. It indicates which SCPI command was executing when the error occurred and what about that command was unacceptable.
Example: First set SYST:ERR:VERBOSE ON
If the command SENSe:FREQuently:CENTer 942.6MHz is sent, then sending SYST:ERR? returns:
–113, “Undefined header;SENSe:FREQuently:<Err>CENTer 942.6MHz
$<NL>”
Key Access:
System
,
Show Errors
Chapter 2 155
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
Power On/Preset
Clear Error
Queue
Clears the error queue in the
Show Errors
display.
Key Access:
System
,
Show Errors
Accesses the following menu keys.
Key Access:
System
Power On
Last Preset
Determines the state of the analyzer when the analyzer is powered on. If the Power On function is set to
Preset
, the state of the analyzer is the same as it is after
Preset
is pressed, when the analyzer is powered on. If the
Power On function is set to
Last
, then the state that the analyzer was in when it was powered off is recalled.
The setting (Last or Preset) of the Power On function is not changed by pressing
Preset
. Use the
Power On/Preset
menu key function to change the setting of the analyzer state that is recalled at power on. Limit lines are not recalled when the analyzer is powered on. Refer to
in this chapter for more information.
Key Access:
System
,
Power On/Preset
Preset Type
Allows you to select User, Mode, or Factory preset.
Key Access:
System
,
Power On/Preset
User
Pressing
Preset (User)
sets the analyzer to the settings defined by the
Save User
Preset
key. Refer to
in this chapter for more information.
Key Access:
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Preset Type
Mode
Factory
Selects the mode preset type to be the instrument state that will be restored when you do a preset. A mode preset does not change the mode and it only resets the settings of the current mode to their factory defaults.
Key Access:
System
,
Power On/Preset,
Preset Type
Pressing
Factory
presets the analyzer to the configuration originally set at the
factory. Refer to the “Preset”
key description for the default factory- configuration settings.
Key Access:
System
,
Power On/Preset,
Preset Type
156 Chapter 2
Time/Date
Alignments
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
Key Access:
System
,
Power On/Preset
,
Preset Type
Save User
Preset
Saves the active state of the analyzer into the User
Preset register for recall on
Preset
if
Preset (User)
is selected. Refer to
“Preset” in this chapter for more
information.
Key Access:
System
,
Power On/Preset
Accesses the following
Time/Date
menu keys used to set and display the real-time clock:
Key Access:
System
Time/Date
On Off
Turns the display of the real-time clock on or off.
Key Access:
System
,
Time/Date
Date Format
MDY DMY
Set Time
Set Date
Changes the display of the date from a month-day-year format to a day-month-year format.
Key Access:
System
,
Time/Date
Allows you to set the time of the real-time clock. Enter the time in 24 hour HHMMSS format, using the numeric keypad and pressing
Enter
. Valid hour (HH) values are from 00 to 23. Valid minute (MM) and second
(SS) values are from 00 to 59.
Key Access:
System
,
Time/Date
Allows you to set the date of the real-time clock. Enter the date in the YYYYMMDD format using the numeric keypad and press
Enter
. Valid year (YYYY) values are
0000 through 9999. Valid month (MM) values are from
01 to 12, and valid day values are from 01 to 31.
Key Access:
System
,
Time/Date
Accesses the following
Alignments
menu keys which align the internal circuitry of the analyzer, load default values for the alignment system, and adjust the 10 MHz reference.
Key Access:
System
Auto Align
Accesses the
Auto Align
menu keys.
All
Turns on the automatic alignment of all measurement systems. When
Auto
Align
,
All
is selected, “
AA
” appears along the left edge of the display.
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments
Chapter 2 157
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
All but RF
Off
Turns on the automatic alignment of all measurement systems except the RF section. (Eliminating automatic alignment of the RF prevents changes in the input impedance between sweeps, which could cause input device instability.) When
Auto Align
,
All but RF
is selected, “
AB
” appears along the left edge of the display.
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments
Turns off automatic alignment.
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments
It is normal to hear clicking sounds when the Auto Alignment function is On. During retrace, a small portion of the analyzer circuitry is realigned. Some of the switching of the analyzer circuitry is done using relays. It is the rapid switching of these relays during retrace that causes the clicking sounds. To eliminate the clicking sounds, turn the auto alignment off by pressing
System
,
Alignments
,
Auto Align
,
Off
.
When this is done, the
Align Now
,
All
function should be performed periodically. Refer to the appropriate “Specifications and
Characteristics” chapter of your Specifications Guide for more information on how often to perform
Align Now
,
All
when the auto alignment is off
Align Now
Accesses the
Align Now
menu keys and immediately executes an alignment cycle of the selected system(s).
Menu key selections include:
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments
All
Initiates the alignment of all systems.
Except the Option 1DN Tracking
Generator for models E4402B, E4403B,
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B.
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments, Align
Now
RF
(Ext Cable)
Initiates the alignment of the RF system with a cable connected from
AMPTD REF OUT to INPUT 50
Ω.
Models E4402B, E4403B, E4404B,
E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B.
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments, Align
Now
158 Chapter 2
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
RF
Initiates the alignment of the RF system. Models E4401B and E4411B only. This Alignment uses an Internal
Signal Source.
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments, Align
Now
TG
(Ext Cable)
Initiates the alignment of the tracking generator only when the Option 1DN is installed in Agilent E4402B, E4403B,
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and
E4408B. You must connect a cable from
RF OUT 50
Ω to INPUT 50 Ω
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments, Align
Now
FM Demod
Initiates an alignment of the FM demodulation system only when Option
BAA or Option 106 is installed.
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments, Align
Now
After a five minute warm-up,
Align Now
,
All
(with a cable connected from AMPTD REF OUT to INPUT 50
Ω) should be performed on Agilent E4402B, E4403B,
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B. Refer to your analyzer’s appropriate Specifications Guide for details on using
Align Now
when
Auto Align
is
Off
.
Freq Correct
On Off
Controls use of some of the correction factors. When On is underlined, frequency correction factors are used.
When Off is underlined, frequency correction factors are not used, and Freq Corr Off appears on the display. Turning the correction factors off degrades frequency accuracy.
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments
Frequency correction factors must be on for the analyzer to meet its specified performance.
Timebase
Accesses the
Fine
and
Coarse
Timebase menu keys, which allow control of the 10 MHz time base frequency.
This function is used to verify the settability of the
10 MHz reference and to adjust for changed operating conditions, such as temperature. Pressing
Load Defaults
or cycling power, resets the time base to its original value.
Chapter 2 159
Remote Port
Show System
Show Hdwr
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments
Load Defaults
Loads the default values for the alignment system, turns on the frequency corrections, and resets the time base to the factory values.
Align Now, All
, will automatically execute three times after pressing
Load
Defaults
.
Key Access:
System
,
Alignments
With Option A4H (GPIB and Parallel) only. Allows the GPIB address to be entered. The default address is 18.
With Option 1AX (RS-232 and Parallel) only. Allows the baud rate to be set. The available baud rate values are as follows: 110, 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200. The default baud rate is
9600.
Key Access:
System
Displays the number and description of the options installed in your analyzer. It also displays the instrument model number, product number, serial number, firmware revision number, Host ID (for licensing), bootrom revision, and amount of RAM and ROM.
Key Access:
System
,
More
Prev Page
Allows you to access the previous page of show system.
It is grayed out if you are on the first page or only one page exists.
Next Page
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Show System
Allows you to access the next page of show system. It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Show System
Gives detailed information about the hardware installed on your analyzer.
Key Access:
System
,
More
Prev Page
Allows you to access the previous page of show hardware. It is grayed out if you are on the first page or only one page exists.
Next Page
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Show Hdwr
Allows you to access the next page of show hardware. It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Show Hdwr
160 Chapter 2
Color Palette
Diagnostics
Restore Sys
Defaults
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
Accesses the
Color Palette
menu keys. These keys are only available with analyzers having a color display.
Key Access:
System
,
More
Default
Sets all the display screen attributes to the factory defined colors.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Color Palette
Vision Impair 1
and
Vision Impair 2
The special colors built into the
Vision Impair 1
and
Vision Impair 2
keys accommodate most color-deficient vision problems.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Color Palette
Optical Filter
Accommodates the use of protective goggles while viewing lasers.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Color Palette
Monochrome
Sets the display screen to green monochrome. The monochrome display uses different shades of green for each green value. This is especially useful for driving external monochrome monitors.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Color Palette
Accesses the
Front Panel Test
menu key.
Key Access:
System
,
More
Front Panel
Test
Allows you to verify the functionality of each front-panel key (except
Preset
). The number next to each key name increments once each time the key is pressed. Rotating the knobs causes the number of pulses to be counted. Press
ESC
to exit.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Diagnostics
Resets the “persistent” state variables to their defaults. These are values, such as the GPIB address, that are unaffected by a power cycle or a preset (when
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
.)
Key Access:
System
,
More
Chapter 2 161
Table 2-3
Licensing
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
System Default Settings
Feature Default Setting
Color Printing
Custom Printer, Color Capability
Custom Printer, Language
Date Format
Display Viewing Angle
External Amplifier Gain
GPIB Address
Input Impedance
On
No
PCL3
MDY
4
0 dBm
18
50 (Ohm)
1
Instrument Color Palette
Manual Tracking Adjustment
Page Size
Power On Last/Preset
Preset Factory/User
Print Format
Print Orientation
Printer Selection
Default palette
2048
Letter
Preset
Mode
Print screen mode
Portrait
Auto
Prints/ Page
RS-232 Baud Rate
RS-232 DTR Control
RS-232 Receive Pacing
RS-232 RTS Control
RS-232 Transmit Pacing
Speaker Volume
Time Date Display
1
9600
On (hardware pacing)
None (data pacing)
IBFULL (hardware pacing)
None (data pacing)
0
On
Verbose SCPI Off
1. This value may be 75 ohms, depending upon the analyzer hardware configuration.
Accesses the security system to enable licensing for individual options.
For information on how to use this system, see the installation information for individual options in the measurement personalities’ user’s guides.
162 Chapter 2
NOTE
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
Not all options can be enabled using this system and there is no way to turn off an option through this system. Once an option has been licensed for a given analyzer, it cannot be transferred to a different analyzer.
Key Access:
System
,
More, More
Option
Accesses the Alpha Editor allowing you to enter a three character option number. To terminate the entry, press
Enter
or
Return
. An external keyboard may also be used for this entry. The option number will appear on the second line of the
Option
key. Key
Access:
System
,
More
,
Licensing
License Key
Accesses the Alpha Editor allowing you to enter the license key number. To terminate the entry, press
Enter
or
Return
. An external keyboard may also be used for this entry. The license key number will appear on the second line of the
License Key
menu key.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Licensing
Activate License
Allows you to activate the option that you previously entered with
License Key
. If your entry was correct, the option will be enabled and the message: Option activated
will appear in the status line of your display. The option number and license key number will also be cleared from the
License Key
and
Option
key.
If your entry was incorrect, the error message: License
key invalid
will appear in the status line of your display. The option number and license key number can be edited until they are correct.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Licensing
It is possible to enable an option for which the analyzer is not yet configured. Therefore, the message Option activated does not mean that the option will immediately function. For a display of options that are enabled and for which the analyzer is properly configured, press
System
,
More
,
Show System
.
Delete License
Pressing this key deletes the license key that is associated with the currently selected Option. This means the corresponding option will be disabled. If this is a software option, it will be disabled, but the application will not be deleted from instrument memory. (The option and license key must be entered to perform a
Delete License
.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Licensing
Chapter 2 163
Personalities
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
Show License
Shows you the license information screen which lists all the existing license keys along with their related option code and a brief description of the option. Pressing any front panel key exits the license information screen.
•
Prev Page
- Views a previous page of license information. It is grayed out if you are on the first page or only one page exists.
•
Next Page
- Views the next page of license information. It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
Licensing
Accesses a display listing the personalities that are currently installed in the analyzer. Information about the personalities are under the column headings
Opt
(option number),
Name
(option name),
Version
(personality version),
Licensed
(whether or not the personality is licensed), and
Size
(personality memory). At the bottom of the display is a line showing the available memory for installing personalities.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
More
Some files are shared between personalities. If shared files are installed, a personality may require less room than is indicated on the display. The
Uninstall
key will not delete any shared file unless the personality being deleted is the last personality to use the shared file.
Prev Page
Next Page
Install
Uninstall
Allows you to view a previous page of installed personalities. It is grayed out if you are on the first page or only one page exists.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
More
,
Personalities
Allows you to view the next page of installed personalities. It is grayed out if you are on the last page or only one page exists.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
More
,
Personalities
Allows you to install personalities in the analyzer. For more information on this key, see the documentation that accompanies the personalities software.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
More
,
Personalities
Allows you to uninstall a personality. Highlight the appropriate personality and press
Uninstall
,
Uninstall
Now
. You will be prompted with the displayed message
If you are sure you want to uninstall, press
Uninstall Now again
.
Some personalities may not be deleted. If the attempt is
164 Chapter 2
Service
Front-Panel Key Reference
System (Local)
made to do so, the message Can’t uninstall this program
will appear on the display.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
More
,
Personalities
Accesses the
Service
menu keys. You must have a password to access this menu. For information, refer to the troubleshooting chapter in the your Service Guide.
Key Access:
System
,
More
,
More
Chapter 2 165
Front-Panel Key Reference
Tab Keys
Tab Keys
The Tab keys are located below the display and are used to move between fields in the tables and forms.
166 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Trace/View
NOTE
Trace 1 2 3
CAUTION
Clear Write
Max Hold
NOTE
NOTE
Min Hold
Trace/View
Accesses the trace keys that allow you to store and manipulate trace information. Each trace is comprised of a series of data points in which amplitude information is stored. The analyzer updates the information for any active trace with each sweep.
If you have selected
Channel Power
,
ACP
,
Harmonic Distortion
,
Burst
Power
,
Power Stat CCDF
, or
Spectrum Emission Mask
in the
MEASURE
menu, refer to the one-button measurement information in Volume 2.
Selects the menu keys used for trace 1, trace 2, or trace 3 functions.
Press
Trace 1 2 3
until the number of the desired trace is underlined.
Key Access:
Trace/View
When using normalization, the mode of traces 2 and 3 should not be changed.
Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace and continuously displays any signals during the sweep of the analyzer.
This function is activated for trace 1 at power-on and by pressing
Preset
.
Key Access:
Trace/View
Maintains the maximum level for each trace point of the selected trace
(1, 2 or 3), and updates each trace point if a new maximum level is detected in successive sweeps.
If the
Det/Demod
,
Detector
(Auto) is selected, the detection type may
change with trace mode. See Figure 2-1 on page 57
for more detailed information.
Key Access:
Trace/View
Changing the vertical scale (
Amplitude
,
Scale Type
, Log or Lin), pressing
Restart
, turning averaging on (
BW/Avg
,
Average (On)
), or switching window in Zone Span (
Span
,
Zone
) restarts the held trace.
Maintains the minimum level for each trace point of the selected trace
(1, 2 or 3), and updates each trace point if a new minimum level is detected in successive sweeps.
Key Access:
Trace/View
Chapter 2 167
NOTE
NOTE
View
Blank
Operations
Front-Panel Key Reference
Trace/View
If the detector is Auto Coupled when you select
Min Hold
, the detector may change, dependent on the other active trace functions. Manually select a detector if a specific detector is required before selecting
Min
Hold
. Refer to Figure 2-1, “Detector (Auto) Selection Flowchart,”
on
Changing the vertical scale (
Amplitude
,
Scale Type
, Log or Lin), pressing
Restart
, turning averaging on (
BW/Avg
,
Average (On)
), or switching window in Zone Span (
Span
,
Zone
) restarts the held trace.
Holds and displays the amplitude data of the selected trace. The trace register is not updated as the analyzer sweeps. If a trace is deactivated by pressing
Blank,
the stored trace data can be retrieved by pressing
View
.
Key Access:
Trace/View
Stores the amplitude data for the selected trace, and removes it from the display. The selected trace register will not be updated as the analyzer sweeps. This function is activated for traces 2 and 3 at power-on and by pressing
Preset
(when
Preset Type
is set to
Factory
.)
Key Access:
Trace/View
Accesses the following
Operations
menu keys:
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
1
↔2
Exchanges the contents of the trace 1 register with the trace 2 register and puts trace 1 and 2 in view mode.
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
,
Operations
2
− DL → 2
Subtracts the display line from trace 2 and places the result in trace 2 and puts trace 2 in view mode. The
2
− DL → 2
function is a math operation.
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
,
Operations
2
↔ 3
Exchanges the contents of trace 2 with trace 3 and puts trace 2 and 3 in view mode.
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
,
Operations
1
→ 3
Copies trace 1 into trace 3 and puts trace 3 in view mode.
2
→ 3
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
,
Operations
Copies trace 2 into trace 3 and puts trace 3 in view mode.
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
,
Operations
168 Chapter 2
Normalize
NOTE
CAUTION
Front-Panel Key Reference
Trace/View
Accesses the following
Normalize
menu keys:
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
Store Ref
(1
→ 3)
Copies trace 1 into trace 3.
Store Ref (1
→ 3)
must be pressed before pressing
Normalize (On)
. If
Normalize (On)
is pressed before
Store Ref (1
→ 3)
, the error message:
Store reference trace before turning on
Normalize
is displayed in the status line, however
Normalize has been activated.
Key Access:
View/Trac
,
More
,
Normalize
Normalize
On Off Normalize (On)
Activates the normalize function. On each sweep, the normalized trace (Trace 3) is subtracted from Trace 1 and the result is added to the normalized reference level. The display shows the result of the following calculation:
Trace 1 – Normalized Trace + Normalized Reference
Level
The trace data is normalized with respect to the normalized reference level, even if the value of the normalized reference level is changed. This function remains in effect on all subsequent sweeps until it is turned off.
Segmented sweep is not available when
Normalize (On)
is selected.
Trace 1 should be in clear write mode prior to setting normalize to on.
The normalize function is most useful for applying correction data to a trace while making a stimulus response measurement with a tracking generator. For example, connect the cables and a thru line, in place of the device to be measured, between the tracking generator and the analyzer input. Notice that the frequency response is not perfectly flat, showing the response of the cables, as well as the flatness of both the tracking generator and the analyzer.
Now press
Store Ref (1
→ 3)
,
Normalize On
. Notice that the displayed trace is now flat, or normalized. The position of the normalized trace can now be moved to a different position on the display by changing the normalized reference position. This may be useful if the device to be tested has positive gain, such as an amplifier. Now replace the thru line with the device
Chapter 2 169
Front-Panel Key Reference
Trace/View
under test, and an accurate measurement of the gain or loss can be made.
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
,
Normalize
Norm Ref Lvl
Sets the level (in dB) of the normalized reference.
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
,
Normalize
Norm Ref Posn
Offsets the displayed trace without affecting the instrument gain or attenuation settings. This allows the displayed trace to be moved without decreasing measurement accuracy. The normalized reference position is indicated with a (>) character on the left side of the display and a (<) character on the right side of the display.
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
,
Normalize
Ref Trace
View Blank
Allows you to view or blank the reference trace on the display.
Key Access:
Trace/View
,
More
,
Normalize
170 Chapter 2
Free Run
Video
NOTE
Line
NOTE
External
Pos Neg
TV
Front-Panel Key Reference
Trig
Trig
Accesses the menu of keys that allow you to select the sweep mode and trigger mode of the analyzer.
New sweep starts as soon as possible after the current sweep ends.
Key Access:
Trig
Activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start if the detected RF envelope voltage rises to a level set by the video trigger level. When
Video
is pressed, a line appears on the display. The analyzer triggers when the input signal exceeds the trigger level at the left edge of the display. You can change the trigger level using the step keys, the knob, or the numeric keypad
Key Access:
Trig
This function is not available when the Resolution Bandwidth is less than 1 kHz. If a Resolution Bandwidth less than 1 kHz is selected while in Video Trigger mode, the Trigger mode changes to Free Run.
Activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to be synchronized with the next cycle of the line voltage.
Key Access:
Trig
Line trigger is not available when operating from a dc power source.
Activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start when the external voltage (connected to
GATE TRIG/EXT TRIG IN
on the rear panel) passes through approximately 1.5 volts. The external trigger signal must be a 0 V to +5 V TTL signal. This function also controls the trigger polarity (for positive or negative-going signals).
Key Access:
Trig
Option B7B (TV Trigger and Picture on Screen) only. Activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to be synchronized with the next occurrence of the synchronizing pulse of a selected TV line.
Line number range is dependent on the settings of the
Standard
and
Field
menus within the
TV Trig Setup
menu. When the line number is incremented beyond the upper limit, the value will change to the lower limit and continue incrementing from there. When the line number is decremented below the lower limit, the value will change to the upper limit and continue decrementing from there.
Key Access:
Trig
Chapter 2 171
RF Burst
Trig Delay
On Off
NOTE
Trig Offset
On Off
NOTE
NOTE
TV Trig Setup
Front-Panel Key Reference
Trig
Option B7E (RF Communications Hardware) only. Allows the analyzer to be triggered by an RF burst envelope signal. The trigger level can be set to either a level relative to the peak of the burst or to an absolute value.
Key Access:
Trig
Allows you to set and turn on or off a delay, during which the analyzer will wait to begin a sweep after receiving an external trigger signal.
This function is not available when
Gate
is on.
Trig Delay
is active when
External
is selected.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More
This function is not available in Free Run or Video Trigger modes.
Allows you to set and turn on or off an offset value from the trigger point of the sweep at which to begin storing data in the trace of the analyzer. The offset is specified as a function of time, and permits positive (pre trigger) and negative (post trigger) values to be specified.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More
This function is only available when in Zero Span. (It is grayed out when in swept span.) If this key is pressed in swept spans, the error message: Trigger Offset unavailable in swept spans is displayed in the status line. The value and state of Trigger Offset is remembered if Zero Span is exited and restored when Zero Span is reselected.
This function is only available with Resolution Bandwidths of 1 kHz or greater. If this key is pressed when the Resolution Bandwidths is less than 1 kHz, the error message: Trigger Offset unavailable in bandwidths < 1 kHz
is displayed in the status line. While Trigger
Offset is on, it is not possible for the instrument to be set to a
Resolution Bandwidth less than 1 kHz. Any attempt to do so will cause the error message: Bandwidths <1 kHz unavailable with Trigger
Offset on
to be displayed in the status line.
Option B7B (TV Trigger and Picture on Screen) only. Accesses the setup functions for TV Trigger.
Key Access:
Trig
Field
Allows you to determine how the fields of the TV picture signal will be affected by the trigger system.
One complete TV image consists of one frame of 525 or
625 horizontal lines depending on the TV standard being used. Each frame is composed of two fields of interlacing lines, each consisting of 262 1/2 lines (or 312
1/2 lines). The fields are called Field One and Field
172 Chapter 2
Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Trig
Two. Field One is viewed as having 263 lines (or 313 lines) and Field Two is viewed as having 262 lines
(or 312 lines).
For the 525 line NTSC video standard, we refer to TV lines as follows (these are the Field Modes):
Entire Frame, lines 1 to 525
Field One, lines 1 to 263
Field Two, lines 1 to 262 (note that this really refers to “actual” lines 264 to 525)
For the 625 line PAL and SECAM video standards, we refer to TV lines as follows:
Entire Frame, lines 1 to 625
Field One, lines 1 to 313
Field Two, lines 314 to 625
As the Field is changed, the appropriate value for Line is chosen to keep triggering on the same line as before, or if this is not possible, the corresponding line in the new Field. For example, suppose line 264 is selected while in the NTSC-M standard and the Entire Frame mode. This is the first line in Field Two. If Field Two is then selected, the Line number changes to Line 1, the same actual line in the TV signal. If Field One is then selected, the line number stays at 1, but now we are triggering in the first line in Field One. The only exception to this is if we are on the last line of Field One and change to Field Two. In this case, we go to the last line in Field Two.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More, TV Trig Setup
Entire Frame
Causes the selected line number to be viewed as an offset into the entire frame starting with line 1, the first line in Field One.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More
,
TV Trig Setup
,
Field
Field One
Causes the selected line number to be viewed as an offset into the first field starting with Line 1, the first line in
Field One.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More, TV Trig Setup
,
Field
173
NOTE
Front-Panel Key Reference
Trig
Field Two
Causes the selected line number to be viewed as an offset into the second field. If Line 1 is selected, it is the
264th line of the frame (NTSC-M,
NTSC-Japan, PAL-M) or the 314th line of the frame (PAL-B,D,G,H,I,
PAL-N-Combin, SECAM-L).
Key Access:
Trig
,
More, TV Trig Setup
,
Field
Sync Pos Neg
Refers to the nature of the video waveform. Normal baseband video has a TV line sync pulse on the bottom of the waveform (more negative voltage). This is referred to as “negative” (
Sync Neg
). When the analyzer is used as a TV receiver to produce baseband video, the detected video is “upside down” with the sync pulse on the top of the waveform (this is true only for NTSC and
PAL transmission standards, not for SECAM). This orientation is referred to as “positive” (
Sync Pos
).
Standard
Key Access:
Trig
,
More, TV Trig Setup
Accesses the Standard menu keys which allow you to select from the following TV standards:
NTSC-M
,
NTSC-Japan
,
PAL-M
,
PAL-B,D,G,H,I
,
PAL-N
,
PAL-N-Combin
,
SECAM-L
.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More, TV Trig Setup
TV Source
TV Monitor
Allows you to select between the internal analyzer path
(
SA
) or the EXT VIDEO IN connector on the rear panel
(
Ext Video In
) as the source for the TV Trigger and TV
Monitor functions. Note that this does not affect the signal viewed on the analyzer.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More, TV Trig Setup
When
TV Monitor
is pressed, the selected Standard is used to determine the proper setup of the analyzer hardware for presentation of the TV picture. When the
TV picture is active and on the display, pressing a key that normally accesses a menu, instead restores the original ESA graphical display with the selected menu enabled. The active function remains active and can be adjusted while the picture is displayed.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More, TV Trig Setup
The color decoding circuitry is always enabled, even for weak and monochrome signals.
174 Chapter 2
RF Burst
Setup
Front-Panel Key Reference
Trig
Option B7E (RF Communications Hardware) only. Accesses the setup functions for RF burst trigger. Refer to Volume 2 for more information about the Burst Power measurement.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More
Trigger Level
Abs Rel
Allows you to set the trigger level to a level relative to the peak of the burst or to an absolute value.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More
,
RF Burst Setup
Frequency
Selectivity
On Off
Allows you to turn frequency selectivity on or off. With
Frequency Selectivity (Off)
selected, the trigger occurs on the signal prior to the resolution bandwidth filter.
When
Frequency Selectivity (On)
is selected, the trigger occurs on the signal after the resolution bandwidth filter.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More
,
RF Burst Setup
Narrow Pulse
Discriminator
On Off
Turns the narrow pulse discriminator on or off. For modulation formats that have undesirable envelope ripple,
Narrow Pulse Discriminator (On)
allows you to prevent re-triggering on the ripple.
Key Access:
Trig
,
More
,
RF Burst Setup
Chapter 2 175
Front-Panel Key Reference
⇑ (UP) and ⇓ (DOWN) Arrow Keys
⇑ (UP) and ⇓ (DOWN) Arrow Keys
The
⇑ (UP) and ⇓ (DOWN) arrow keys can be used to adjust the analyzer parameters incrementally. The arrow keys are also used to select between files or points on a list. These keys are also called step keys.
176 Chapter 2
Front-Panel Key Reference
Viewing Angle
Viewing Angle
Controls the optimum viewing angle of the display. The viewing angle keys are located next to each other at the upper left-hand corner of the analyzer, bordering the display. These two keys allow you to adjust the intensity of the objects on the display so that it can be optimally viewed from different angles.
The
Viewing Angle
keys automatically repeat when they are held down.
Chapter 2 177
Front-Panel Key Reference
Zoom
Zoom
Allows you to switch between the split-screen and full-sized display of the active window in zone span and other functions which support split-screen display modes. The active window is indicated by a solid green line surrounding the window.
If
Zoom
is pressed while in a non-split-screen display mode, it will activate the zone span mode. (See
Span
,
Zone
, and also
Next Window
.) If
Zoom
is pressed when zone markers are off, it will turn on zone markers and put the display in split-screen mode. (See
Span
,
Zone.
)
178 Chapter 2
3 Programming Fundamentals
The purpose of this chapter is to serve as a reminder of SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) fundamentals to those who have previous experience in programming SCPI. This chapter is not intended to teach you everything about the SCPI programming language. If you are using an optional programming compatibility modes, you should refer to the manual that came with the option.
179
Programming Fundamentals
The SCPI Consortium or IEEE can provide detailed information on the subject of
SCPI programming. Refer to IEEE Standard 488.1-1987, IEEE Standard Digital
Interface for Programmable Instrumentation. New York, NY, 1987, or to IEEE
Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common
Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
Valid ESA Spectrum Analyzer SCPI commands are used for examples in this chapter. Topics included in this chapter are:
•
•
•
“Special Characters in Commands”
•
•
•
“Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line”
•
“Overview of GPIB (Option A4H)”
•
“Overview of RS-232 (Option 1AX)”
180 Chapter 3
Programming Fundamentals
Creating Valid Commands
Creating Valid Commands
Commands are not case sensitive and there are often many different ways of writing a particular command. These are examples of valid commands for a given command syntax:
Command Syntax
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth[:RESolution]
<freq>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle
:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1
Sample Valid Commands
The following sample commands are all identical. They will all cause the same result.
•
:Sense:Band:Res 1700
•
:BANDWIDTH:RESOLUTION 1.7e3
•
:sens:band 1.7KHZ
•
:SENS:band 1.7E3Hz
•
:band 1.7kHz
•
:bandwidth:RES 1.7e3Hz
The last command below returns different results than the commands above it. The number 3 in the command causes this. See the command description for more information.
•
:CALC:MARK:Y?
•
:calc:mark:y?
•
:CALC:MARK2:Y?
•
DET:FUNC NEG
•
:Sense:Detector:Function Sample
The sample commands below are identical.
•
:INIT:CONT ON
•
:init:continuous 1
Chapter 3 181
NOTE
Programming Fundamentals
Command Notation Syntax
Command Notation Syntax
A typical command is made up of key words set off by colons. The key words are followed by parameters that can be followed by optional units.
Example: :TRIGger:SEQuence:VIDeo:LEVel 2.5V
The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. In the documentation, upper case letters indicate the short form of the key word. The upper and lower case letters, together, indicate the long form of the key word.
Either form may be used in the command.
Example: :Trig:Seq:Vid:Lev 2.5V is the same as
trigger:sequence:video:level 2.5V
.
The command :TRIGG:Sequence:Video:Level 2.5V is not valid because
:TRIGG
is neither the long, nor the short form of the command.
182 Chapter 3
Programming Fundamentals
Special Characters in Commands
Special Characters in Commands
Meaning Example
|
Special
Character
[ ]
< >
{ }
A vertical stroke between
parameters indicates alternative choices. The effect of the command is different depending on which parameter is selected.
A vertical stroke between key
words indicates identical effects exist for several key words. Only one of these key words is used at a time. The command functions the same for either key word.
Key words in square brackets are optional when composing the command. These implied key words will be executed even if they are omitted.
Command:
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle
The choices are neg, pos, and samp.
:SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion SAMPle
is one possible command choice.
Command:
[:SENSe]:CHPower:BANDwidth|BWIDth:INTegrati on
Two identical commands are:
:SENSe:CHPower:BANDwidth:INTegration
:SENSe:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration
Command:
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO
The following commands are all valid and have identical effects:
:bandwidth:auto
:bandwidth:resolution:auto
:sense:bandwidth:auto
Angle brackets around a word, or words, indicates they are not to be used literally in the command. They represent the needed item.
Command:
:SENSe:FREQ <freq>
In this command example the word <freq> should be replaced by an actual frequency:
:SENSe:FREQ 9.7 MHz
Parameters in braces can optionally be used in the command either not at all, once, or several times.
Command:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA:MERGe
<freq>,<rel_ampl>{,<freq>,<rel_ampl>}
A valid form of this command is:
[SENSe:]CORRection:CSET1:DATA:MERGe
740000,.94 1250000,.31 3320000,1.7
Chapter 3 183
Programming Fundamentals
Parameters in Commands
Parameters in Commands
There are four basic types of parameters: boolean, key words, variables and arbitrary block program data.
Boolean
The expression OFF|ON|0|1 is a two state boolean-type parameter. The numeric value 0 is equivalent to OFF. Any numeric value other than 0 is equivalent to ON.
The numeric values of 0 or 1 are commonly used in the command instead of OFF or ON, and queries of the parameter always return a numeric value of 0 or 1.
Key Word
The parameter key words that are allowed for a particular command are defined in the command description and are separated with a vertical slash.
Units
Numerical variables may include units. The valid units for a command depends on the variable type being used. See the following variable descriptions. If no units are sent, the indicated default units will be used. Units can follow the numerical value with, or without, a space.
Variable
A variable can be entered in exponential format as well as standard numeric format. The appropriate variable range and its optional units are defined in the command description.
In addition to these values, the following key words may also be used in commands where they are applicable.
MINimum - sets the parameter to the smallest possible value.
MAXimum - sets the parameter to the largest possible value.
UP - increments the parameter.
DOWN- decrements the parameter.
Include the key word MINimum or MAXimum after the question mark in a query in order to return the numeric value of the key word.
Example query: [:SENSE]:FREQuency:CENTer? MAXimum
Variable Parameters
<ampl>,
<rel_ampl> The <ampl> (amplitude) parameter and the <rel_ampl> (relative amplitude) parameter consist of a rational number followed by optional units. Acceptable units for <ampl> include: V, mV,
µV, dBm, dBmV, dB
µV, Watts, W. <rel_ampl> units are given in dB.
184 Chapter 3
Programming Fundamentals
Parameters in Commands
<angle>
<file_name> A file name parameter is the name of your file including the full path. The back slash that follows the drive colon (C:\), usually used in computer paths, is not used in the SCPI command string.
<freq>
An angle parameter is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are degrees. Acceptable units include:
DEG, RAD.
A frequency parameter is a positive rational number followed by optional units. The default unit is Hz. Acceptable units include:
Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz.
<integer>
<number>
<percent>
There are no units associated with an integer parameter.
A number parameter is a member of the set of positive or negative intrigers and including zero. Fractional numbers are included in the number parameter. There are no units associated with a number parameter.
A percent parameter is a rational number between 0 and 100, with no units.
<rel_power> A relative power parameter is a positive rational number followed by optional units. The default units are dB. Acceptable units are dB only.
<string>
<time>
A string parameter includes a series of alpha numeric characters.
A time parameter is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are seconds. Acceptable units include: S,
MS, US.
Block Program Data
Definite length arbitrary block response data is defined in section 8.7.9.2 of IEEE
Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common
Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
<definite_length_block> Allows data to be transmitted over the system interface as a series of 8 bit data bytes. This element is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data, 8 bit extended ASCII codes, or other data that are not able to be directly displayed.
A definite length block of data starts with an
ASCII header that begins with # and indicates how many additional data points are following in the block. For example, if the header is #512320, then interpret the header as follows:
Chapter 3 185
Programming Fundamentals
Parameters in Commands
• The first digit in the header (5) represents how many additional digits/bytes there are in the header.
• The numbers 12320 indicates 12 thousand, 3 hundred, 20 data bytes follow the header.
• To determine how may points in the block, divide 12320 by your selected data format bytes/point. Divide by 8 for real
64, or 4 for real 32. In this example there are 1540 points in the block if your selected data format is real 64.
186 Chapter 3
NOTE
Programming Fundamentals
Improving Measurement Speed
Improving Measurement Speed
There are a number of things you can do in your programs to make them run faster:
“Turn off the display updates” on page 187.
“Use binary data format instead of ASCII” on page 188.
“Minimize the number of GPIB transactions.” on page 188.
“Avoid unnecessary use of *RST.” on page 189.
“Minimize DUT/instrument setup changes.” on page 189.
There are additional things you can do to run faster if you are using a measurement personality option (i.e. instrument Modes other than the standard Spectrum
Analysis Mode). The following applies only to a specific option mode:
“Using an Option Mode: Minimize the number of GPIB transactions.” on page 189.
Turn off the display updates
:DISPlay:ENABle OFF
turns off the display. Updating the display slows down the measurement. For remote testing, since the computer is processing the data rather than a person, there is no need to display the data on the analyzer screen.
Disable auto alignment
:CALibration:AUTO OFF
disables the automatic alignment process of the instrument. Automatic alignment processing occurs at the end of each sweep. In a stable operating environment, automatic alignment consumes very little instrument resources. However, in a high throughput application, any demand upon instrument resources affects measurement update rate.
When auto alignment is off, the
Align Now
,
All
function should be performed periodically. Refer to the appropriate “Specifications and Characteristics” chapter in the Agilent Technologies ESA Spectrum Analyzers Specifications Guide - E
Series or Agilent Technologies ESA Spectrum Analyzers Specifications Guide - L
Series for more information on how often to perform
Align Now
,
All
when the auto alignment is off.
Use a fixed IF Gain range
In applications where narrow resolution bandwidths (< 1 kHz) are required and a high dynamic range is not required,
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[SCALe]:LOG:RANGe:AUTO OFF
disables auto ranging and results in increased measurement update rate.
Chapter 3 187
Programming Fundamentals
Improving Measurement Speed
Disable the IF/Video/Sweep output ports
If the analyzer has Options A4J (IF, Video and Sweep Ports) or AYX (Fast Time
Domain Sweeps), various output signals with rear-panel ports are controlled by instrument processing. If these ports are not used in a particular application,
:SYSTem:PORTs:IFVSweep:ENABle OFF
can be used to disable the ports and conserve instrument resources.
Select phase noise performance
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis
can be used to optimize either phase noise performance or tuning speed. In some settings optimizing for tuning speed reduces sweep time and the “re-tune” time between sweeps. In other settings only the re-tune time is improved.
Use binary data format instead of ASCII
The ASCII data format is the instrument default since it is easier for people to understand and is required by SCPI for *RST. However, data input/output is faster using the binary formats.
:FORMat:DATA REAL,64
selects the 64-bit binary data format for all your numerical data queries. You may need to swap the byte order if you are using a PC rather than UNIX. NORMal is the default byte order. Use :FORMat:BORDer
SWAP
to change the byte order so that the least significant byte is sent first.
When using the binary format, data is sent in a block of bytes with an
ASCII
header.
A data query would return the block of data in the following format: #DNNN<nnn binary data bytes>
To parse the data:
• Read two characters (#D), where D tells you how many N characters follow the
D character.
• Read D characters, the resulting integer specifies the number of data bytes sent.
• Read the bytes into a real array.
For example, suppose the header is #512320.
• The first character/digit in the header (5) tells you how many additional digits there are in the header.
• The 12320 means 12 thousand, 3 hundred, 20 data bytes follow the header.
• Divide this number of bytes by your current data format (bytes/data point),
8 for real,64. For this example, there are 1540 data points in the block of data.
Minimize the number of GPIB transactions.
When you are using the GPIB for control of your instrument, each transaction requires driver overhead and bus handshaking, so minimizing these transactions reduces the time used.
You can reduce bus transactions by sending multiple commands per transaction.
188 Chapter 3
Programming Fundamentals
Improving Measurement Speed
See the information on “Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line” in the
SCPI Language Basics section.
If you are using the pre-configured
MEASURE
key measurements and are making the same measurement multiple times with small changes in the measurement setup, use the single READ command. It is faster then using INITiate and FETCh.
Avoid unnecessary use of *RST.
Remember that *RST presets all the measurements and settings to their factory defaults and my also change the mode. This forces you to reset the measurement settings of the analyzer even if they use similar mode setup or measurement settings. See
Minimize DUT/instrument setup changes.
below.
Minimize DUT/instrument setup changes.
• Some instrument setup parameters are common to multiple measurements.
You should look at your measurement process with a focus on minimizing setup changes. If your test process involves nested loops, make sure that the inner-most loop is the fastest. Also, check if the loops could be nested in a different order to reduce the number of parameter changes as you step through the test.
• Are you are using the pre-configured Measurements (
MEASURE
key)?
Remember that if you have already set your Meas Setup parameters for a measurement, and you want to make another one of these measurements later, use READ:<meas>?. The MEASure:<meas>?. command resets all the settings to the defaults, while READ changes back to that measurement without changing the setup parameters from the previous use.
• Are you are using the pre-configured Measurements (
MEASURE
key)?
Also remember that Mode Setup parameters remain constant across all the measurements (such as: center/channel frequency, amplitude, radio standard, input selection, trigger setup). You don’t have to re-initialize them each time you change to a different measurement.
Using an Option Mode: Minimize the number of GPIB transactions.
When you are using the GPIB for control of your instrument, each transaction requires driver overhead and bus handshaking, so minimizing these transactions reduces the time used.
• If you are making the same measurement multiple times with small changes in the measurement setup, use the single READ command. It is faster than using
INITiate and FETCh.
Chapter 3 189
Programming Fundamentals
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line
Multiple commands can be written on the same line, reducing your code space requirement. To do this:
• Commands must be separated with a semicolon (;).
• If the commands are in different subsystems, the key word for the new subsystem must be preceded by a colon (:).
• If the commands are in the same subsystem, the full hierarchy of the command key words need not be included. The second command can start at the same key word level as the command that was just executed.
SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax
A terminator must be provided when an instrument is controlled using RS-232
(Option 1AX). There are several issues to be understood about choosing the proper
SCPI terminator and separator when this is the case. There is no current SCPI standard for RS-232. Although one intent of SCPI is to be interface independent,
<END> is only defined for IEEE 488 operation. At the time of this writing, the
RS-232 terminator issue was in the process of being addressed in IEEE standard
1174.
A semicolon (;) is not a SCPI terminator, it is a separator. The purpose of the separator is to queue multiple commands or queries in order to obtain multiple actions and/or responses. Make sure that you do not attempt to use the semicolon as a terminator when using RS-232 control.
Basically all binary trace and response data is terminated with <NL><END>, as defined in Section 8.5 of IEEE Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes,
Formats, Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std
488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
The following are some examples of good and bad commands. The examples are created from an ESA spectrum analyzer with the simple set of commands indicated below:
[:SENSe]
:POWer
[:RF]
:ATTenuation 40dB
[:SENSe]
:FREQuency
:STARt
:POWer
[:RF]
:MIXer
:RANGe
[:UPPer]
190 Chapter 3
Programming Fundamentals
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line
:TRIGger
[:SEQuence]
:EXTernal [1]
:SLOPe
POSitive
Bad Command Good Command
PWR:ATT 40dB POW:ATT 40dB
The short form of POWER is POW, not PWR.
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;MIX:RANG –20dBm FREQ:STAR 30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG
–20dBm
The :MIX:RANG command is in the same :SENSE subsystem as :FREQ, but executing the :FREQ command puts you back at the :SENSE level. You must specify :POW to get to the :MIX:RANG command.
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;POW:MIX RANG
–20dBm
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG
–20dBm
:MIX
and :RANG require a colon to separate them.
:POW:ATT 40dB;TRIG:FREQ:STAR
2.3GHz
:POW:ATT 40dB;:FREQ:STAR
2.3GHz
:FREQ:STAR
is in the :SENSE subsystem, not the :TRIGGER subsystem.
:POW:ATT?:FREQ:STAR?
:POW:ATT?;:FREQ:STAR?
:POW
and :FREQ are within the same :SENSE subsystem, but they are two separate commands, so they should be separated with a semicolon, not a colon.
:POW:ATT -5dB;:FREQ:STAR 10MHz :POW:ATT 5dB;:FREQ:STAR 10MHz
Attenuation cannot be a negative value.
Chapter 3 191
Programming Fundamentals
Overview of GPIB (Option A4H)
Overview of GPIB (Option A4H)
GPIB Instrument Nomenclature
An instrument that is part of a GPIB network is categorized as a listener, talker, or controller, depending on its current function in the network.
Listener A listener is a device capable of receiving data or commands from other instruments. Any number of instruments in the GPIB network can be listeners simultaneously.
Talker
Controller
A talker is a device capable of transmitting data or commands to other instruments. To avoid confusion, an GPIB system allows only one device at a time to be an active talker.
A controller is an instrument, typically a computer, capable of managing the various GPIB activities. Only one device at a time can be an active controller.
GPIB Command Statements
Command statements form the nucleus of GPIB programming. They are understood by all instruments in the network. When combined with the programming language codes, they provide all management and data communication instructions for the system. Refer to the programming language manual and your computers I/O programming manual for more information.
The seven fundamental command functions are as follows:
• An abort function that stops all listener/talker activity on the interface bus, and prepares all instruments to receive a new command from the controller.
Typically, this is an initialization command used to place the bus in a known starting condition (sometimes called: abort, abortio, reset, halt).
• A remote function that causes an instrument to change from local control to remote control. In remote control, the front panel keys are disabled except for the Local key and the line power switch (sometimes called: remote, resume).
• A local lockout function, that can be used with the remote function, to disable the front panel Local key. With the Local key disabled, only the controller (or a hard reset by the line power switch) can restore local control (sometimes called: local).
192 Chapter 3
Programming Fundamentals
Overview of GPIB (Option A4H)
• A local function that is the complement to the remote command, causing an instrument to return to local control with a fully enabled front panel (sometimes called: local, resume).
• A clear function that causes all GPIB instruments, or addressed instruments, to assume a cleared condition. The definition of clear is unique for each instrument (sometimes called: clear, reset, control, send).
In the Agilent ESA Spectrum Analyzer, clear does the following:
1. Clears the Input Buffer and the Output Queue.
2. Resets the parser.
3. Clears any current operations, such as *OPC, i.e., returns the device to
Operation Complete Query Idle State and Operation Complete Command
Idle State.
4. Aborts /resumes the current sweep.
• An output function that is used to send function commands and data commands from the controller to the addressed instrument (sometimes called: output, control, convert, image, iobuffer, transfer).
• An enter function that is the complement of the output function and is used to transfer data from the addressed instrument to the controller (sometimes called: enter, convert, image, iobuffer, on timeout, set timeout, transfer).
Chapter 3 193
Programming Fundamentals
Overview of RS-232 (Option 1AX)
Overview of RS-232 (Option 1AX)
Serial interface programming techniques are similar to most general I/O applications. Due to the asynchronous nature of serial I/O operations, special care must be exercised to ensure that data is not lost by sending to another device before the device is ready to receive. Modem line handshaking can he used to help solve this problem. These and other topics are discussed in greater detail in your programming language documentation.
Settings for the Serial Interface
Please refer to the documentation on your computer and I/O to configure the serial interface. Some common serial interface configuration settings are:
Baud Rate to
Bits per character to
Parity to
Stop bits to
9600
8
Odd or disabled
1
Handshake and Baud Rate
To determine hardware operating parameters, you need to know the answer for each of the following questions about the peripheral device:
• Which of the following signal and control lines are actively used during communication with the peripheral?
— Data Set Ready (DSR)
— Clear to Send (CTS)
• What baud rate is expected by the peripheral?
Character Format Parameters
To define the character format, you must know the requirements of the peripheral device for the following parameters:
• Character Length: Eight data bits are used for each character, excluding start, stop, and parity bits.
• Parity Enable: Parity is disabled (absent) for each character.
• Stop Bits: One stop bit is included with each character.
194 Chapter 3
Programming Fundamentals
Overview of RS-232 (Option 1AX)
Modem Line Handshaking
To use modem line handshaking for data transfer you would consider the following tasks:
1. Set Data Terminal Ready and Request-to-Send modem lines to active state.
2. Check Data Set Ready and Clear-to-Send modem lines to be sure they are active.
3. Send information to the interface and thence to the peripheral.
4. After data transfer is complete, clear Data Terminal Ready and
Request-to-Send signals.
For ENTER operations:
1. Set Data Terminal Ready line to active state. Leave Request-to-Send inactive.
2. Check Data Set Ready and Data Carrier Detect modem lines to be sure they are active.
3. Input information from the interface as it is received from the peripheral.
4. After the input operation is complete, clear the Data Terminal Ready signal.
Data Transfer Errors
The serial interface can generate several types of errors when certain conditions are encountered while receiving data from the peripheral device. Errors can be generated by any of the following conditions:
• Parity error. The parity bit on an incoming character does not match the parity expected by the receiver. This condition is most commonly caused by line noise.
• Framing error. Start and stop bits do not match the timing expectations of the receiver. This can occur when line noise causes the receiver to miss the start bit or obscures the stop bits.
• Overrun error. Incoming data buffer overrun caused a loss of one or more data characters. This is usually caused when data is received by the interface, but no
ENTER statement has been activated to input the information.
• Break received. A BREAK was sent to the interface by the peripheral device.
The desktop computer program must be able to properly interpret the meaning of a break and take appropriate action.
Chapter 3 195
Programming Fundamentals
Overview of RS-232 (Option 1AX)
196 Chapter 3
4
Status Registers
This chapter contains a comprehensive description of status registers explaining what status registers are and how to use them so you can use a program to monitor the instrument. Information about all of the bits of the status registers is also provided.
197
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of
Analyzer Events and Conditions
Programs often need to detect and manage error conditions or changes in analyzer status. Agilent ESA products allow this function to be performed using status registers. You can determine the state of certain analyzer hardware and firmware events and conditions by programming the status register system.
Refer to
Figure 4-1 . The status system is comprised of multiple registers arranged in a hierarchical order.
The service request enable register is at the top of the hierarchy and contains the general status information for the analyzer events and conditions. The lower-priority status registers propagate their data to the higher-priority registers in the data structures by means of summary bits. These registers are used to determine the states of specific events or conditions.
Figure 4-1 Status Register System Simplified Block Diagram
The two methods used to programmatically access the information in status registers are the polling method and the service request method. An explanation of these methods is given in the next section
“What are the Status Registers?”
What are the Status Registers?
Refer to
Figure 4-2 , which shows the overall status register system in detail. Most status registers are
198 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
composed of the five individual registers described below. One such status register in the figure is entitled “STATus: QUEStionable,” which is both the name of the register, and the SCPI command form used to access the register. From now on, the SCPI command form will be used when referring to the various registers. There are IEEE common SCPI commands noted under some register names in parenthesis. These commands are associated with those registers, and their effects are described under
“How Do You Access the Status Registers?” in this chapter, and in the beginning of
in this guide.
Refer to the right-hand part of the STATus: QUEStionable register while reading the following register descriptions.
Condition
Register A condition register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status of the analyzer. There is no latching or buffering for a condition register.
Negative
Transition
Filter A negative transition filter specifies the bits in the condition register that will set corresponding bits in the event register when the condition bit changes from
1 to 0.
Positive
Transition
Filter A positive transition filter specifies the bits in the condition register that will set corresponding bits in the event register when the condition bit changes from
0 to 1.
Event
Register An event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the positive and negative transition filters. Bits in the event register are latched, and once set, they remain set until cleared by either querying the register contents or sending the *CLS command.
Event
Enable
Register An event enable register specifies the bits in the event register that can generate a summary bit. Summary bits are, in turn, used by the status byte register.
Chapter 4 199
Figure 4-2
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Overall Status Register System Diagram
200 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Status registers (except for the status byte register and the standard event status register) consist of the registers whose contents can be used to produce status summary bits.
These summary bits are then manipulated as follows: The condition register passes summary bits to the negative and positive transition filters, after which they are stored in the event register. The contents of the event register are logically ANDed with the contents of the event enable register and the result is logically ORed to produce a status summary bit. The status summary bit is then passed to the status byte register either directly, or through the STATus: QUEStionable register. Next, the summary bits are logically ANDed with the contents of the service request enable register and the result is logically ORed to produce the request service (*RQS) bit in the status byte register.
How Do You Access the Status Registers?
There are two different methods to access the status registers:
• Common Commands Accesses and Controls
• Status Subsystem Commands
Common Command Access and Control
Most monitoring of the analyzer conditions is done at the highest level using the following IEEE common commands:
*CLS
(clear status) clears the status byte by emptying the error queue and clearing all the event registers.
*ESE,*ESE?
(event status enable) sets and queries the bits in the enable register part of the standard event status register.
*ESR?
(event status register) queries and clears the standard event status register.
*OPC
(operation complete) sets bit 0 in the standard event status register when all operations are complete.
*SRE,*SRE?
(service request enable) sets and queries the value of the service request enable register.
*STB?
(status byte) queries the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents.
Complete command descriptions are given in
Chapter 5, “Remote Command Reference.”
under the subsection entitled
“IEEE Common Commands” on page 235 .
Chapter 4 201
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
NOTE
If you are using the status bits and the analyzer mode is changed, the status bits should be read, and any error conditions resolved, prior to switching modes. Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change. This is true unless they recur after the mode change, although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers.
Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power-on defaults. Hence any event or condition register masks must be re-established after a mode change. Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change, since that is the default state after power up.
Status Subsystem Commands
Individual status registers can be set and queried using the commands in the STATus subsystem in
Chapter 5, “Remote Command Reference.”
in this guide. There are two methods used to programmatically detect and manage error conditions or changes in analyzer status. Either method allows you to monitor one or more conditions. The two methods are:
• The Polling Method
• The Service Request (SRQ) Method
The Polling Method
In the polling method, the analyzer has a passive role. It only tells the controller that conditions have changed when the controller asks the right question. The polling method works well if you do not need to know about changes the moment they occur. This method is very efficient.
Use the polling method when either:
— your programming language/development environment does not support SRQ interrupts
— you want to write a simple, single-purpose program and don’t want the added complexity of setting up an SRQ handler
The Service Request (SRQ) Method
The SRQ method allows timely communication of information without requiring continuous controller involvement. Using this method, the analyzer takes a more active role. It tells the controller when there has been a condition change without the controller asking. The SRQ method should be used if you must know immediately when a condition changes. This is in contrast to the polling method, which requires the program to repeatedly read the registers to detect a change.
202 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Use the SRQ method when either:
— you need time-critical notification of changes
— you are monitoring more than one device which supports SRQs
— you need to have the controller do something else while the analyzer is making a measurement
— you can’t afford the performance penalty inherent to polling
Using the Service Request (SRQ) Method
Your language, bus, and programming environment must be able to support SRQ interrupts (for example, using C and C++ with the GPIB). When you monitor a condition with the SRQ method, you must establish the following parameters:
1. Determine which bit monitors the condition.
2. Determine how that bit reports to the request service (RQS) bit of the status byte.
3. Send GPIB commands to enable the bits that monitor the condition and to enable the summary bits that report the condition to the RQS bit.
4. Enable the controller to respond to service requests.
When the condition changes, the analyzer sets the RQS bit and the GPIB SRQ line. The controller is informed of the change as soon as it occurs. The time the controller would otherwise have used to monitor the condition can now be used to perform other tasks. Your program also determines how the controller responds to the SRQ.
Generating a Service Request
Before using the SRQ method of generating a service request, first become familiar with how service requests are generated. Bit 6 of the status byte register is the request service summary (RQS) bit. The
RQS bit is set whenever there is a change in the register bit that it has been configured to monitor. The
RQS bit will remain set until the condition that caused it is cleared. It can be queried without erasing the contents using the *STB? command. Configure the RQS function using the *SRE command.
When a register set causes a summary bit in the status byte to change from 0 to 1, the analyzer can initiate the service request (SRQ) process. However, the process is only initiated if both of the following conditions are true:
• The corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1.
• The analyzer does not have a service request pending. (A service request is considered to be pending between the time the analyzer SRQ process is initiated, and the time the controller reads the status byte register.)
The SRQ process sets the GPIB SRQ line true. It also sets the status byte request service (RQS) bit to 1.
Both actions are necessary to inform the controller that the analyzer requires service. Setting the SRQ line only informs the controller that some device on the bus requires service. Setting the RQS bit allows the controller to determine which device requires service.
If your program enables the controller to detect and respond to service requests, it should instruct the controller to perform a serial poll when the GPIB SRQ line is set true. Each device on the bus returns the contents of its status byte register in response to this poll. The device, whose RQS bit is set to 1, is the device that requested service.
Chapter 4 203
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
NOTE
When you read the analyzer status byte register with a serial poll, the RQS bit is reset to 0. Other bits in the register are not affected.
Restarting a measurement with the :INITiate command can cause the measuring bit to pulse low. A low pulse causes an SRQ if the status register is configured to SRQ upon end-of-measurement. To avoid this, perform the following steps:
1. Set :INITiate:CONTinuous off.
2. Set/enable the status registers.
3. Restart the measurement (send :INITiate).
Example of Monitoring Conditions Using the :STATus Command
Use the following steps to monitor a specific condition:
1. Determine which register contains the bit that reports the condition.
2. Send the unique SCPI query that reads that register.
3. Examine the bit to see if the condition has changed.
4. Act upon the cause of the condition and the SRQ to re-enable the method.
The examples below show how to use the :STATus command to perform the following tasks:
• Check the analyzer hardware and firmware status.
Do this by querying the condition registers which continuously monitor status. These registers represent the current state of the analyzer. Bits in a condition register are updated in real time. When the condition monitored by a particular bit becomes true, the bit is set to 1. When the condition becomes false, the bit is reset to 0.
• Monitor a particular bit (condition), or bits.
Once you have enabled a bit using the event enable register, the analyzer will monitor that particular bit. If the bit becomes true in the event register it will stay set until the event register is cleared.
Querying the event register allows you to detect that this condition occurred even if the condition no longer exists. The event register can only be cleared by querying it or sending the *CLS command, which clears all event registers.
• Monitor a change in the condition of a particular bit, or bits.
Once you have enabled a bit, the analyzer will monitor it for a change in its condition. The transition registers are preset to respond to the condition of going from 0 to 1 (positive transitions). This can be changed so that the selected bit is detected if it goes from 1 to 0 (negative transition), or if either transition occurs. Query the event register to determine whether or not a change has been made to how the transition registers respond. The event register can only be cleared by querying it or sending the *CLS command, which clears all event registers.
Setting and Querying the Status Register
See
. Each bit in a register is represented by a numerical value based on its location. This number is sent with the command to enable a particular bit. To enable more than one bit, send the sum of all of the bits involved.
For example, to enable bit 0 and bit 6 of the standard event status register, you would send the command
*ESE 65
(1 + 64).
The results of a query are evaluated in a similar way. If the *STB? command returns a decimal value of
140, (140 = 128 + 8 + 4) then bit 7 is true, bit 3 is true, and bit 2 is true.
204 Chapter 4
Figure 4-3
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Status Register Bit Values
Decimal
Value
32768
16384 8192 4096
2048 1024
512 256
128
64
32 16
8
4
2 1
Bit Number
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ck730a
Details of Bits in All Registers
. The rest of this chapter lists the bits in each register shown in the figure, along with descriptions of their purpose.
Status Byte Register
Figure 4-4 Status Byte Register Diagram
Status Byte Register
5
6
7
3
4
0
1
2
Unused
Unused
Error/Event Queue Summary Bit
Questionable Status Summary Bit
Message Available (MAV)
Standard Event Summary Bit
Request Service Summary (RQS)
Operation Status Summary Bit
&
&
&
&
&
&
+
&
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Service Request Enable Register ck763a
Chapter 4 205
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
The status byte register contains the following bits:
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Decimal
Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Description
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Error/Event Queue Summery Bit
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the SCPI error queue is not empty. The SCPI error queue contains at least one error message.
Questionable Status Summary Bit
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the questionable status summary bit has been set. The questionable status event register can then be read to determine the specific condition that caused this bit to be set.
Message Available (MAV)
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the analyzer has data ready in the output queue.
There are no lower status groups that provide input to this bit.
Standard Event Status Summary Bit
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the standard event status summary bit has been set. The standard event status register can then be read to determine the specific event that caused this bit to be set.
Request Service (RQS) Summery Bit
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the analyzer has at least one reason to report a status change. This bit is also called the master summary status bit (MSS).
Operation Status Summary Bit
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the operation status summary bit has been set. The operation status event register can then be read to determine the specific event that caused this bit to be set.
To query the status byte register, send the *STB command. The response will be the decimal sum of the bits that are set to 1. For example, if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are set to 1, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8. So the decimal value 136 is returned.
Service Request Enable Register
In addition to the status byte register, the status byte group also contains the service request enable register. The status byte service request enable register lets you choose which bits in the Status Byte
Register will trigger a service request.
Send the *SRE <number> command (where <number> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable plus the decimal value of bit 6). For example, assume that you want to enable bit 7 so that whenever the operation status summary bit is set to 1, it will trigger a service request. Send the *SRE
192
(128 + 64) command. The *SRE? command returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits enabled previously with the *SRE <number> command.
206 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
NOTE
You must always add 64 (the numeric value of RQS bit 6) to your numeric sum when you enable any bits for a service request.
The service request enable register contains the following bits:
Figure 4-5 Service Request Enable Register
NOTE
The service request enable register presets to zeros (0).
Standard Event Status Register
The standard event status register is used to determine the specific event that sets bit 5 in the status byte register. The standard event status register does not have negative and positive transition registers, nor a
condition register. Use the IEEE common commands at the beginning of Chapter 5, “Remote Command
Reference.” in this guide to access the register.
To query the standard event status register, send the *ESR command. The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1. For example, if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are set to 1, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8. So the decimal value 136 is returned.
See “Setting and Querying the Status Register” on page 204
in this chapter for more information.
Chapter 4 207
Figure 4-6
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Standard Event Status Register Diagram
Operation Complete
Request Bus Control
Query Error
Device Dependent Error
Execution Error
Command Error
Unused
Power On
+
Event Register
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
Event
Enable Register
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To Status Byte Register Bit #5 ck723a
The standard event status register contains the following bits:
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
Decimal
Value
1
2
4
8
16
Description
Operation Complete
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that all operations were completed following execution of the *OPC command.
Request Bus Control
: This bit is always set to 0. (The analyzer does not request control.)
Query Error
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a query error has occurred. Query errors have SCPI error numbers from
−499 to
–400.
Device Dependent Error
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a device dependent error has occurred. Device dependent errors have SCPI error numbers from –399 to –300 and 1 to
32767.
Execution Error
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that an execution error has occurred. Execution errors have SCPI error numbers from –299 to –200.
208 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
6
7
Bit
5
Decimal
Value
32
64
128
Description
Command Error
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a command error has occurred. Command errors have SCPI error numbers from –199 to –100.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Power On
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the analyzer has been turned off and then on.
Standard Event Status Event Enable Register
The event enable register (contained in the standard event status register) lets you choose which bits will set the summary bit (bit 5 of the status byte register) to 1. Send the *ESE <number> command (where
<number>
is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable).
For example, to enable bit 7 and bit 3 so that whenever either of those bits is set to 1, the standard event status summary bit of the status byte register will also be set to 1, send the *ESE 136 (128 + 8) command. The *ESE? command returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the *ESE <number> command.
Figure 4-7 Standard Event Status Event Enable Register
STATus:OPERation Register
The STATus:OPERation register is used to determine the specific event that sets bit 7 in the status byte register. This register also monitors the current measurement state and checks to see if the analyzer is performing any of these functions:
• measuring
• calibrating
• sweeping
• waiting for a trigger
Chapter 4 209
Figure 4-8
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Status Operation Register Diagram
The STATus:OPERation condition register contains the following bits:
Bit Description
0
Decimal
Value
0
Calibrating
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the analyzer is performing a self-calibration.
210 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit Decimal
Value
Description
4
5
1
2
3
6 a
2
4
8
16
32
64
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Sweeping
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a sweep is in progress.
Measuring
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a measurement is in progress.
Waiting for Trigger
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a measurement is in a “wait for trigger” state.
Waiting for ARM:
A 1 in this bit position indicates that the hardware is being set up and is not yet ready to be triggered.
8
7
9 b
10
11
12
13
14
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Paused
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument is in the paused state of the measurement.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
15 32768
Always Zero (0)
a. The description of this bit refers to any measurement under the
MEASURE
key.
b. This bit applies to ESA optional measurement personalities only, and may or may not be implemented in all such personalities.
STATus:OPERation Condition and Event Enable Registers
The STATus:OPERation condition register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status of the analyzer, and is read-only. To query the register, send the :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? command. The response will be the decimal sum of the bits that are set to 1. For example, if bit number 9
Chapter 4 211
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
and bit number 3 are set to 1, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 512 plus 8. So the decimal value 520 is returned.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to
0). Send the :STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <num> (negative transition) command or the
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <num>
(positive transition) command (where <num> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable).
The STATus:OPERation event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are destructive read-only data. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register. To query the event register, send the
:STATus:OPERation:[:EVENt]?
command.
The STATus:OPERation event enable register lets you choose the bits that will set the operation status summary bit (bit 7) of the status byte register to 1. Send the :STATus:OPERation:ENABle <num> command where <num> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
For example, to enable bit 9 and bit 3 (so that whenever either bit 9 or 3 is set to 1, the operation status summary bit of the status byte register will be set to 1), send the :STATus:OPERation:ENABle 520
(512 + 8) command. The :STATus:OPERation:ENABle? command returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the :STATus:OPERation:ENABle <num> command.
STATus:QUEStionable Registers
STATus:QUEStionable registers monitor the overall analyzer condition. They are accessed with the
:STATus:OPERation
and :STATus:QUEStionable commands in the :STATus command subsystem.
The STATus:QUEStionable registers also monitor the analyzer to see if there are any questionable events that occurred. These registers look for anything that may cause an error or that may induce a faulty measurement. Signs of a faulty measurement include the following:
• hardware problems
• out of calibration situations
• unusual signals
212 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
NOTE
All bits are summary bits from lower-level event registers. (For a general diagram of the STATus:QUEStionable register, see
.)
A Questionable Status condition register query response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1. For example, if bit number 9 and bit number 3 are set to 1, the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 512 plus
8. So the decimal value 520 is returned.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to
0). Send the command :STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <num> (negative transition) or
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <num>
(positive transition) where <num> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
Chapter 4 213
Figure 4-9
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Status Questionable Register Diagram
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
POWer Summary
Reserved
FREQuency Summary
Reserved
Reserved
CALibration Summary
INTregrity Sum
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Always Zero (0)
+
QUEStionable Status
Condition Register
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
QUEStionable
Positive
Transition Filter
Status
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
QUEStionable
Negative
Transition Filter
Status
15 14 13
QUEStionable
Event Register
Status
15 14 13
12 11 10 9 8 7
12 11 10 9 8 7
6 5 4
6 5 4
3 2 1
3 2 1
0
0
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
QUEStionable
Event
Status
Enable Register
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4
&
&
&
&
&
3 2 1 0
To Status Byte Register Bit #3
ck759a
214 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer Register
Figure 4-10 Questionable Status Power Register Diagram
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Power Condition Register are given in the following table.
Chapter 4 215
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
14
15
9
10
11
12
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Decimal
Value
0
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
Description
R.P.P Tripped
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the reverse power protection is tripped (Agilent ESA models
E4401B and E4411B only). Reverse power protection is
“overload” protection for the tracking generator.
Source Unleveled
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the source (tracking generator) output is unleveled.
Source LO Unleveled
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the local oscillator (LO) in the source (tracking generator) is unleveled.
LO Unleveled
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the analyzer local oscillator (LO) is unleveled.
50 MHz Osc Unleveled
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the 50 MHz amplitude reference signal is unleveled.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Input Overload Tripped
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the input overload protection is tripped (Agilent
ESA models E4401B and E4411B only).
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
LO Out Unleveled
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the first local oscillator (LO) output is unleveled. (Agilent
ESA model E4407B option AYZ, External Mixing, only).
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Always Zero (0)
: This bit is always set to 0.
Questionable Status Event Enable Register
The Questionable Status Event Enable Register lets you choose which bits in the Questionable Status
Event Register will set the summary bit (bit 3 of the Status Byte Register) to 1. Send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <num>
where <num> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
216 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
For example, to enable bit 9 and bit 3 so that whenever either of those bits is set to 1, the Questionable
Status Summary bit of the Status Byte Register will be set to 1, send the command
:STAT:QUES:ENAB 520
(512 + 8). The command :STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle? returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <num>
command.
Figure 4-11 Questionable Status Event Enable Register
Bit descriptions in the Status Questionable Condition Register are given in the following table.
Bit
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Decimal
Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
Description
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
POWer Summary
: This is the summary bit for the
Questionable Power Status Register.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
FREQuency Summary
: This is the summary bit for the
Questionable Frequency Status Register.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Chapter 4 217
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Decimal
Value
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Description
CALibration Summary
: This is the summary bit for the
Questionable Calibration Status Register.
INTegrity Sum
: This is the summary bit for the
Questionable Integrity Status Register.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Always Zero (0)
15
Questionable Status Power Condition and Event Registers
The Questionable Status Power Condition Register continuously monitors output power status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only. To query the condition register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to
0). Send the command :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <num> (negative transition) or :STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <num> (positive transition) where
<num>
is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status Power Event Register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
See
“Questionable Status Event Enable Register” on page 216 for an explanation of how to set the
summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <num>
.
218 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency Register
Figure 4-12 Questionable Status Frequency Register Diagram
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Frequency Condition Register are given in the following table.
Chapter 4 219
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3
4
1
2
Bit
0
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Decimal
Value
0
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
Description
Source Synth Unlocked
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the synthesizer in the source (tracking generator) is unlocked.
Freq Ref Unlocked
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the analyzer frequency reference is unlocked.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Synth Unlocked
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the analyzer synthesizer is unlocked.
Invalid Span or BW
: A 1 in this bit position indicates an invalid span or bandwidth during frequency count.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Demodulation
: A 1 in this bit position indicates an invalid span during FM Demodulation and Listen measurements.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Always Zero (0)
: This bit is always set to 0.
220 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Questionable Status Frequency Condition and Event Enable Registers
The Questionable Status Frequency condition register continuously monitors output frequency status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only. To query the condition register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
The negative and positive transition filters specify which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to 0). Send the command :STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency
:NTRansition <num>
(negative transition) or :STATus:QUEStionable
:FREQuency:PTRansition <num>
(positive transition) where <num> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status Frequency Event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency
[:EVENt]?
See “Questionable Status Event Enable Register” on page 216
for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQ:ENABle
<num>.
Chapter 4 221
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration Register
Figure 4-13 Questionable Status Calibration Register Diagram
222 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Calibration Condition Register are given in the following table.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Decimal
Value
0
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
Description
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but are for future use with other Agilent products.
TG Align Failure
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the tracking generator (TG).
RF Align Failure
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the RF section.
IF Align Failure
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the IF section.
LO Align Failure
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the local oscillator
(LO).
ADC Align Failure
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
FM Demod Align Failure
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the
FM demodulation circuitry. (Agilent ESA models E4401B,
E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B Option BAA, FM
Demodulation, only).
Misc/Sys Align Failure
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a digital demodulation RF alignment failure has occurred.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Tracking Peak Needed
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a tracking peak needs to be performed (the tracking generator is in operation). (Agilent ESA models E4402B,
E4403B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B, with Option 1DN,
Tracking Generator, only).
Align RF Skipped
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the alignment of the RF section was skipped, perhaps due to an external 50 MHz signal having been detected.
Align RF Now Needed
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the RF section needs to be aligned.
Chapter 4 223
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
13
14
15
Decimal
Value
8192
16384
32768
Description
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Align Needed
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a full alignment is needed, perhaps due to a large temperature change having been detected with auto align off, or due to default data being used.
Always Zero (0)
: This bit is always set to 0.
224 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated Register
Figure 4-14 Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Register Diagram
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register are given in the following table.
Chapter 4 225
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit
0
1
2
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
11
12
13
14
15
128
256
512
1024
8
16
32
64
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Decimal
Value
0
2
4
Description
Oversweep (Meas Uncal)
: A 1 in this position indicates that the analyzer is in a state that could lead to uncalibrated measurements. This is typically caused by sweeping too fast for the current combination of span, resolution bandwidth, and video bandwidth. Auto coupling may resolve this problem.
Signal Ident ON
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that amplitude measurements may be in error due to signal identification routines being active. Amplitude accuracy is degraded when signal identification is active. (Agilent ESA model E4407B Option AYZ, External Mixing, only.)
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Unused
: This bit is always set to 0.
Always Zero (0)
: This bit is always set to 0.
Questionable Status Calibration Condition and Event Enable Registers
The Questionable Status Calibration condition register continuously monitors the calibration status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only. To query the condition register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition?
The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
226 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to
0). Send the command :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition <num> (negative transition) or :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition <num> (positive transition) where <num> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status Calibration Event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration
[:EVENt]?
See “Questionable Status Event Enable Register” on page 216
for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <num>
.
Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition and Event Enable Registers
The Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register continuously monitors the calibration status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only. To query the condition register, send the command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:CONDition? The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to
0). Send the command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition
<num>
(negative transition) or
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition <num>
(positive transition) where <num> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Event Register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register. To query the event register, send the command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated[:EVENt]?
See “Questionable Status Event Enable Register” on page 216
for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle <num>
.
Chapter 4 227
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity Register
Figure 4-15 Questionable Status Integrity Register Diagram
Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Integrity Condition Register are given in the following table.
228 Chapter 4
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
2 a
3
10 a
11 a
12
5 a
6 a
7 a
Bit
0
1 a
4
8
9 a a
13 a
Decimal
Value
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
Description
Reserved
: This bit is not used by the analyzer, but is for future use with other Agilent products.
No Result Available
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a measurement terminated with no measurement results.
Measurement Timeout
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a measurement terminated due to a timeout.
Data Uncalibrated Summary
: This is the summary bit for the Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated
Register.
IF/ADC Over Range
: The signal input level is too high, causing the analyzer analog-to-digital converter (ADC) range to be exceeded. This may occur with resolution bandwidths less than or equal to 300 Hz in zero span.
Over Range
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the signal is too large at the analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
Under Range
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the signal is too small at the analog-to-digital converter (ADC).
Insufficient Data
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that there is not enough information to perform the measurement or function.
Acquisition Failure
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the demod algorithm cannot correlate to the signal.
Memory Problem
: A 1 in this bit position indicates a failure of the file system memory or digital signal processor
(DSP) memory.
Auto-Trigger Timeout
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the measurement timed out due to no trigger.
Trigger Problem
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the measurement timed out due to no trigger.
Invalid Data
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the present trace data does not reflect the existing analyzer state. Trigger a new sweep and/or measurement.
Unidentified Error
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that a measurement has terminated for a reason other than that given in any of the other bits.
Chapter 4 229
Status Registers
Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions
Bit Decimal
Value
Description
14 a 16384
Setting Limited/Readjusted
: A 1 in this bit position indicates that the user settings could not be achieved with the existing hardware; values were set to limits.
Always Zero (0)
: This bit is always set to 0.
15 32768 a. This bit applies to ESA optional measurement personalities only, and may or may not be implemented in all such personalities.
Questionable Status Integrity Event Condition and Enable Registers
The Questionable Status Integrity Condition Register continuously monitors the calibration status of the analyzer. Condition registers are read-only. To query the condition register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition?
The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1.
The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register. The changes may be positive (from 0 to 1) or negative (from 1 to
0). Send the command :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <num> (negative transition) or :STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <num> (positive transition) where <num> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
The Questionable Status Integrity Event Register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters. Event registers are destructive read-only. Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register. To query the event register, send the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]?
See
“Questionable Status Event Enable Register” on page 216 for an explanation of how to set the
summary bit using the event enable register. In this case, use the command
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <num>
.
230 Chapter 4
5 Remote Command Reference
This chapter contains SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) programming commands for the spectrum analyzer core operation. Refer to
Volume 2 for the commands associated with the one-button measurements that are available when you press the front-panel
MEASURE
key.
231
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
The first few pages of this chapter contain common commands specified in IEEE
Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common
Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
Following these commands, the Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers SCPI commands are listed.
Chapter 3, “Programming Fundamentals,” on page 179
supplement the information presented in this chapter.
Refer to
Chapter 2 , “Front-Panel Key Reference,” on page 39
in this guide for additional information about the operation of each analyzer function. Use the analyzer HELP key to obtain similar information about analyzer key functions.
Refer to the “Agilent 8590/ESA Spectrum Analyzers Programming Conversion
Guide” for specific backwards compatibility information between commands for
HP/Agilent 8590-Series spectrum analyzers and Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers.
If you are using an optional programming compatibility modes (for example
Option 266), you must refer to the manual that came with the option for command information.
232 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
SCPI Sections and Subsections
SCPI Sections and Subsections
SCPI commands related to major functional areas (such as calculate or) are grouped into blocks, or subsystems. Some of these subsystems are further divided into subsections (such as calculate/marker, or sense/harmonics). An instrument model is then created to represent the way in which instrument functionality is viewed and categorized by SCPI. Refer to IEEE SCPI-1997 Volume 2: Command
Reference, Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments, Version 1997.0,
May, 1997 for a more complete description of the SCPI instrument model.
The SCPI subsystems in this chapter are listed in alphabetical order. Likewise, the
SCPI commands are in alphabetical order within the subsystem in which they belong. Refer to the following table to locate SCPI command subsystems and subsections by page number.
SCPI Subsystem/Subsection
IEEE Common Commands
:ABORt
:CALCulate
:CALCulate:LLINe
:CALCulate:MARKer
:CALCulate:NTData
:CALibration
:CONFigure
:COUPle
:DISPlay
:FORMat
:HCOPy
:INITiate
:INPut
:INSTrument
:MMEMory
:OUTPut
[:SENSe]:
[:SENSe]:AVERage
Page
Chapter 5 233
Remote Command Reference
SCPI Sections and Subsections
SCPI Subsystem/Subsection
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth
[:SENSe]:CORRection
[:SENSe]:DEMod
[:SENSe]:DETector
[:SENSe]:FREQuency
[:SENSe]:MIXer
[:SENSe]:POWer
[:SENSe]:SIDentify
[:SENSe]:SWEep
:SOURce
:STATus
:STATus:QUEStionable
:SYSTem
:TRACe
:TRIGger
:UNIT
Page
234 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
IEEE Common Commands
IEEE Common Commands
These commands are specified in IEEE Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard
Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std
488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
Calibration Query
*CAL?
Performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment. A zero is returned if the alignment is successful. The SCPI equivalent for this command is the same as :CALibrate[:ALL]?
Before executing this command, connect a cable between front panel connector
AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers except Agilent models E4401B and E4411B.
If the cable is not connected, CAL:ALL will perform a subset of the RF alignment and a subsequent CAL:RF will be required for the analyzer to meet its specified performance.
The query performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment. A zero is returned if the alignment is successful, even if only a subset of the RF alignment is performed.
Front Panel
Access:
System
,
Alignments
,
Align All Now
Clear Status
*CLS
Clears the status byte. It does this by emptying the error queue and clearing all bits in all of the event registers. The status byte registers summarize the states of the other registers. It is also responsible for generating service requests.
Standard Event Status Enable
*ESE <number>
*ESE?
Sets the bits in the standard event status enable register. This register monitors I/O errors and synchronization conditions such as operation complete, request control, query error, device dependent error, execution error, command error and power on.
A summary bit is generated on execution of the command.
Chapter 5 235
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
IEEE Common Commands
Query returns the state of the standard event status enable register.
Range:. Integer, 0 to 255
Standard Event Status Register Query
*ESR?
Queries and clears the standard event status event register. (This is a destructive read.)
Range: Integer, 0 to 255
Identification Query
*IDN?
Returns an instrument identification information string. The string will contain the model number, serial number and firmware revision. The response is organized into four fields separated by commas. The field definitions are as follows:
Manufacturer
Model
Serial number
Firmware version
Example:
Hewlett-Packard, E4401B, US39120213, A.06.00
As shown in the example, the analyzer returns “Hewlett-Packard” as the manufacturer even though it is now manufactured by Agilent Technologies. This is intentional. Agilent Technologies was created out of the Hewlett-Packard company, and the Hewlett-Packard name is retained to support those customers who have purchased ESA analyzers in the past.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
Instrument State Query
*LRN?
Returns current instrument state data in a block of defined length. The information is in a machine readable format only. Sending the query returns the following format:
#PQQQSYST:SET #NMMM<state_data>
236 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
IEEE Common Commands
The following example is a response to *LRN? The actual sizes will vary depending on the instrument state data size.
Example:
#42031SYST:SET #42016<state data>
The number 4 (P in the preceding query response format) means there are 4 numbers that make up the size of the data that follows. In this example, 2031 bytes will follow the number 4
(42031).
2031 and 2016 (QQQ and MMM in the preceding query response format) represent data size in bytes.
The state can be changed by sending this block of data to the instrument after removing the size information:
Example:
SYST:SET #NMMM<state_data>
Operation Complete
*OPC
*OPC?
Sets bit 0 in the standard event status register to “1” when all pending operations have finished.
The query stops any new commands from being processed until the current processing is complete. Then it returns a “1”, and the program continues. This query can be used to synchronize events of other instruments on the external bus.
*OPC
and *OPC? are currently effective only when immediately preceded by either the :INITiate:IMMediate or a :CALibration command.
Query Instrument Options
This function is provided in the analyzer SCPI language reference in the SYSTem subsystem under :SYSTem:OPTions?.
Recall
*RCL <register>
This command recalls the instrument state from the specified instrument memory register.
Range:
Remarks:
Registers are an integer, 0 to 127
See also commands :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe and
Chapter 5 237
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
IEEE Common Commands
Front Panel
Access:
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
If the state being loaded has a newer firmware revision than the revision of the instrument, no state is recalled and an error is reported.
If the state being loaded has an equal firmware revision than the revision of the instrument, the state will be loaded.
If the state being loaded has an older firmware revision than the revision of the instrument, the instrument will only load the parts of the state that apply to the older revision.
File, Recall State
Reset
*RST
This command presets the instrument to a factory defined condition that is appropriate for remote programming operation. *RST is equivalent to performing the two commands :SYSTem:PRESet and *CLS. This command always performs a factory preset.
The preset performed by *RST is always a factory preset. That is, the same preset performed by :SYSTem:PRESet when :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE is set to
FACTory
.
Front Panel
Access:
Preset
Save
*SAV <register>
This command saves the instrument state to the specified instrument memory register.
Range: Registers are an integer, 0 to 127
Remarks: See also commands :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe and
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save State
238 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
IEEE Common Commands
Service Request Enable
*SRE <integer>
*SRE?
This command sets the value of the service request enable register.
The query returns the value of the register.
Range: Integer, 0 to 255
Read Status Byte Query
*STB?
Returns the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents.
Remarks: See *CLS
Trigger
*TRG
This command triggers the instrument. Use the
:TRIGger:SEQuence:SOURce command to select the trigger source.
Remarks: See also the :INITiate:IMMediate command
Self Test Query
*TST?
This query is used by some instruments for a self test.
For Agilent ESA analyzers, *TST? always returns 0; no tests are performed.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align All Now
Wait-to-Continue
*WAI
This command causes the instrument to wait until all pending commands are completed before executing any additional commands. There is no query form to the command.
Chapter 5 239
Remote Command Reference
ABORt Subsystem
ABORt Subsystem
Abort
:ABORt
Restarts any sweep or measurement in progress and resets the sweep or trigger system. A measurement refers to any of the measurements found in the
MEASURE
menu. SCPI commands associated with these measurements are located in Volume
2 “One-Button Power Measurements”.
If :INITiate:CONTinuous is off (single measure), then
:INITiate:IMMediate will start a new single measurement.
If :INITiate:CONTinuous is on (continuous measure), a new continuous measurement begins immediately.
The INITiate and TRIGger subsystems contain additional related commands.
Front Panel
Access:
Restart
for continuous measurement mode
240 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate Subsystem
CALCulate Subsystem
This subsystem is used to perform post-acquisition data processing. In effect, the collection of new data triggers the CALCulate subsystem. In this instrument, the primary functions in this subsystem are markers and limits. CALCulate subsystem commands used for measurements in the
MEASURE
and
Meas Setup
menus are located in Volume 2 “One-Button Power Measurements”.
NdBpoints
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:NDB?
Selects the power level, below the peak of the signal, at which the signal bandwidth will be measured by the markers.
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] must be ON.
To query the result of NdBpoints, use the command
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult?
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
–3 dB
–80 dB to –1 dB
Default Unit: dB
Remarks: Refer to :CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] for an explanation of this marker function.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), N dB Points
NdBresults
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth:RESult?
Returns the measured bandwidth at the power level defined by
:CALCulate:BWIDth:NDB
. –100 is returned if
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]
is off, or when a result is not available. Refer to CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] for an explanation of this marker function.
Range: Real value less than the current frequency span
Default Unit: Hz
Remarks: When segmented sweep is on, a result will not be available when the NDB marker crosses a segment boundary.
Chapter 5 241
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), N dB Points
NdBstate
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:BWIDth|BANDwidth[:STATe]?
Controls the bandwidth measurement function. The function measures the bandwidth, at the number of dB down specified in :CALCulate:BWIDth:NDB, of the maximum signal on the display.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Off
When this command is turned on, the bandwidth measurement function (N dB Points) is associated with the active marker. If no marker is active at the time this command is turned on, marker 1 becomes the active marker, and a peak search is performed. No restrictions exist for moving the bandwidth measurement function markers to any other signal on the display. However, when this function is turned on, all other concurrent marker functions are suspended.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), N dB Points On Off
Test Current Trace Data Against all Limit Lines
:CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL?
Queries the status of the limit line testing. Returns a 0 if the trace data passes when compared with all the current limit lines. Returns a 1 if the trace data fails any limit line test.
242 Chapter 5
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Limit lines can be defined for your measurement. You can then have the instrument compare the data to your defined limits and indicate a pass/fail condition.
Refer also to :MMEMory and :TRACe subsystems for more trace and limit line commands.
Delete All Limit Lines in Memory
:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete
Deletes all limit lines in volatile memory.
History: Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Delete All Limits
Control Limit Line Amplitude Interpolation
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE
LOGarithmic|LINear
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE?
Selects the type of interpolation done for the amplitude values of the designated limit line when comparing to measured data.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Not affected by preset
Once this function is defined, the selected type is persistent.
Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Amptd Interp Log Lin
Set Fixed or Relative Limit Lines
:CALCulate:LLINe:CMODe FIXed|RELative
:CALCulate:LLINe:CMODe?
Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative.
If you need to change the domain with
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain, do it before this command.
Changing the domain deletes all the existing limit line values.
Chapter 5 243
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Not affected by preset
For Amplitude Parameters:
Regardless of whether the limit line is based on frequency or sweep time, amplitude parameters in a limit line table represent absolute values or relative values. In fixed, the limit line amplitude values are specified in absolute amplitude and do not depend on the reference level. In relative, the limit line amplitude values are relative to the current reference level.
For Fixed Frequency Parameters:
The frequency values in a limit line table are fixed values, and the limit line is positioned accordingly. Fixed limit lines are specified in absolute frequency and do not depend upon the center frequency values.
For Relative Frequency Parameters:
The frequency values in a limit line table are relative values and positions the limit line relative to the center frequency settings.
Relative limit lines are specified in relative frequency and are positioned with respect to the current center frequency. When the current center frequency value is changed, the segment frequencies are converted according to the current center frequency value.
For Time Parameters:
Limit lines that are based on sweep time are always relative to the start time. The horizontal position of the limit line is not affected by this command.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limits Fixed Rel
Set Limit Line X-axis Units
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain FREQuency|TIME
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain?
Selects how the limit line segments are defined: according to frequency, or according to the sweep time setting of the spectrum analyzer.
Changing this setting deletes all existing limit data from the analyzer. In other words, if a limit line has already been defined, changing the type clears the existing limit line.
244 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
When using the :CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain TIME command, do not use the :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE
LOGarithmic
command. An error will result because this combination attempts to determine the log of zero, which is undefined.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Not affected by Preset
For TIME, the limit line segments are placed on the spectrum analyzer display with respect to the sweep time setting of the analyzer, with 0 at the left edge of the display.
For FREQuency, segments are placed according to the frequency that is specified for each segment.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, X Axis Units Freq Time
Control Limit Line Frequency Interpolation
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE
LOGarithmic|LINear
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:CONTrol:INTerpolate:TYPE?
Selects the type of interpolation done for the frequency values of the designated limit line when comparing to measured data. This only applies in the frequency domain. This function does not work in zero span (when the analyzer is in the time domain).
Remarks: Once this function is defined, the selected type is persistent.
Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Freq Interp Log Lin
Define Limit Line Values
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA
<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>{,<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>}
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA?
Defines limit line values, and destroys all existing data. Up to 200 points may be defined for each limit. No units are allowed.
• <x-axis> – can be frequency or time values as specified by
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain. Frequencies are always in Hz.
Chapter 5 245
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Time is always in seconds. No unit is allowed in this parameter.
• <ampl> – amplitude values are in the current Y-axis units. Up to two amplitude values can be provided for each x-axis value, by repeating <x-axis> in the data list. No unit is allowed in this parameter.
• <connected> – connected values are either 0 or 1. A 1 means this point should be connected to the previously defined point to define the limit line. A 0 means that it is a point of discontinuity and is not connected to the preceding point.
The “connected” value is ignored for the first point.
Example:
CALC:LLIN1:DATA
1000000000,–20,0,200000000,–30,1
Range:
Remarks:
<x-axis>
–30 Gs to +30 Gs for time limits
<x-axis>
–30 GHz to +350 GHz for frequency limits
<ampl>
–120 dBm to +100 dBm
<connected>
0 or 1
If two amplitude values are entered for the same frequency, a single vertical line is the result. In this case, if an upper line is chosen, the amplitude of lesser frequency (amplitude 1) is tested. If a lower line is chosen, the amplitude of greater frequency (amplitude 2) is tested.
For linear amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: y
= y f
–
– f y i
(
– i i
For linear amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: y
= log f
–
– y i log f i i i
For log amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: log y
=
f
–
– log y f i i
(
– i i
For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation, the interpolation is computed as: log y
= log y log f
–
– log y log f i i
(
– i
)
+ log
y
i
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, X Axis Units Freq Time
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit
246 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Point
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Frequency
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Amplitude
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Connected
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Edit, Delete Point
Merge Additional Values into the Existing Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA:MERGe
<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>{,<x-axis>,<ampl>,<connected>}
Adds the points with the specified values to the current limit line, allowing you to merge limit line data. Up to two amplitude values are allowed for each x value. If too much data is merged, as many points as possible are merged into the existing limit and then an error is reported. Up to 200 points total may be defined for each limit.
• <x-axis> can be frequency or time values as specified by
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:DOMain. Frequencies are always in Hz.
Time is always in seconds. No unit is allowed in this parameter.
• <ampl> – amplitude values are in the current Y-axis units. No unit is allowed in this parameter.
• <connected> connected values are either 0 or 1. A 1 means this point should be connected to the previously defined point to define the limit line. A 0 means that it is a point of discontinuity and is not connected to the preceding point.
The “connected” value is ignored for the first point.
Range: <x-axis> –30 Gs to +30 Gs for time limits
<x-axis> –30 GHz to +350 GHz for frequency limits
<ampl> –120 dBm to +100 dBm
<connected> 0 or 1
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, X Axis Units Freq Time
Delete Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DELete
Deletes the selected limit line.
Chapter 5 247
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Display the Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DISPlay OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DISPlay?
Controls the display of the current limit line.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Limit On Off
Test the Data Against the Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:FAIL?
Queries the status of the limit line testing. Returns a 0 if the data passes, and returns a 1 if there is a failure. This query value is valid only if margin or limit test is On. Use the command :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe OFF|ON|0|1 to activate limit line testing.
Set the Margin Size
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin?
Allows you to define the amount of measurement margin that is added to the designated limit line.
Factory Preset and *RST: not affected
Default Units: dB
Remarks: The margin must be negative for upper limit lines, and positive for lower limits.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Margin On Off
Display the Limit Margin
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin:STATe?
Allows you to display a measurement margin that is added to the designated limit line to do secondary testing of the data.
248 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:LLINe Subsection
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Margin On Off
Control Limit Line Testing
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe?
Turns limit line testing on/off. The limit and margin will only be tested if they are displayed. Use :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DISPlay to turn on the display of limit lines, and :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:MARGin:STATe to turn on the display of margins. If margin and limit display are both turned off, limit test is automatically turned off. Use :CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:FAIL? to return the state of pass or fail after limit line state has been turned on.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Limit On Off
Select the Type of Limit Line
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:TYPE UPPer|LOWer
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:TYPE?
Sets a limit line to be either an upper or lower type limit line. An upper line will be used as the maximum allowable value when comparing with the data. A lower limit line defines the minimum value.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Upper; not affected by preset
If a margin has already been set for this limit line, and this command is used to change the limit type, then the margin value is reset to 0 dB.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Limits, Limit 1|2, Type Upper Lower
Chapter 5 249
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Markers All Off on All Traces
:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF
Turns off all markers on all the traces.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Marker All Off
Continuous Peaking Marker Function
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:CPEak[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:CPEak[:STATe]?
Turns on or off continuous peaking. It continuously puts the selected marker on the highest displayed signal peak. Refer to
“Continuous Pk On Off” on page 118
for more information.
This function is intended to maintain the marker on signals with a frequency that is changing, and an amplitude that is not changing.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
This command may not be used to activate a given marker.
Peak Search (or Search), Continuous Pk On Off
Frequency Counter Marker Resolution
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution <real>
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution?
Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter. Setting the resolution to
AUTO will couple the marker counter resolution to the frequency span.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
1 kHz
1 Hz to 100 kHz
Default Unit: Hz
Front Panel
250 Chapter 5
Freq Count, Resolution Auto Man
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Access:
Frequency Counter Marker Automatic Resolution
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer:FCOunt:RESolution:AUTO?
Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter so it is automatically coupled to the frequency span, generating the fastest accurate count.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
On
Freq Count, Resolution Auto Man
Frequency Counter Marker
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt[:STATe]?
Turns on or off the marker frequency counter. To query the frequency counter, use
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]:FCOunt:X?
If the specified marker number is not the active marker, it becomes the active marker. If the specified marker number is not on, it is turned on and becomes the active marker. Once the marker count is on, it is on for any active marker, not just for the one used in the command. A 1 is returned only if marker count is on and the selected number is the active marker.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Off
If a frequency count x value is generated when the frequency count state is off, then 9e15 is returned.
Front Panel
Access:
Freq Count, Marker Count On Off
Frequency Counter Marker Query
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FCOunt:X?
Queries the marker frequency counter.
Remarks: If a frequency count x value is generated when the frequency count state is off, then 9e15 is returned.
Chapter 5 251
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Marker Function
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion BPOWer|NOISe|OFF
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:FUNCtion?
Selects the marker function for the specified marker. To query the value returned by the function, use :CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?
BPOWer is the power integrated within the bandwidth
NOISe is a noise measurement
OFF turns off all functions
Remarks: When a measurement under the front panel MEASURE key is started, this command is turned off. If this command is turned on when any of the MEASURE key measurements are in progress, that measurement will be stopped.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Function
Marker Peak (Maximum) Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum
Performs a peak search based on the search mode settings of
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE
.
See command :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Meas Tools
,
Peak Search
Marker Peak (Maximum) Left Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum:LEFT
Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak to the left of the current marked peak.
Remarks: The marker will be placed at the next highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold. If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria, a No Peak
Found error (202) is given.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Next Pk Left
252 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Marker Next Peak (Maximum) Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum:NEXT
Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak from the current marked peak.
Remarks: The marker will be placed at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold. If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria, a No Peak
Found error (202) is given.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Next Peak
Marker Peak (Maximum) Right Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MAXimum:RIGHt
Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak to the right of the current marked peak.
Remarks: The marker will be placed at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold. If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria, a No Peak
Found error (202) is given.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Next Pk Right
Marker Peak (Minimum) Search
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MINimum
Places the selected marker on the lowest point on the trace that is assigned to that particular marker number.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Min Search
Marker Mode
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE POSition|DELTa|BAND|SPAN
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE?
Selects the type of markers that you want to activate. Refer to
for a more complete explanation of this function.
Position selects a normal marker that can be positioned on a trace and from
Chapter 5 253
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
which trace information will be generated.
Delta activates a pair of markers, one of which is fixed at the current marker location. The other marker can then be moved around on the trace. The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers.
Band activates a pair of band markers, where each marker can be independently positioned on the trace. The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers. The repeatability of your band power marker measurement can be impacted by the current number of sweep points being used. If you only have a few sweep points in the measurement band of interest, then small changes will have a direct impact on the measurement result. Increasing your number of sweep points will decrease that affect and improve the repeatability.
Span activates a pair of span markers, where the marker positioning is controlled by changing the span and/or center frequency between the two markers. The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers.
Remarks: If a marker is not active when the mode is queried, “Off” will be returned.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Normal
Marker, Delta
Marker, Delta Pair Ref Delta
Marker, Span Pair Span Center
Define Peak Excursion
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion <rel_ampl>
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion?
Specifies the minimum signal excursion above the threshold for the internal peak identification routine to recognize a signal as a peak. This applies to all traces and all windows. (The excursion is the delta power from the noise level to the signal peak.)
See command :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
6 dB
0 to 100 dB
Default Unit: dB
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Search Criteria, Peak Excursion
254 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Define Peak Search
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE PARameter|MAXimum
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE?
Sets the peak search mode.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
MAXimum
If mode is set to MAXimum, peak search will place the marker at the maximum amplitude in the trace. If mode is set to
PARameter, peak search will place the marker at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold. If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria, a No Peak Found error (error 202) is issued.
Next peak, next peak right, next peak left, and peak table are not affected by this command. They will always use peak excursion and peak threshold for search criteria.
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Search Criteria, Peak Search
Type, Max Value|Excursion & Threshold
Define Peak Threshold
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl>
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold?
Specifies the minimum signal level for the analyzers internal peak identification routine to recognize a signal as a peak. This applies to all traces and all windows.
See command :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE
Range: Reference level to the bottom of the display
Default Unit: Amplitude units
Front Panel
Access:
Peak Search (or Search), Search Criteria, Peak Threshold
Peak to Peak Delta Markers
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:PTPeak
Positions delta markers on the highest and lowest points on the trace.
Chapter 5 255
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Peak Search (or Search), Pk-Pk Search
Set Center Frequency to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:CENTer
Sets the center frequency equal to the specified marker frequency, which moves the marker to the center of the screen. In delta marker mode, the center frequency is set to the marker delta value. This command is not available in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker –>, Mkr –> CF
Set Reference Level to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:RLEVel
Sets the reference level to the specified marker amplitude. In delta marker mode, the reference level is set to the amplitude difference between the markers.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker –>, Mkr –> Ref Lvl
Peak Search (or Search), Meas Tools, Mkr –> Ref Lvl
Set Span to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:SPAN
Sets the span to the value of the specified marker frequency. The specified marker must be in delta mode. Select the delta marker mode with
CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE DELTa
. This command is not available in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Delta, Marker –>, Mkr
∆ –> Span
Set Start Frequency to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:STARt
Sets the start frequency to the value of the specified marker frequency. In delta marker mode, the start frequency is set to the marker delta value. This command is
256 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
not available in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker –>, Mkr –> Start
Set Center Frequency Step Size to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:STEP
Sets the center frequency step size to match the marker frequency. In delta marker mode, the center frequency step size will be set to the frequency difference between the markers. Select the delta marker mode with
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE DELTa
. This command is not available if the delta marker is off, or in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker –>, Mkr –> CF Step
Peak Search (or Search), Meas Tools, Mkr –> CF
Set Stop Frequency to the Marker Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4[:SET]:STOP
Sets the stop frequency to the value of the active marker frequency. In delta marker mode, the stop frequency is set to the marker delta value. This command is not available in zero span.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker –>, Mkr –> Stop
Marker On/Off
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:STATe?
Turns the selected marker on or off.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Off
Marker Table On/Off
:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe:STATe?
Chapter 5 257
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Turns the marker table on or off
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Marker Table On Off
Marker to Trace
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRACe <integer>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRACe?
Assigns the specified marker to the designated trace 1, 2, or 3.
Factory Preset and *RST: 1
1 to 3 Range:
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3
Marker to Trace Auto
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRACe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRACe:AUTO?
Turns on or off the automatic marker to trace function.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
AUTO ON
Marker, Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3
Continuous Signal Tracking Function
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRCKing[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TRCKing[:STATe]?
Turns on or off marker signal tracking. It continuously puts the selected marker on the highest displayed signal peak and moves it to the center frequency. This allows you to keep a signal that is drifting in frequency, on the display.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Off
When a measurement under the front panel MEASURE key is started, this command is turned off. If this command is turned on when any of the MEASURE key measurements are in
258 Chapter 5
Front Panel
Access:
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
progress, that measurement will be stopped.
FREQUENCY/Channel, Signal Track On Off
Marker X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X?
Position the designated marker on its assigned trace at the specified trace X value.
The value is in the X-axis units (which is often frequency or time). If the marker is a delta marker this command sets the value of the delta marker.
The query returns the current X value of the designated marker.
Default Unit: Matches the units of the trace on which the marker is positioned
Front Panel
Access:
Marker
Span Markers Center Frequency X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:CENTer?
Position the center frequency, of the designated span-type marker pair, at the specified trace X value. The value is in the X-axis units (which is often frequency or time) Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE SPAN to select span markers.
The query returns the current X value center frequency of the designated markers.
Range: Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Span Pair
Marker X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition <integer>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition?
Position the designated marker on its assigned trace at the specified X position.
The query returns the current X position for the designated marker.
Range: Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
Chapter 5 259
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Front Panel
Access:
Marker
Span Markers Center Frequency X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:CENTer?
Position the center frequency, of the designated span-type marker pair, at the specified trace X position. Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE SPAN to select span markers.
The query returns the current X position center frequency of the designated markers.
Range: Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Span Pair
Span Markers Span X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:SPAN?
Change the frequency span, of the designated span-type marker pair, to position the markers at the desired trace X positions. Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE
SPAN
to select span markers.
The query returns the current X position frequency span of the designated markers.
Range: Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Span Pair
Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STARt?
Position the left-most marker, the start (reference) frequency of the designated band-type marker pair, at the specified trace X position. Use
:CALCulate:MARKer:MODE BAND to select band markers.
The query returns the current X position start/reference frequency of the
260 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
designated marker.
Range: Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Delta Pair
Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Position
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:POSition:STOP?
Position the right-most marker, the stop frequency of the designated band-type marker pair, at the specified trace X position. Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE
BAND
to select band markers.
The query returns the current X position stop frequency of the designated marker.
Range: Refer to the [:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts command.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Delta
Marker X-Axis Readout
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:READout
FREQuency|TIME|ITIMe|PERiod
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:READout?
Selects the units for the x-axis readout of the marker. Available units are:
Frequency
Time
Inverse of time
Period
Factory Preset and *RST: Frequency
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, Readout, Frequency
Marker, Readout, Time
Marker, Readout, Inverse Time
Marker, Readout, Period
Chapter 5 261
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Span Markers Span X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:SPAN?
Change the frequency span of the designated span-type marker pair to position the markers at the desired trace X values. The value is in the X-axis units (which is usually frequency or time). Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE SPAN to select span markers.
The query returns the current X value frequency span of the designated markers. If span markers are not selected, the query returns the latest marker reading as a span
(always positive).
Default Unit: Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned.
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Span Pair
Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STARt?
Position the start (reference) frequency of the designated band-type marker pair, at the specified trace X value. The value is in the X-axis units (which is often frequency or time). Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE BAND to select band markers.
The query returns the current X value start/reference frequency of the designated marker.
Default Unit: Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Delta Pair
Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP <param>
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:STOP?
Position the stop frequency of the designated band-type marker pair, at the specified trace X value. The value is in the X-axis units (which is often frequency or time). Use :CALCulate:MARKer:MODE BAND to select band markers.
The query returns the current X value stop frequency of the designated marker.
262 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:MARKer Subsection
Default Unit: Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned
Front Panel
Access:
Marker, <active marker>, Delta Pair
Marker Read Y Value
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?
Read the current Y value for the designated marker or delta on its assigned trace.
The value is in the Y-axis units for the current trace (which is often dBm).
Default Unit:. Matches the units of the trace on which the marker is positioned
Remarks:. This command can be used to read the results of marker functions such as band power and noise that are displayed in the marker value field on the analyzer.
Chapter 5 263
Remote Command Reference
CALCulate:NTData Subsection
CALCulate:NTData Subsection
Normalize the Trace Data
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]?
One sweep of trace data is copied to trace 3 (firmware version greater then
A.03.03, NRML in firmware version less than or equal to A.03.03), which is used as the reference trace. Then for all subsequent trace sweeps, display trace 1
= data collected into trace 1 – data in trace 3 (firmware version greater than A.03.03,
NRML in firmware version less than or equal to A.03.03).
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Normalize, Normalize On Off
264 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
CALibration Subsystem
CALibration Subsystem
These commands control the self-alignment and self-diagnostic processes.
Align All Instrument Assemblies
:CALibration[:ALL]
:CALibration[:ALL]?
Performs an alignment of all the assemblies within the instrument, except for the tracking generator (Option 1DN or 1DQ), if installed (except Agilent model
E4401B or E4411B.
Before executing this command, connect a cable between front panel connector
AMPTD REF OUT
and the
INPUT
connector for all Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers except Agilent models E4401B and E4411B.
If the cable is not connected, CAL:ALL will perform a subset of the RF alignment and a subsequent CAL:RF will be required for the analyzer to meet its specified performance.
The query performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment. A zero is returned if the alignment is successful, even if only a subset of the RF alignment is performed.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align Now, All
Set Auto Align Mode All or Not RF
:CALibration:AUTO:MODE ALL|NRF
:CALibration:AUTO:MODE?
This command determines whether or not to include RF alignment as part of the automatic alignment routines. Eliminating automatic alignment of the RF prevents changes in the input impedance between sweeps, which could cause input device instability.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
All at power-up
System, Alignments, Auto Align, All
System, Alignments, Auto Align, All but RF
Chapter 5 265
Remote Command Reference
CALibration Subsystem
Automatic Alignment
:CALibration:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:CALibration:AUTO?
Turns the automatic alignment on and off. This is run continuously, at the completion of each sweep.
Factory Preset and *RST: On at power-up
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Auto Align, All
System, Alignments, Auto Align, All but RF
System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off
Return to the Default Alignment Data
:CALibration:DATA:DEFault
Initializes the alignment data to the factory defaults.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Load Defaults
Align FM Demodulation
:CALibration:FMDemod
:CALibration:FMDemod?
Performs an alignment of the FM demodulation hardware if Option 106, AYQ or
BAA is installed. The query form of this command performs the alignment and returns zero if the alignment is successful. If you have multiple FM demodulation hardware options, the hardware that will be used is automatically selected in order of priority (with firmware revisions A.14.00 or later).
1. Option 106 - Bluetooth
™ 1
2. Option AYQ - Quasi-peak detection and FM demodulation
3. Option BAA - FM Demodulation
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align Now, FM Demod
266
1. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Agilent Technologies under license.
Chapter 5
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALibration Subsystem
Query the Internal or External Frequency Reference
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence?
This is a query only. It reports the location of where the instrument frequency reference is generated.
Range: INT or EXT
Coarse Adjust the Frequency Reference
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse <setting>
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:COARse?
Allows coarse adjustment of the internal 10 MHz reference oscillator timebase of the analyzer.
:CALibration:ALL
is required after COARse is set.
Integer, 0 to 255 Range:
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Time Base, Coarse
Fine Adjust the Frequency Reference
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:FINE <setting>
:CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:FINE?
Allows fine adjustment of the analyzer internal 10 MHz reference oscillator timebase.
:CALibration:ALL
is required after FINE is set.
Integer, 0 to 255 Range:
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Time Base, Fine
Select the Frequency Corrections
:CALibration:FREQuency[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:CALibration:FREQuency[:STATe]?
Turns on or off the frequency corrections.
Chapter 5 267
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALibration Subsystem
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
On
System, Alignments, Freq Correct On Off
Align the RF Circuitry
:CALibration:RF
:CALibration:RF?
Performs an alignment of the RF assembly.
The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful.
Before executing this command, connect a cable between front panel connector
AMPTD REF OUT
and the
INPUT
connector for all Agilent ESA spectrum analyzers except Agilent models E4401B and E4411B. If the cable is not connected, the alignment will fail.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align Now, RF
Select the Source State for Calibration
:CALibration:SOURce:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:CALibration:SOURce:STATe?
Controls the state of the 50 MHz alignment signal.
The alignment signal is internally switched to the
INPUT
for Agilent models
E4401B and E4411B. For all other models, connect a cable between front panel connector
AMPTD REF OUT
and the
INPUT
connector before performing a calibration.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
For Agilent ESA models E4401B and E4411B:
Input/Output (or Input), Amptd Ref (f=50 MHz) On Off
For all other Agilent ESA models:
Input/Output (or Input), Amptd Ref Out (f=50 MHz) On Off
268 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
CALibration Subsystem
Calibrate the Tracking Generator
:CALibration:TG
:CALibration:TG?
Performs an alignment of the tracking generator assembly.
The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful.
This command is only applicable on Agilent ESA models E4402B, E4403B,
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B. Before executing this command, connect a cable between front panel connector
RF OUT
and the
INPUT
connector. The alignment will fail using command CAL:TG if the cable is not connected.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Alignments, Align Now, TG
Chapter 5 269
Remote Command Reference
CONFigure Subsystem
CONFigure Subsystem
Configure the Basic Spectrum Analyzer State
:CONFigure:SANalyzer
This command causes the present measurement to exit (the same functionally as pressing
MEASURE, Meas Off
), and places the analyzer in base instrument spectrum analyzer state. CONFigure subsystem commands used for measurements in the
MEASURE
and
Meas Setup
menus are located in Volume 2 “One-Button
Power Measurements”.
270 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
COUPle Subsystem
COUPle Subsystem
Some measurement settings are automatically coupled together to optimize speed and accuracy. These commands control that coupling.
COUPle the Function to Other Settings
:COUPle ALL|NONE
:COUPle?
The instrument can automatically couple instrument settings together for accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range. This command is used to override the coupling for special measurement needs.
COUPle NONE
puts these functions into the manually set (not coupled) mode.
COUPle ALL
puts the functions into the auto coupled mode, and also puts the sweep coupling mode into SA (couple all).
The following list of analyzer functions can be automatically coupled:
Resolution bandwidth
Span
Average type (firmware revision A.08.00 or greater)
Marker functions
Detector (firmware revision A.08.00 or greater)
Marker functions
Average On Off
Average type
Attenuation
Reference level
External amplifier gain
Preamp
Center frequency step
Span (in swept spans)
Resolution bandwidth (in zero spans)
Video bandwidth
Resolution bandwidth
Tracking Generator
Sweep coupling mode (SR/SA)
VBW/RBW ratio (firmware revision A.08.00 or greater)
Sweep time
Span
Video bandwidth
Resolution bandwidth
Chapter 5 271
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
COUPle Subsystem
Sweep points
Phase noise optimization
Phase Noise Optimization (firmware revision A.08.00 or greater)
Span
Although marker count, gate time, and marker trace have auto settings, they are not affected by Couple.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
All
Auto Couple, Auto All
272 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPlay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual, graphical, and trace information. Within a display, information may be separated into individual windows.
Active Function Position
:DISPlay:AFUNction:POSition BOTTom|CENTer|TOP
:DISPlay:AFUNction:POSition?
Changes the position of the active function block.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is center. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Top, Center, or Bottom Range:
Front Panel
Access:
History:
Display
Added with firmware revision A.10.00.
Display Viewing Angle
:DISPlay:ANGLe <integer>
:DISPlay:ANGLe?
Changes the viewing angle for better viewing in different environments.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is 4. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Integer, 1 to 7 Range:
Front Panel
Access:
Viewing angle keys
Date and Time Display Format
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk:DATE:FORMat MDY|DMY
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk:DATE:FORMat?
Chapter 5 273
Remote Command Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Allows you to set the format for displaying the real-time clock. To set the date time use: SYSTem:DATE <year>, <month>, <day>.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is MDY. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Time/Date, Date Format MDY DMY
Date and Time Display
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:ANNotation:CLOCk[:STATe]?
Turns on and off the display of the date and time on the spectrum analyzer screen.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is On. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle. Front
Panel
Access:
System, Time/Date, Time/Date On Off
Display Annotation Title Data
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA <string>
:DISPlay:ANNotation:TITLe:DATA?
Enters the text that will be displayed in the user title area of the display.
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Title
Display, Title, Change Title
Display, Title, Clear Title
Turn the Entire Display On/Off
:DISPlay:ENABle OFF|ON|0|1
Turns the display on or off. Having the display turned off may increase repetitive measurement rate.
The following key presses will turn display enable back on:
1. If in local, press any key
2. If in remote, press the local (system) key
274 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
3. If in local lockout, no key (the computer must either cancel local lockout, or re-enable the display)
Factory Preset and *RST: On
Turn the Full Screen Display On/Off
:DISPlay:MENU:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:MENU:STATe?
Turns the full screen display mode on or off. Press
System, System
to turn off full screen mode.
History: Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Window Annotation
:DISPlay:WINDow:ANNotation[:ALL] OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:WINDow:ANNotation[:ALL]?
Turns the screen annotation on or off for all windows.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
On
Display, Preferences, Annotation On Off
Trace Graticule Display
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID[:STATe]?
Turns the graticule on or off.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
On
Display, Preferences, Graticule On Off
Trace X-Axis Scale Offset
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:OFFSet <freq>
Chapter 5 275
Remote Command Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:OFFSet?
Specifies the frequency offset for all frequency readouts such as center frequency, except that it does not affect marker count.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 Hz
–500 THz to 500 THz
Default Unit: Hz
History:
Remarks:
Prior to firmware revision A.06.00, the lower range is –3 GHz.
Frequency offset is not available when frequency scale type is
Log ([:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic).
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, Freq Offset
Display Line Amplitude
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe <ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe?
Defines the level of the display line, in the active amplitude units if no units are specified.
Factory Preset and *RST: 2.5 divisions below the reference level
Range: 10 display divisions below the reference level to the reference level
Default Unit: Current active units
Front Panel
Access:
Display, Display Line On Off
Display Line On/Off
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe?
Turns the display line on or off.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Display, Display Line On Off
276 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
IF Gain Auto/Reference Level Auto Ranging
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LOG:RANGe:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:LOG:RANGe:AUTO?
This command enables and disables auto ranging. The speed benefits gained with this command are realized only when in narrow resolution (digital) bandwidths.
The setting of auto range has no effect when in analog resolution bandwidths.
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
On
This command is available with firmware revision A.04.00 and later.
Remarks: When using digital resolution bandwidths (RBW < 1 kHz) the analyzer uses IF Gain auto ranging to set the optimum signal gain for digital processing. This technique produces the greatest measurement range without overloading the digital system. To increase the measurement speed this IF Gain auto ranging may be set to fixed mode. When in fixed mode, make sure the signal is not set above the reference level and the reference is set so that the signal is within the display range. When in fixed mode the measurement has approximately 70 dB of display range.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, IF Gain Auto Fixed
(front panel access is available with firmware revision A.06.00 and later).
Normalized Reference Level
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel?
Sets the normalized reference level.
See command :CALCulate:NTData[STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 dB
–327.6 to 327.6 dB
Default Unit: Current active units
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Normalize, Norm Ref Lvl
Chapter 5 277
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Normalized Reference Level Position
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition <integer>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition?
Selects the position of the normalized reference level. The top and bottom graticule lines correspond to 10 and 0, respectively.
See command :CALCulate:NTData[STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
Front Panel
Access:
10 integer
View/Trace, Normalize, Norm Ref Posn
Trace Y-Axis Amplitude Scaling
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?
Sets the per-division display scaling for the y-axis when y-axis units are set to amplitude units.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
10 dB
0.1 to 20.0 dB
Default Unit: dB
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Scale/Div
Trace Y-Axis Frequency Scaling
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:FREQuency
<freq>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:FREQuency?
This command sets the per-division display scaling for the y-axis, when the y-axis units are set to frequency units, such as when looking at FM deviation with the command [:SENSe]:DEMod:VIEW[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1.
For Option 106 (Bluetooth FM Demodulation) only the query form of this command is available; the value is determined during alignment.
278 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Factory Preset and *RST: 20 kHz (with Options BAA or AYQ)
Approximately 40 kHz (with Option 106, Bluetooth FM
Demodulation)
Range: 1 kHz to 240 kHz (with Options BAA or AYQ)
Fixed (with Option 106, Bluetooth FM Demodulation)
Default Unit: Hz
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Scale/Div
Trace Y-Axis Reference Level
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?
Sets the amplitude value of the reference level for the y-axis.
Factory Preset and *RST:.
Range:.
0 dBm
With zero reference level offset:
ESA E4401B, E4411B: –149.9 to 50 dBm
ESA E4402B, E4403B: ––149.9 to 55 dBm
ESA E4404B: ––149.9 to 55 dBm
ESA E4405B: ––149.9 to 55 dBm
ESA E4407B, E4408B: –149.9 to 55 dBm
–149.9 to 55 dBm with zero reference level offset and max mixer level = –10 dBm. In external mixing, the range is –327.5 to –10 dBm with max mixer level
= –10 dBm.
Default Unit:. Current active units
Remarks:. The input attenuator setting may be affected. The minimum displayed value of reference level is –327.6 dBm, and the maximum displayed value is 327.6 dBm. See the remarks given for the command
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet
<rel_ampl>
Front Panel
Access:.
Amplitude Y Scale, Ref Level
Chapter 5 279
Remote Command Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Trace Y-Axis Reference Level Offset
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet <rel_ampl>
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet?
Sets the amplitude level offset for the y-axis.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 dB
–327.6 to 327.6 dB
Default Unit: dB
Remarks: The sum of (reference level offset + reference level) is clipped to the range –327.6 to 327.6 dB. The maximum limits are determined by the setting of the first of these two parameters, within the boundaries of their individual limits when initially set.
For example, if the reference level is (first) set to –20 dBm, then the reference level offset can be set to values of –307.6 dB to
327.6 dB. In the case of a 327.6 dB reference level offset, the resultant reference level value changes to 307.6 dBm. The reference level value range can be initially set to values from
–149.9 to 55 dBm.
280 Chapter 5
Front Panel
Access:
Remote Command Reference
DISPlay Subsystem
Setting the reference level offset value first yields the following:
If the reference level offset is (first) set to –30 dB, then the reference level can be set to values of –327.6 to 25 dBm. The reference level is “clamped” at 25 dBm because its positive value of 55 dBm is reached at 25 dBm with an offset of –30 dB.
Its own positive amplitude limit applies.
If the reference level offset is (first) set to 30 dB, then the reference level can be set to values of –327.6 to 85 dBm. Again, the positive amplitude limit of reference level (alone) is factored in to the resultant combined limit.
Amplitude Y Scale, Ref Level Offst
Vertical Axis Scaling
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?
Specifies the vertical graticule divisions as log or linear units.
Factory Preset and *RST: Logarithmic
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Scale Type Log Lin
Chapter 5 281
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
FORMat Subsystem
FORMat Subsystem
The FORMat subsystem sets a data format for transferring numeric and array information. TRACe[:DATA] and TRACe[:DATA]? are affected by FORMat subsystem commands.
Byte Order
:FORMat:BORDer NORMal|SWAPped
:FORMat:BORDer?
This command selects the binary data byte order for data transfer. It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode. This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the
:TRACe[:DATA]
and query :TRACe[:DATA]? commands.
Normal mode is when the byte sequence begins with the most significant byte
(MSB) first, and ends with the least significant byte (LSB) last in the sequence:
1|2|3|4. Swapped mode is when the byte sequence begins with the LSB first, and ends with the MSB last in the sequence: 4|3|2|1.
Factory Preset and *RST: Normal
Numeric Data format
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]ASCii|INTeger,32|REAL,32|
REAL,64|UINTeger,16
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]?
This command changes the format of the trace data input and output. It affects only the data format for setting and querying trace data for the :TRACe[:DATA] and query :TRACe[:DATA]? commands. REAL and ASCii formats will format trace data in the current amplitude units. The format of state data cannot be changed. It is always in a machine readable format only (machine units).
This command specifies the format used for trace data during data transfer across any remote port.
One-button measurement functions only support Binary Real 32, Binary
Real 64
, and ASCii data formats.
For corrected trace data (:TRACe[:DATA] with parameter <trace_name>),
REAL
, and ASCii formats will provide trace data in the current amplitude units.
INTeger
format will provide trace data in mdBm. The fastest mode is
INTeger,32
.
282 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
FORMat Subsystem
For example:
−24, 353 mdBm converts to −24.353 dBm.
ASCii
- Amplitude values are in amplitude units separated by commas. ASCii format requires more memory than the binary formats. Handling large amounts of this type of data, takes more time and storage space.
Integer,32
- Binary 32-bit integer values in internal units (mdBm), in a definite length block.
Real,32
(or 64) - Binary 32-bit (or 64-bit) real values in amplitude units, in a definite length block. Transfers of real data are done in a binary block format.
For uncorrected trace data (:TRACe[:DATA] with parameter RAWTRACE),
UINTeger
, and INTeger formats apply to RAWTRACE queries, and return uncorrected ADC values. The fastest mode is UINTeger,16.
UINTeger, 16
- Binary 16-bit unsigned integer uncorrected ADC values, in a definite length block.
Integer,32
- Binary 32-bit unsigned integer uncorrected ADC values in a definite length block.
A definite length block of data starts with an ASCII header that begins with # and indicates how many additional trace points are following in the block. Suppose the header is #512320:
• The first digit in the header (5) tells you how many additional digits/bytes there are in the header.
• The 12320 means that 12,320 data bytes follow the header.
• Divide this number of bytes by your selected data format bytes/point, either 8
(fo Real 64), 4 (for Real 32 or Int 32), or 2 (for UINT 16). In this example, if you are using Real 64 then there are 1540 trace points in the block.
Corrected Trace Data Types
:TRACe:DATA? <trace_name>
Data Type
ASCII
INT,32 (fastest)
REAL,32
REAL,64
Result
Amplitude Units
Internal Units
Amplitude Units
Amplitude Units
Chapter 5 283
Remote Command Reference
FORMat Subsystem
Uncorrected Trace Data Types
:TRACe:DATA? RAWTRACE
Data Type
INT,32
UINT,16 (fastest)
Result
Uncorrected ADC Values
Uncorrected ADC Values
Factory Preset and *RST: ASCII
284 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
HCOPy Subsystem
HCOPy Subsystem
The HCOPy subsystem controls the setup of plotting and printing to an external device.
Abort the Print
:HCOPy:ABORt
Aborts hard copy printout of results.
Front Panel
Access:
ESC
(with print in progress)
Printer Type
:HCOPy:DEVice:TYPE AUTO|CUSTom|NONE
:HCOPy:DEVice:TYPE?
Sets up the printer by selecting printer type.
AUTO - the instrument queries the printer to determine the printer type and automatically sets itself for that printer
CUSTom - allows you to select a custom printer if your printer cannot be auto-configured
NONE - tells the instrument that the hard copy output device is not a printer
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is AUTO. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, Printer Type
Color Hard Copy
:HCOPy:IMAGe:COLor[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:HCOPy:IMAGe:COLor[:STATe]?
Selects between color and monochrome mode for hard copy output.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is On. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Chapter 5 285
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
HCOPy Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, Color On Off
Print a Hard Copy
:HCOPy[:IMMediate]
The entire screen is output to the parallel port.
Front Panel
Access:
Form Feed the Print Item
:HCOPy:ITEM:FFEed[:IMMediate]
Sends the printer a command to form feed.
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, Eject Page
Page Orientation
:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape|PORTrait
:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation?
Specifies the orientation of the print.
Landscape mode is not presently supported for PCL-3 printers.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is Landscape. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, Orientation, Landscape
Print Setup, Orientation, Portrait
Number of Items Printed on a Page
:HCOPy:PAGE:PRINts <integer>
:HCOPy:PAGE:PRINts?
286 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
HCOPy Subsystem
Sets the number of display print outputs sent to print on one piece of paper, before a form feed is sent.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is 1. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Range:
Front Panel
Access:
Integer, 1 or 2
Print Setup, Prints/Page 1 2
Printed Page Size
:HCOPy:PAGE:SIZE A|B|A3|A4|LETTer|LEGal|EXECutive|LEDGer
:HCOPy:PAGE:SIZE?
Formats the print image for the selected page size. Page size “A” is letter, and page size “B” is ledger. There is no size standardization for “legal” or “executive.”
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is letter. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Print Setup, /Page Size
Chapter 5 287
Remote Command Reference
INITiate Subsystem
INITiate Subsystem
The INITiate subsystem is used to control the initiation of the trigger. Refer to the
TRIGger and ABORt subsystems for related commands.
Continuous or Single Measurements
:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1
:INITiate:CONTinuous?
Selects whether the trigger system is continuously initiated or not.
This command affects sweep if not in a measurement, and affects trigger when in a measurement. A “measurement” refers to any of the functions under the
MEASURE
key. This corresponds to continuous sweep or single sweep operation when not in a measurement, and continuous measurement or single measurement operation when in a measurement. Commands used for measurements in the
MEASURE
and
Meas Setup
menus are located in Volume 2 “One-Button Power
Measurements”.
When not in a measurement, this command does the following:
• When ON at the completion of each sweep cycle, the sweep system immediately initiates another sweep cycle.
• When OFF, the sweep system remains in an “idle” state until CONTinuous is set to ON or an :INITiate[:IMMediate] command is received. On receiving the :INITiate[:IMMediate] command, it will go through a single sweep cycle, and then return to the “idle” state.
• The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer. 1 is returned when there is continuous sweeping. 0 is returned when there is only a single sweep.
When in a measurement, this command does the following:
• When ON at the completion of each trigger cycle, the trigger system immediately initiates another trigger cycle.
• When OFF, the trigger system remains in an “idle” state until CONTinuous is set to ON or an :INITiate[:IMMediate] command is received. On receiving the :INITiate[:IMMediate] command, it will go through a single trigger cycle, and then return to the “idle” state.
• The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer. 1 is returned when in a continuous measurement state. 0 is returned when there is only a single measurement.
Factory Preset: Continuous
*RST: Continuous, or On
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep
,
Sweep Cont Single
288 Chapter 5
Single
Meas Control
,
Measure Cont Single
Remote Command Reference
INITiate Subsystem
Take New Data Acquisitions
:INITiate[:IMMediate]
This command initiates a sweep if not in a measurement. If in a measurement, it triggers the measurement. A “measurement” refers to any function under the
MEASURE
key.
Remarks: See also the *TRG command
Use the :TRIGer[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal command to select the external trigger.
The instrument must be in the single measurement mode. If
:INITiate:CONTinuous is ON then the command is ignored.
Use :FETCh? to transfer a measurement result from memory to the output buffer. Refer to individual commands in the
MEASure subsystem for more information.
If the analyzer is in signal identification mode, two sweeps are required, as this mode relies on the acquisition of data from two successive sweeps. Therefore, if the analyzer is in single sweep mode, two sweep triggers are needed to generate the sweep pair.
In image suppress mode, synchronization is ensured by first turning off signal identification, initiating a single sweep, then turning on signal identification followed by two single sweeps.
See [:SENSe]:SIDentify for more information about signal identification state.
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Sweep Cont Single
Single
Meas Control, Measure Cont Single
Pause the Measurement
:INITiate:PAUSe
This command applies to measurements found in the
MEASURE
menu. Use this command to pause the current measurement by changing the current measurement state from the “wait for trigger” state to the “paused” state. If the measurement is not in the “wait for trigger” state when the command is issued, the transition will be made the next time that state is entered as part of the trigger cycle. When in the pause state, the analyzer auto-align process stops. If the analyzer is paused for a
Chapter 5 289
Remote Command Reference
INITiate Subsystem
long period of time, measurement accuracy may degrade.
Front Panel
Access:
Meas Control, Pause
Restart the Measurement
:INITiate:RESTart
This command applies to measurements found in the
MEASURE
menu. Use this command to restart the present measurement from the “idle” state, regardless of its operating state. It is equivalent to :INITiate[:IMMediate] for single measurement mode, or :ABORt for continuous measurement mode.
Front Panel
Access:
Restart
Meas Control, Restart
Resume the Measurement
:INITiate:RESume
This command applies to measurements found in the
MEASURE
menu. Use this command to resume the current measurement by changing the current measurement state from the “paused” state back to the “wait for trigger” state.
Front Panel
Access:
Meas Control, Resume
290 Chapter 5
CAUTION
Table 5-1
Remote Command Reference
INPut Subsystem
INPut Subsystem
The INPut subsystem controls the characteristics of analyzer input ports.
Input Port Coupling
:INPut:COUPling AC|DC
:INPut:COUPling?
Selects ac or dc coupling for the front panel INPUT port. A blocking capacitor is switched in for the ac mode.
Instrument damage can occur if there is a dc voltage present at the INPUT and dc coupling is selected.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks: ac
This command is available only on Agilent ESA spectrum analyzer models E4402B Option UKB, E4407B Option UKB,
E4404B, or E4405B. See Table 5-1 for frequency range limits
for your ESA model and option.
Selecting Input Coupling
Model Number AC
Frequency Range
100 kHz to 3 GHz
DC
Frequency Range
100 Hz to 3 GHz E4402B with Option
UKB
E4404B
E4404B with Option
UKB
E4405B
E4405B with Option
UKB
E4407B with Option
UKB
100 kHz to 6.7 GHz
100 kHz to 6.7 GHz
100 kHz to 13.2 GHz
100 kHz to 13.2 GHz
10 MHz to 26.5 GHz
9 kHz to 6.7 GHz
100 Hz to 6.7 GHz
9 kHz to 13.2 GHz
100 Hz to 13.2 GHz
100 Hz to 26.5 GHz
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Coupling AC DC
Chapter 5 291
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
INPut Subsystem
Select Internal or External Mixer
:INPut:MIXer INTernal|EXTernal
:INPut:MIXer?
This command selects either the internal or external input mixer and is available only with Option AYZ (External Mixing).
Refer also to commands in the [:SENSe]:MIXer subsection.
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
INTernal
This command is available with firmware revision A.03.00 and later.
Remarks: External mixing is not available when frequency scale type is
Log ([:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic).
Selecting the external input mixer activates all the keys in the
Input Mixer menu and changes the RF attenuation annotation readout on the display to “Ext Mix.”
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Input Mixer Int Ext
Select Mixer Type
:INPut:MIXer:TYPE PRESelected|UNPReselect
:INPut:MIXer:TYPE?
This command selects the type of mixer being used and is available only with
Option AYZ (External Mixing).
Refer also to commands in the [:SENSe]:MIXer subsection.
Factory Preset and *RST: UNPReselect
History:
Remarks:
This command is available with firmware revision A.03.00 and later.
Setting mixer type to Presel activates a tuning signal that is routed to the PRESEL TUNE OUTPUT connector on the analyzer rear panel. This signal drives the tune input of the
HP/Agilent 11974-Series Preselected Mixers at 1.5V/GHz. The sweep rate in this mode is limited to 40 MHz/msec.
Preselected Mixer Type is not allowed when AUTO harmonic and Ext Mix Band
K, E, W, F, D, G, Y, or J is selected.
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Input Mixer, Mixer Config, Mixer
292 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
INPut Subsystem
Type Presel Unpre
Clear the Input Overload
:INPut:PROTection:CLEar
Resets the overload protection circuitry for the input connector. There is no query form of this command.
This command is valid only for Agilent ESA models E4401B or E4411B.
The excessive input signal may have caused 15 dB of attenuation to be switched in, or it may have completely switched the input connector out so that it is connected to the internal reference signal.
Chapter 5 293
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
INSTrument Subsystem
INSTrument Subsystem
This subsystem includes commands for querying and selecting instrument measurement (personality option) modes.
Catalog Query
:INSTrument:CATalog?
Returns a comma separated list of strings which contains the names of all the installed applications. These names can only be used with the INST:SELECT command.
Example: INST:CAT?
Query response: ”CDMA”4,”PNOISE”14
Select Application by Number
:INSTrument:NSELect <integer>
:INSTrument:NSELect?
Select the measurement mode by its instrument number. The actual available choices depends upon which applications are installed in the instrument.
If you are using the SCPI status registers and the analyzer mode is changed, the status bits should be read, and any error conditions resolved, prior to switching modes. Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change. This is true unless they recur after the mode change, although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers.
Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power-on defaults. Therefore, any event or condition register masks must be re-established after a mode change. Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change, since that is the default state after power up.
1 = SA
3 = GSM
4 = CDMA (cdmaOne)
14 = PNOISE (phase noise)
252 = EDGE
219 = NFIGURE (noise figure)
228 = BLUETOOTH
227 = CATV (Cable TV)
229 = MAN (Modulation Analysis)
231 = LINK (89600 VSA Link Software)
294 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
INSTrument Subsystem
Example: INST:NSEL 4
Factory Preset: Persistent state with factory default of
1 to x, where x depends upon which applications are installed.
Range:
Front Panel
Access:
MODE
Select Application
:INSTrument[:SELect] ‘SA’|‘GSM’|‘CDMA’|‘PNOISE’|‘BLUETOOTH’
|‘EDGE’|‘MAN’|‘LINK’|‘CATV’|‘NFIGURE’
:INSTrument[:SELect]?
Select the measurement mode. The actual available choices depend upon which modes (measurement applications) are installed in the instrument. A list of the valid choices is returned with the INST:CAT? query.
Once an instrument mode is selected, only the commands that are valid for that mode can be executed.
If you are using the SCPI status registers and the analyzer mode is changed, the status bits should be read, and any errors resolved, prior to switching modes. Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change. This is true unless they recur after the mode change, although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers.
Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power-on defaults. Hence, any event or condition register masks must be re-established after a mode change. Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change, since that is the default state after power up.
SA (Spectrum Analysis)
GSM
CDMA (cdmaOne)
PNOISE (phase noise)
EDGE
NFIGURE (noise figure)
BLUETOOTH
CATV (Cable TV)
MAN (Modulation Analysis)
LINK (89600 VSA Link Software)
Chapter 5 295
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
INSTrument Subsystem
If you are using the status bits and the analyzer mode is changed, the status bits should be read, and any errors resolved, prior to switching modes. Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change. This is true unless they recur after the mode change, although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers.
Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power-on defaults. Hence, any event or condition register masks must be re-established after a mode change. Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change, since that is the default state after power up.
Example: INST:SEL ‘CDMA’
Factory Preset: Persistent state with factory default of Spectrum Analyzer mode
Front Panel
Access:
MODE
296 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
MMEMory Subsystem
The purpose of the MMEMory subsystem is to provide access to mass storage devices such as internal or external disk drives.
Refer also to :CALCulate and :TRACe subsystems for more trace and limit line commands.
Agilent ESA analyzers use two types of mass storage devices:
• 3.5 inch disk drive (high density, 1.44 MBytes formatted) designated “A:”
• Part of flash memory and treated as a device designated “C:”
The MMEMory command syntax term <file_name> is a specifier having the form: drive:\directory\name.ext, where the following rules apply:
•
“drive” is “A:” or “C:”
•
“\directory\” is the path name
• “name” is a DOS file name of up to eight characters, letters (A-Z, a-z) and numbers (0-9) only (lower case letters are read as uppercase)
• “ext” is an optional file extension using the same rules as “name,” but consists of up to three characters total
Catalog the Selected Memory Location
:MMEMory:CATalog? <drive>
where “drive” is “A:” or “C:”
Lists all files in the specified drive. The return data will be of the format:
<mem_used>,<mem_free>,<file_listing>
Each <file listing> indicates the name, and size of one file in the directory list: <file_name>,<file_size>
Example:
Catalog drive C:
, which is in instrument memory:
:MMEMory:CATalog? “C:”
Front Panel
Access:
File
Copy a File
:MMEMory:COPY <file_name1>,<file_name2>
To copy a file, the source file name is <file_name1> and the destination file name is <file_name2>.
Chapter 5 297
Remote Command Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
Example:
Front Panel
Access:
:MMEM:COPY “C:oldname.sta”,”A:\newname.sta”
File, Copy
Move Data to File
:MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<definite_length_block>
:MMEMory:DATA? <file_name>
Loads <definite_length_block> into the memory location <file_name>.
The query returns the contents of the <file_name> in the format of a definite length block. This command can be used for copying files out of the analyzer over the remote bus. Refer to chapter 3, Programming Examples, for more information.
Example: Load “abcd” into C:source.txt:
:MMEM:DATA “C:source.txt”,#14abcd
Delete a File
:MMEMory:DELete <file_name>
Delete a file.
Example:
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
:MMEM:DEL “C:source.txt”
If <file_name> does not exist, a “File Name Error” will occur.
File, Delete
Load a Corrections Table from a File
:MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection
ANTenna|CABLe|OTHer|USER,<file_name>
Loads the data in the file <file_name> to the specified correction set.
Example:
:MMEM:LOAD:CORR ANT, “A:TEST5.CBL”
Front Panel
Access:
File, Load, Type, Corrections
Load a Limit Line from Memory to the Instrument
:MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2,<file_name>
298 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
Loads a limit line, from the specified file in mass storage to the instrument.
Loading a time limit line deletes any frequency limit lines. Similarly, loading a frequency limit line deletes any time limit lines.
Example:
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
:MMEM:LOAD:LIM LLINE2,“C:mylimit.lim”
There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1|LLINE2.
File, Load, Type, Limits
Load an Instrument State from a File
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1,<file_name>
The contents of the state file are loaded into the current instrument state.
Example:
Remarks:
:MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,“C:mystate.sta”
You must be in Spectrum Analysis mode to use this command.
The *RCL commands loads all of the mode states.
See also commands :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe and
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
If the revision of the state being loaded is newer than the revision of the instrument, no state is recalled and an error is reported.
If the revision of the state being loaded is equal to the revision of the instrument, all regions of the state will be loaded.
If the revision of the state being loaded is older than the revision of the instrument, the instrument will only load the older regions of the state.
Front Panel
Access:
File, Load, Type, State
Load a Trace From a File to the Instrument
:MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe <file_name>
The contents of the file are loaded into TRACE1. The file name must have a file extension of .trc. These files contain and load a trace with its state. Files with the
.csv extension (using the comma-separated values format) contain only trace data and they cannot be used to load a trace into the instrument.
Example:
Remarks:
:MMEM:LOAD:TRAC “C:mytrace.trc”
See also commands :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe and
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe
Chapter 5 299
Remote Command Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
If the revision of the state being loaded is newer than the revision of the instrument, no state is recalled and an error is reported.
If the revision of the state being loaded is equal to the revision of the instrument, all regions of the state will be loaded.
If the revision of the state being loaded is older than the revision of the instrument, the instrument will only load the older regions of the state.
Make a Directory
:MMEMory:MDIRectory <dir_path>
where “path” is “A:\” or “C:\”
Makes a directory or subdirectory in the specified path.
Example:
Make a directory in C:
\, which is in instrument memory:
:MMEMory:MDIRectory “C:\”
Front Panel
Access:
File, Create Dir
Delete a Directory
:MMEMory:RDIRectory <dir_name>
Deletes the specified directory and all files and subdirectories within that directory.
Front Panel
Access:
File, Delete
Set the Save Screen Image File Type
:MMEMory:SCReen:FORMat BITMap|METafile
Allows you to set the format of the screen image to bitmap or metafile format.
Added with firmware revision A.12.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save, Type, Screen, Format
300 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
Set the Save Screen Image Background
:MMEMory:SCReen:BACKground NORMal|REVerse
Allows you to set the display background to normal or reverse. Reverse is used to change the dark background to a light background for printing purposes.
Added with firmware revision A.12.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save, Type, Screen, Format
Reverse the Colors of the Display
:MMEMory:SCReen:BACKground NORMal|REVerse
:MMEMory:SCReen:BACKground?
This reverses the screen colors for screen file saving. It lets you save a screen file that has green traces on a white background, so it does not take as much black ink to print the background. Use the save command: :MMEMory:SCReen:STORe
<file_name> to save the reversed file.
Example:
Front Panel
Access:
:MMEM:SCR:BACK REV
File
Store a Corrections Table to a File
:MMEMory:STORe:CORRection
ANTenna|CABLe|OTHer|USER,<file_name>
Stores the specified correction set to the file named <file_name>.
Example:
:MMEM:STOR:CORR ANT, “A:TEST1.ANT”
This command will fail if the <file_name> already exists.
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
File, Save, Type, Corrections
Store a Limit Line in a File
:MMEMory:STORe:LIMit LLINE1|LLINE2,<file_name>
Stores the specified limit line to the specified file in memory.
Example:
:MMEM:STOR:LIM LLINE2,“C:mylimit.lim”
Chapter 5 301
Remote Command Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
This command will fail if the <file_name> already exists.
There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1|LLINE2.
File, Save, Type, Limits
Store Measurement Results in a File
:MMEMory:STORe:RESults <file_name>
Saves the results of the current measurement into a comma-separated file. Only works when a measurement has been chosen from the
MEASURE
menu. SCPI commands associated with these measurements are located in Volume 2
“One-Button Power Measurements”. The filename extension is .CSV. This command will fail if the file <file_name> already exists.
Example:
Front Panel
Access:
:MMEM:STOR:RES “A:ACP.CSV”
File, Save, Type, Measurement Results
Store a Screen Image in a Graphic File
:MMEMory:STORe:SCReen <file_name>
Saves the current instrument screen image, as a graphic file, to the specified file in memory. The file must have a .gif or .wmf file extension. The specified file extension determines which file format the instrument will use to save the image.
Use the MMEM:SCReen:BACKground REVerse command to reverse the display image before saving the screen file.
Example:
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
:MMEM:STOR:SCR “C:myscreen.gif”
This command will fail if the <file_name> already exists.
File, Save, Type, Screen
Store an Instrument State in a File
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<file_name>
Saves the instrument state to the file in memory. This file data is only readable by the analyzer.
Example:
:MMEM:STOR:STAT 1,“C:mystate.sta”
Remarks: You must be in Spectrum Analysis mode to use this command.
The *SAV commands stores all of the mode states.
302 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
MMEMory Subsystem
This command will fail if the <file_name> already exists.
Store a Trace in a File
:MMEMory:STORe:TRACe <label>,<file_name>
Saves the specified trace to a file in memory. The file name must have a file extension of :csv or :trc. The file extension determines whether just the trace data is stored, or the trace is stored with its state. The .csv extension uses the CSV
(comma-separated values) format for the trace data in frequency/amplitude pairs.
The .trc extension is for files that include both trace and state data. The .trc file data is only readable by the analyzer.
Example:
Range:
:MMEM:STOR:TRAC TRACE3,“C:mytrace.trc”
Trace labels are: TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|ALL
Remarks: This command will fail if the <file_name> already exists.
Front Panel Access:
File, Save, Type, Trace
Chapter 5 303
Remote Command Reference
OUTPut Subsystem
OUTPut Subsystem
The OUTPut subsystem controls the characteristics of the tracking generator
output port. Refer to the “SOURce Subsystem” on page 347 , which also contains
commands that control the characteristics of the tracking generator.
Turn Output On/Off
:OUTPut[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:OUTPut[:STATe]?
Controls the tracking generator output.
Factory Preset and *RST: Off
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amplitude On Off
304 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
SENSe Subsystem
SENSe Subsystem
Sets the instrument state parameters so that you can measure the input signal.
SENSe subsystem commands used for measurements in the
MEASURE
and
Meas
Setup
menus are located in Volume 2 “One-Button Power Measurements”. These commands may be used only to set parameters of a specific measurement when the measurement is active.
Auto-range Dwell Time
[:SENSe]:ARDTime <time>
[:SENSe]:ARDTime?
Sets the auto-range dwell time for the EMI Detectors. The amplitude ranging process optimizes the available dynamic range for the measurement. The dwell time is the time spent auto-ranging. You may need to set this value if you have a signal with a very low PRF signal
(< 5Hz). Dwell time must be > 1/PRF. (See also
SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion:EMI
)
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0.2 s
0.001 to 2000 s (The actual minimum value varies. It is dependent on the number of trace points and the ADC period.)
Remarks:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
This command is only available with Option AYQ installed.
Added with firmware revision A.14.00.
Det/Demod
,
EMI Detector
Chapter 5 305
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:AVERage Subsection
[:SENSe]:AVERage Subsection
Clear the Current Average
[:SENSe]:AVERage:CLEar
Re-start the trace averaging function.
Re-start the trace at the beginning of a sweep to obtain valid average data. To do this, remotely abort the sweep and initiate a single sweep.
Set the Average Count
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt <integer>
[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt?
Specifies the number of measurements that are combined.
Factory Preset and *RST: 100
1 to 8192 Range:
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Average On Off
Turn Averaging On/Off
[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe]?
This command toggles averaging off and on. Averaging combines the value of successive measurements to average out measurement variations.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Off
When a measurement under the front panel
MEASURE
key is started, this command is turned off for video averaging
([:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE VIDeo). If this command is turned on for video averaging when any of the
MEASURE
key measurements are in progress, that measurement will be stopped.
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Average On Off
306 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:AVERage Subsection
Figure 5-1
Turn Automatic Averaging On/Off
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO?
Sets the averaging to be automatically set to the appropriate type for the current measurement setup. Or allows you to manually choose the type of averaging with
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE
.
When AUTO is On:
If the Y Axis Scale is not Linear or Log, then average type is Video (Y Axis
Scale) Averaging.
If the Y Axis Scale is Linear or Log, then average type is Power Averaging.
If the Detector is Peak, Sample, or Negative Peak (not Average), then average type is Video Average.
See Figure 5-1 , which shows these auto rules for average type in flowchart format.
Auto Rules for Average Type
Chapter 5 307
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:AVERage Subsection
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
On
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
BW/Avg, Avg Type, Auto Man
Type of Averaging for Measurements
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE VIDeo|RMS
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?
Successive measurements of data can be combined to average out measurement variations. Detector is set to average and Avg type is set to power (RMS) to measure RMS voltage (avg power).
As a best practice, set amplitude scale (:DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC) prior to average type.
VIDeo
logarithmically averages the power of the video data (typical units are dBm). This command is equivalent to pressing front panel keys
BW/Avg, Avg
Type, Video.
RMS
averages the linear power of successive measurements (typical units are watts).
The following parameters of this command are supported, but not recommended for new designs. They are provided for limited compatibility to other spectrum analyzers. When used, the parameters are converted as follows:
TYPE LINear maps to RMS.
TYPE LPOWer maps to VIDeo.
TYPE POWer maps to RMS.
TYPE SCALar and VOLTage will map to VIDeo in linear amplitude scale. If the amplitude scale is LOG, an error is generated.
TYPE LOG maps to VIDeo. If the amplitude scale is not LOG (linear or Y Axis Units
= Hz), an error is generated.
For compatibility with firmware revisions prior to A.08.00, q uery
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?
will return LPOW or POW if LPOW or POW is used during the setting and no further changes have occurred to set the average type (such as from the front panel).
Factory Preset and *RST: VID
308 Chapter 5
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:AVERage Subsection
Changed with firmware revision A.08.00.
BW/Avg, Avg Type
Chapter 5 309
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection
Resolution Bandwidth
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <freq>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]?
Specifies the resolution bandwidth.
Example:
BAND 1 kHz
Range: 1 kHz to 5 MHz (standard instrument)
100 Hz to 5 MHz (E4411B, E4403B, E4408B with Option
1DR)
Front Panel
Access:
10 Hz to 5 MHz (E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B with Option 1DR)
1 Hz to 5 MHz (E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B with Options 1DR and 1D5)
Default Unit: Hz
BW/Avg, Resolution BW Auto Man
Resolution Bandwidth Automatic
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO?
Couples the resolution bandwidth to the frequency span.
Factory Preset and *RST: On
Example:
History:
BWID:AUTO On
Remarks:
This command function changed with firmware revision
A.08.00. With :AUTO ON in zero span, an error will be generated.
Auto-couple resolution bandwidth is not available in zero span.
Video Bandwidth
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo <freq>
310 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo?
Specifies the video bandwidth.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
3 MHz
1 Hz to 3 MHz. This range is dependent upon the setting of
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]
and installed options.
Default Unit: Hz
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Video BW Auto Man
Video Bandwidth Automatic
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO?
Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
Factory Preset and *RST: On
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, Video BW Auto Man
Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <number>
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio?
Specifies the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
1.0
0.00001 to 3.0e6
Front Panel
Access:
BW/Avg, VBW/RBW Ratio
Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio Mode Select
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio:AUTO?
Chapter 5 311
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:BANDwidth Subsection
Selects auto or manual mode for video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio.
Refer to
, which is a flowchart that illustrates VBW and
RBW Ratio auto rules.
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
On
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
BW/Avg, VBW/RBW, Auto Man
312 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
Delete All Corrections
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete
This command deletes all existing corrections.
History: Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Delete All Corrections
Perform Amplitude Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe]?
Turns On or Off the amplitude corrections. When turned On, only the correction sets that were turned on are enabled. When turned Off, all of the correction sets are disabled.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Off
To turn On or Off an individual correction set, use:
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4[:STATe]
.
Front Panel
Access:
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Antenna, Correction On
Off
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Cable, Correction On Off
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Other, Correction On Off
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, User, Correction On Off
Set Amplitude Correction Data
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA
<freq>,<rel_ampl>{,<freq>,<rel_ampl>}
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA?
Sets the amplitude correction data. These frequency/amplitude corrections will be applied to the displayed data to correct for system losses/gains outside the analyzer. Four different sets of correction data can be stored.
Example:
:CORR:CSET1:DATA
Chapter 5 313
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
900E6,0.3,1.0E9,0.35,1.3E9,0.2
Range:
Remarks:
200 points per set
Default Unit: There are no units on the frequency and amplitude pairs. They must be entered in hertz (Hz) and decibels (dB).
CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows:
CSET or CSET1 is Antenna
CSET2 is Cable
CSET3 is Other
CSET4 is User
Front Panel
Access:
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Antenna, Edit
Point|Frequency|Amplitude|Delete Point
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Cable, Edit
Point|Frequency|Amplitude|Delete Point
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, Other, Edit
Point|Frequency|Amplitude|Delete Point
Amplitude/Y Scale, Corrections, User, Edit
Point|Frequency|Amplitude|Delete Point
Merge Additional Values into the Existing
Amplitude Correction Data
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DATA:MERGe
<freq>,<rel_ampl>{,<freq>,<rel_ampl>}
Adds the points with the specified values to the current amplitude correction data, allowing you to merge correction data. If too much data is merged, as many points as possible are merged into the existing data and then an error is reported.
•
<freq>
is the frequency (in Hz) where the correction should be applied; no unit is allowed in this parameter
•
<rel_ampl>
is the amount of relative amplitude correction (in dB) needed; no unit is allowed in this parameter
Remarks: CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows:
CSET or CSET1 is Antenna
CSET2 is Cable
CSET3 is Other
CSET4 is User
314 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
Delete Amplitude Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:DELete
Deletes the specified correction set. If the set was On, it is turned Off.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Corrections,
Antenna|Cable|Other|User, Delete Correction
Set Amplitude Correction Frequency Interpolation
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4:X:SPACing
LINear|LOGarithmic
Sets the frequency interpolation to linear or logarithmic for the specified correction set.
Remarks: Logarithmic frequency scale corrections are linearly interpolated between correction points with respect to the logarithm of the frequency. Linear frequency scale corrections are interpolated along straight lines, connecting adjacent points on a linear scale.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Corrections, Freq Interp Log Lin
Perform Amplitude Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]|2|3|4[:STATe]?
Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the given set.
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL[:STATe]
must be on for this command to function.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Off
CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows:
CSET or CSET1 is Antenna
CSET2 is Cable
CSET3 is Other
CSET4 is User
Front Panel
Chapter 5 315
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:CORRection Subsection
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Corrections,
Antenna|Cable|Other|User, Correction On Off
Input Impedance Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude] <number>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude]?
Amplitude correction is applied to the display data to adjust for measurement situations where the unit under test has a different impedance than the 50
Ω input impedance of the analyzer. Some Agilent ESA analyzers have Option 1DP, 75
Ω input. In this case, you may want to convert the data to make measurements in a
50
Ω system.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is the input impedance of the analyzer.
Range: 50 or 75 ohms
Default Unit: ohms
Front Panel
Access:
Input, Input Z Corr 50
Ω 75 Ω
External Amplifier Correction
[:SENSe]:CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude] <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:CORRection:OFFSet[:MAGNitude]?
A single value of amplitude correction can be applied to the displayed trace data to compensate for signal losses or gains that are due to other devices in the measurement setup, rather than the unit under test.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 dB
–81.9 to 81.9
Default Unit: dB
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Ext Amp Gain
316 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:DEMod Subsection
[:SENSe]:DEMod Subsection
Type of Demodulation
[:SENSe]:DEMod AM|FM
[:SENSe]:DEMod?
Sets the type of demodulation. FM is only available with Option BAA, AYQ or
106. If you have multiple FM demodulation hardware options, the hardware that will be used is automatically selected in order of priority (with firmware revision
A.14.00 and later).
1. Option 106 - Bluetooth
™ 1
2. Option AYQ - Quasi-peak detection and FM demodulation
3. Option BAA - FM Demodulation
Factory Preset and *RST: AM
Front Panel
Access: Det/Demod, Demod, AM
Det/Demod, Demod, FM
FM Deviation
[:SENSe]:DEMod:FMDeviation <freq>
[:SENSe]:DEMod:FMDeviation?
Sets the total FM frequency deviation for displaying the demodulation. FM
Deviation can only be changed if you have Options BAA or AYQ installed. For
Option 106, only the query form of the command is applicable.
If you have multiple FM demodulation hardware options, the hardware that will be used is automatically selected in order of priority (with firmware revision A.14.00 or later).
1. Option 106 - Bluetooth
™
2. Option AYQ - Quasi-peak detection and FM demodulation
3. Option BAA - FM Demodulation
Factory Preset and *RST: 100 kHz for Option BAA, AYQ
Approximately 40 kHz for Option 106 (determined during FM demodulation alignment)
1. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Agilent Technologies under license.
Chapter 5 317
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:DEMod Subsection
Range: 5 kHz to 1.2 MHz
If 1.0 MHz is entered as the deviation frequency, peak to peak would be 1 MHz times 2 = 2.0 MHz or 200 kHz/division.
Default Unit: Hz
History: Modified with firmware revision A.14.00.
Front Panel
Access: AMPLITUDE, Scale/Div
FM Demodulation Squelch
[:SENSe]:DEMod:SQUelch <integer>
[:SENSe]:DEMod:SQUelch?
Allows you to adjust the squelch level. The squelch level mutes weak signals and passes strong signals. Only the audio level is affected. If the internal speaker is On, audio signals are not output unless the signal strength exceeds the squelch threshold. This function is only available when Option AYQ is used as the instrument FM demodulation hardware.
The squelch level does not affect the rear panel AUX VIDEO OUT signal. Squelch level is indicated on screen by the numbers 0 to 100, with 0 being the minimum threshold (all signals are passed) and 100 being the maximum threshold (no signals are passed). The default squelch value is 0.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
History:
0
0 to 100
Added with firmware revision A.14.00.
Front Panel
Access: Det/Demod, Demod
Demodulation Control
[:SENSe]:DEMod:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:DEMod:STATe?
Turns demodulation on or off.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Det/Demod, Demod, Off
318 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:DEMod Subsection
Demod Time
[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME <time>
[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME?
Sets the time used for frequency domain demodulation.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
500 ms
2 ms to 100 s
Default Unit: seconds
Front Panel
Access: Det/Demod, Demod, Demod Time
Demod View
[:SENSe]:DEMod:VIEW[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:DEMod:VIEW[:STATe]?
This command is only available if FM demodulation is selected. It causes the demodulated signal to be displayed with the y-axis scale in units of kHz. Use
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:PDIVision:FREQuency
to set scale/div.
If FM Demod is on, then several functions are not available. These include:
Log/Lin (display is always in linear), Y-Axis Units, Marker Search functions,
Normalize, Display Line, Peak Excursion, and Peak Threshold. These functions are not affected when AM demodulation is selected.
Factory Preset and *RST: Off
Remarks:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
This command is not available when Demod is set to Off.
Added with firmware revision A.14.00.
Det/Demod, Demod, FM, Demod View
Chapter 5 319
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
Automatic Detection Type Selected
[:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:DETector:AUTO?
Switches automatically to the optimum detection type for typical measurements using the current instrument settings.
The detector type is average if any of these are on:
• Noise marker
• Band power markers
• Trace averaging when the Average Type is Power (RMS).
The detector type is sample if any of the following conditions are true:
• Trace averaging is on with average type of video
• Both max and min hold trace modes are on
• Resolution bandwidth is less than 1 kHz, and noise marker, band power markers, or trace averaging is on
• Quasi-peak detection (Option AYQ)
• EMI Average detection (Option AYQ)
The detector type is negative peak if any trace is in min hold and no traces are in max hold.
The detector type is peak if the above conditions are off.
Manually changing the detector function turns Auto off.
Refer to
Figure 2-1 on page 57 , which shows a decision tree of how detection type
is determined.
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
On
Added with firmware revision A.08.00. Modified with A.14.00.
Det/Demod
,
Detector
Type of Detection
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]
NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle|AVERage|RMS
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]?
Specifies the detection mode. For each trace interval (bucket), average detection
320 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
displays the average of all the samples within the interval. The averaging can be done using two methods: the power method (RMS) the video method (Y Axis Units)
The method is controlled by the BW/Avg, Avg Type key.
The combination of the average detector and the power average type is equivalent to what is sometimes referred to as “RMS detection.”
• Negative peak detection displays the lowest sample taken during the interval being displayed.
• Positive peak detection displays the highest sample taken during the interval being displayed.
• Sample detection displays the sample taken during the interval being displayed, and is used primarily to display noise or noise-like signals. In sample mode, the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed into memory.
This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurement of non noise-like signals.
• Average detection is used when measuring the average value of the amplitude across each trace interval (bucket). The averaging method used by the average detector is set to either video or power as appropriate when the average type is auto coupled.
Factory Preset and *RST: Positive
History: Added Average and RMS elements to the command with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
Det/Demod
,
Detector
Det/Demod
,
Detector
,
Peak
Det/Demod
,
Detector
,
Sample
Det/Demod
,
Detector
,
Negative Peak
Det/Demod
,
Detector
,
Average
Type of EMI Detection
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]:EMI QPEak|AVERage|OFF
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]:EMI?
Specifies the specified type of EMI detection. Selecting either quasi peak or EMI average runs an amplitude ranging process that affects the reference level and attenuation settings. This optimizes the available dynamic range for the measurement. Choosing these detector also gives you access to the view and quasi-peak gain functions.
Chapter 5 321
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
QPEak - The quasi peak detector weights the peak-detected amplitude using specific charge, discharge, and meter time constants. The effect of this detector depends on the characteristics and repetition rate of the input signal. When the quasi-peak detector is selected, the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude display using sample detection.
AVERage - The EMI average detector averages the peak detection amplitude.
When EMI average detection is selected, the analyzer is forced to linear amplitude display using sample detection.
OFF - Turning EMI detectors off restores the amplitude reference level and scale type (logarithmic or linear) that was used prior to the selection of either the quasi-peak or average detector.
Factory Preset and *RST: Off
Couplings/
Dependencies: When the EMI detector is Off, the
SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion:EMI:VIEW
and
SENSe:POWer:QPGain:STATe
functions are not available.
Remarks:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
This command is only available with Option AYQ installed.
Added with firmware revision A.14.00.
Det/Demod
,
EMI Detector
Det/Demod
,
EMI Detector
,
Quasi Peak
Det/Demod
,
EMI Detector
,
EMI Average
Det/Demod
,
EMI Detector
,
Off
View of EMI Detection
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]:EMI:VIEW POSitive|EMI
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]:EMI:VIEW?
Selects between positive peak detection and the EMI quasi-peak/average detection, without changing the ranging which adjusts the reference level. This allows you to use peak detection while maintaining the current EMI measurement settings/view.
Factory Preset and *RST: Off
Couplings/
Dependencies: This function is not available unless you have selected
SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion:EMI QPEak or AVERage
.
Remarks: This command is only available with Option AYQ installed.
History: Added with firmware revision A.14.00.
322 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:DETector Subsection
Front Panel
Access:
Det/Demod
,
EMI Detector
Immediate Auto-Range EMI Detector
[:SENSe]:DETector:RANGe:IMMediate
Re-runs the amplitude ranging process. This optimizes the available dynamic range for measurements using the EMI quasi-peak and average detectors. See also
SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion:EMI
.
Remarks:
History:
This command is only available with Option AYQ installed.
Added with firmware revision A.14.00.
Auto-Range EMI Detector
[:SENSe]:DETector:RANGe[:STATe] OFF|N|0|1
[:SENSe]:DETector:RANGe[:STATe]?
Turns on/off the amplitude ranging process. This process optimizes the available dynamic range for measurements using the EMI quasi-peak and average detectors and is usually done automatically each time one of these detector types is selected.
This turns off the auto-ranging behavior. See also
SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion:EMI
.
Factory Preset and *RST: On
Remarks:
History:
This command is only available with Option AYQ installed.
Added with firmware revision A.14.00.
Remove EMI Auto-Range
[:SENSe]:DETector:UNRange
Returns the instrument settings for reference level and attenuation to the values they were before the last auto-ranging command was sent. The amplitude auto-ranging process optimizes the available dynamic range for measurements using the EMI quasi-peak and average detectors. See
SENSe:DETector:RANGe:IMMediate
.
Remarks:
History:
This command is only available with Option AYQ installed.
Added with firmware revision A.14.00.
Chapter 5 323
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
Center Frequency
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer UP|DOWN
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?
Set the center frequency.
In log sweep mode, the minimum start frequency is 10 Hz.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
ESA E4401B, E4411B: 750 MHz
ESA E4402B, E4403B: 1.5 GHz
ESA E4404B: 3.35 GHz
ESA E4405B: 6.6 GHz
ESA E4407B, E4408B: 13.25 GHz
ESA E4401B, E4411B: –80 MHz
1
to 1.58 GHz
ESA E4402B, E4403B: –80 MHz
to 3.10 GHz
ESA E4407B, E4408B: –80 MHz
to 27.0 GHz
Default Unit: Hz
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, Center Freq
Center Frequency Step Size Automatic
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO?
Specifies whether the step size is set automatically based on the span.
Factory Preset and *RST: On
1. 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode.
324 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, CF Step Auto Man
Center Frequency Step Size
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?
Specifies the center frequency step size.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
Span/10
Maximum negative frequency to the maximum positive frequency listed below:
ESA E4401B, E4411B: –1.58 to 1.58 GHz
ESA E4402B, E4403B: –3.10 to 3.10 GHz
ESA E4404B: –6.78 to 6.78 GHz
ESA E4405B: –13.3 to 13.3 GHz
ESA E4407B, E4408B: –27.0 to 27.0 GHz
Default Unit: Hz
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, CF Step Man
Frequency Span
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN?
Set the frequency span. Setting the span to 0 Hz puts the analyzer into zero span.
Factory Preset and *RST: ESA E4401B, E4411B: 1.5 GHz
Range:
ESA E4402B, E4403B: 3.0 GHz
ESA E4404B: 6.7 GHz
ESA E4405B: 13.2 GHz
ESA E4407B, E4408B: 26.5 GHz
ESA E4401B, E4411B: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 1.58 GHz
ESA E4402B, E4403B: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 3.10 GHz
ESA E4404B: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 6.78 GHz
Chapter 5 325
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
ESA E4405B: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 13.3 GHz
ESA E4407B, E4408B: 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 27.0 GHz
Default Unit: Hz
Front Panel
Access:
SPAN/X Scale, Span
SPAN/X Scale, Zero Span
Full Frequency Span
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL
Set the frequency span to full scale.
Factory Preset and *RST: ESA E4401B, E4411B: 1.5 GHz
ESA E4402B, E4403B: 3.0 GHz
ESA E4404B: 6.7 GHz
ESA E4405B: 13.2 GHz
ESA E4407B, E4408B: 26.5 GHz
Front Panel
Access:
SPAN/X Scale, Full Span
Last Frequency Span
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious
Set the frequency span to the previous span setting.
Front Panel
Access:
SPAN/X Scale, Last Span
Start Frequency
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt?
Set the start frequency.
In log sweep mode, the minimum start frequency is 10 Hz.
Factory Preset
326 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
and *RST:
Range:
0 Hz
ESA E4401B, E4411B: –80 MHz
1
to 1.58 GHz
ESA E4404B: –80 MHz
to 6.78 GHz
ESA E4405B: –80 MHz
to 13.3 GHz
Default Unit: Hz
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, Start Freq
Stop Frequency
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP <freq>
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP?
Set the stop frequency.
Factory Preset and *RST: ESA E4401B, E4411B: 1.5 GHz
ESA E4402B, E4403B: 3.0 GHz
Range:
ESA E4404B: 6.7 GHz
ESA E4405B: 13.2 GHz
ESA E4407B, E4408B: 26.5 GHz
ESA E4401B, E4411B: –80 MHz
2
to 1.58 GHz
ESA E4404B: –80 MHz
to 6.78 GHz
ESA E4405B: –80 MHz
to 13.3 GHz
Default Unit: Hz
Front Panel
Access:
FREQUENCY/Channel, Stop Freq
1. 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode.
2. 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode.
Chapter 5 327
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:FREQuency Subsection
Frequency Synthesis Mode
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis 1|2|3
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis?
This command switches between two phase noise optimization modes. Mode 2 optimizes the analyzer for close-in phase noise. Mode 3 optimizes the analyzer for tuning speed. Mode 1 is not recommended for new designs.
This command is available for the following models only:
E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, E4408B
Factory Preset and *RST: 3
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access:
AUTO COUPLE, PhNoise Opt
Frequency Synthesis State
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SYNThesis:AUTO?
This command switches between auto and manual phase noise selection.
When in auto mode, the phase noise optimization is set as follows:
•
For spans
≤ 10 MHz, the analyzer is optimized for phase noise.
•
For spans
> 10 MHz, the analyzer is optimized for fast tuning.
This command is available for the following models only:
E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, E4408B
Factory Preset and *RST: On
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access:
AUTO COUPLE, PhNoise Opt
328 Chapter 5
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[SENSe]:MIXer Subsection
[SENSe]:MIXer Subsection
Select External Mixer Band
[:SENSe]:MIXer:BAND K|A|Q|U|V|E|W|F|D|G|Y|J|USER
[:SENSe]:MIXer:BAND?
This command allows the selection of one of the pre-defined bands corresponding to the external mixer currently in use. This command is available only with Option
AYZ (External Mixing).
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Band A (26.5-40 Ghz)
If the mixer harmonic configuration
([:SENSe]:MIXer:HARMonic:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1 is set to Off (manual), then a query will return “USER”.
Bands K, E, W, F, D, G, Y, and J are not available if Mixer Type is set to Presel.
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Input Mixer, Ext Mix Band
External Mixer Bias Adjust
[:SENSe]:MIXer:BIAS <numeric>
[:SENSe]:MIXer:BIAS?
This command allows the adjustment of an internal bias source for use with external mixers. This command is available only with Option AYZ (External
Mixing).
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0
–10 mA to 10 mA
Default Unit: mA
Remarks: The bias signal is present on the center conductor of the IF
INPUT connector on the front panel. See related command
[:SENSe]:MIXer:BIAS[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
.
Mixer Bias will be set to Off when transitioning from manual harmonic mode to auto harmonic mode.
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Input Mixer, Mixer Config, Mixer
Bias On Off
Chapter 5 329
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[SENSe]:MIXer Subsection
Set External Mixer Bias On/Off
[:SENSe]:MIXer:BIAS:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:MIXer:BIAS:STATe?
This command activates an internal bias source for use with external mixers. This command is available only with Option AYZ (External Mixing).
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Off
The bias signal is present on the center conductor of the IF Input connector on the front panel. See related command
[:SENSe]:MIXer:BIAS <numeric>
.
Mixer Bias will be set to Off when transitioning from manual harmonic mode to auto harmonic mode.
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Input Mixer, Mixer Config, Mixer
Bias On Off
Set External Mixer LO Harmonic Value
[:SENSe]:MIXer:HARMonic <integer>
[:SENSe]:MIXer:HARMonic?
This command allows you to set the LO harmonic value for mixers other than the
HP/Agilent 11970-Series or 11974-Series Mixers. This is done after the mixer harmonic configuration ([:SENSe]:MIXer:HARMonic:AUTO
OFF|ON|0|1
) is set to Off (manual). This command is available only with
Option AYZ (External Mixing).
Factory Preset and *RST: –8 (Band A, 26.5-40 GHz)
Range:
Remarks:
Any non-zero integer from –50 to 50, inclusive
The harmonic value with its associated sign is automatically determined from the external mixer band selected. This is the
AUTO mode. For mixers other than the HP/Agilent
11970-Series or 11974-Series, an LO harmonic other than that determined in the AUTO mode may be required. This is achieved using this command and related command
[:SENSe]:MIXer:HARMonic:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
.
330 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[SENSe]:MIXer Subsection
Set External Mixer LO Harmonic Mode
[:SENSe]:MIXer:HARMonic:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:MIXer:HARMonic:AUTO?
This command allows you to set the external mixer LO harmonic mode to either automatic or manual. The manual mode is used with mixers other than the
HP/Agilent 11970-Series or 11974-Series Mixers to manually choose the required
LO harmonic. This command is available only with Option AYZ (External
Mixing).
Refer also to commands :INPut:MIXer INTernal|EXTernal and
:INPut:MIXer:TYPE PRESelected|UNPReselect
.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
AUTO
The harmonic value with its associated sign is automatically determined from the external mixer band selected. This is the
AUTO mode. For mixers other than the HP/Agilent
11970-Series or 11974-Series, an LO harmonic other than that determined in the AUTO mode may be required. This is achieved using this command and related command
[:SENSe]:MIXer:HARMonic <value>
.
Manually selecting a harmonic will remove any restrictions on Mixer Bias and
Mixer Type, and External Mixer Band will become USER. Returning the
Harmonic to AUTO will reset the band to A, set Mixer Type to UNPReselect, and turn Mixer Bias Off.
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Input Mixer, Mixer Config, Harmonic
Auto Man
Chapter 5 331
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:POWer Subsection
[:SENSe]:POWer Subsection
Quasi-peak Detector Gain
[:SENSe]:POWer:QPGain[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:POWer:QPGain[:STATe]?
Turns on or off the linear
×10 gain stage in the quasi-peak and average detector signal path. This stage may be enabled/disabled whenever the quasi-peak or EMI average detector is first selected. See SENSe:DETector:FUNCtion:EMI.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
This command is only available with Option AYQ installed.
Det/Demod
,
EMI Detector
Input Attenuation
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation <rel_ampl>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?
Set the input attenuator. This value is set at its auto value if input attenuation is set to auto.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
10 dB
ESA E4401B, E4411B: 0 to 60 dB
ESA E4402B, E4403B, E4404B, E4405B: 0 to 75 dB
ESA E4407B, E4408B: 0 to 65 dB
Default Unit: dB
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Attenuation Auto Man
Input Port Attenuator Auto
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?
Select the input port attenuator range to be set either automatically or manually.
332 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:POWer Subsection
On – Input attenuation is automatically set as determined by the Reference
Level Setting.
Off – Input attenuation is manually set
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
On
AMPLITUDE Y Scale, Attenuation
Input Port Power Gain
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]?
Turns the internal preamp on or off.
Factory Preset and *RST: Off
This command is only available with Option 1DS installed.
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale
,
Int Preamp On Off
Input Port Maximum Mixer Power
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer] <ampl>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:MIXer:RANGe[:UPPer]?
Specifies the maximum power at the input mixer.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
−10 dBm
–100 dBm to 10 dBm
Default Unit: dBm
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Max Mixer Lvl
Optimize Preselector Frequency
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust <freq>
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust?
This command allows user-defined adjustment of the preselector frequency to
Chapter 5 333
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:POWer Subsection
optimize its response on the signal of interest.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 Hz
–250 MHz to 250 MHz
Default Unit: None. Use the MHz terminator in order for this command to work.
Remarks: This command is available only on Agilent ESA models
E4404B, E4405B, E4407B, and E4408B. Use this command for signals close to the noise level, multiple signals close together, or for other conditions when the preselector is not tuned to the frequency of interest.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Presel Adjust
Preselector Center
[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter
In internal mixing, this command centers the preselector filter at the signal of interest. In external mixing, the external preselector filter is adjusted to the peak of the filter response to maximize the amplitude at the active marker frequency. This command has no effect if it is activated in non-preselected bands. This command is usable from 3 GHz to the maximum frequency of the analyzer.
This command is available only on Agilent ESA models E4404B, E4405B,
E4407B, and E4408B. This command has no effect with markers set to less than
3 GHz.
A peak search will be done if no marker is on.
Remarks:
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Presel Center
334 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SIDentify Subsection
[:SENSe]:SIDentify Subsection
Set Mixer Signal Identification Mode
[:SENSe]:SIDentify:MODE ISUPpress|ISHift
[:SENSe]:SIDentify:MODE?
This command lets you choose one of two types of signal identification methods when viewing multiple responses from non-preselected external mixers. This command is available only with Option AYZ (External Mixing). Refer to
:INPut:MIXer:TYPE
to select the type of mixer being used.
Factory Preset and *RST: ISUPpress
Added with firmware revision A.03.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Input Mixer, Signal ID Mode, Image
Suppress
Input/Output (or Input), Input Mixer, Signal ID Mode, Image
Shift
Set Mixer Signal Identification State
[:SENSe]:SIDentify[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:SIDentify[:STATe]?
This command activates an algorithm which either removes or aids with the identification of multiple responses. These responses are generated from a single input signal using non-preselected external mixers.
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
Remarks:
Off
Added with firmware revision A.03.00.
Signal identification relies on the acquisition of data from two successive sweeps. Therefore, if the analyzer is in single sweep mode, two sweep triggers are needed to generate the sweep pair.
In image suppress mode, synchronization is ensured by first turning off signal identification, initiating a single sweep, then turning on signal identification followed by two single sweeps.
Chapter 5 335
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SIDentify Subsection
To synchronize in image shift mode, turn off signal identification, initiate a single sweep, and turn on signal identification. The results of the first sweep after signal identification is turned on must be ignored. The data from the second sweep is available in Trace 1 and the data from the third
(shifted) sweep is available in Trace 2.
Signal identification is not available with signal track, resolution bandwidths
≤300
Hz, demod, or averaging. Signal identification will be turned off when input mixer is set to internal.
Front Panel
Access:
Input/Output (or Input), Input Mixer, Signal Ident On Off
336 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Sweep Points
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts <number of points>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts?
This command sets the number of sweep points.
Factory Preset and *RST: 401
Example:
History:
:SWEep:POIN 401
Range:
This command is available only on analyzers with firmware revision A.04.00 and later. Analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A.04.00 have the number of sweep points fixed at 401.
101 to 8192, (2 to 8192 in zero span for analyzers with firmware revision A.05.00 and later)
Remarks: The number of sweep points can be set only with Agilent ESA models E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, and E4407B.
Sweep points for ESA models E4403B, E4408B, and E4411B are fixed at 401 points. The number of sweep points may be queried on all analyzers with firmware revision A.04.00 and later.
For analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A.08.00, any change to sweep points sets the following commands as shown:
:CALCulate:LLINe1:DISPlay to off, and
:CALCulate:LLINe2:DISPlay to off.
Whenever the number of sweep points change, the following functions are affected:
• All trace data is erased
• Any traces in view mode will go to blank mode
• Sweep time is re-calculated
• Any limit lines that are on will be turned off (For analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A.08.00)
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Points
Chapter 5 337
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Query Number of Segments
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SEGMent:COUNt?
Returns the number of segments that have been defined in the segmented sweep data.
This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A.05.00 or later: E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0
0 to 32
Set All Segment Data
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SEGMent:DATA[:ALL] <SSTop|CSPan>,<string>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SEGMent:DATA[:ALL]? <SSTop|CSPan>
Specify parameters for all segments of a segmented sweep. The data is entered as comma-separated ASCII values in sequential order of segments desired. Segments will be sorted in order of increasing start frequency. If multiple segments have the same start frequency, they will appear in order of increasing stop frequency. It is possible to define segments that overlap.
For SSTop, the data order used for each segment is: start frequency, stop frequency, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, number of points, and sweep time.
For CSPan, the data order used for each segment is: center frequency, span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, number of points, and sweep time.
This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A.05.00 or later: E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, or E4407B.
Command [:SENSe]:SWEep:SEGMent:DATA[:ALL] will delete any previous segment data.
Example:
Range:
:SENSe:SWEep:SEGMent:DATA:ALL
CSPan,50e06,5e6,1e5,1e5,101,.0050,1e09,5e6
,1e5,1e5,101,.05
This example defines two segments. The first segment has a center frequency of 50 MHz and the second segment has a center frequency of 1 GHz.
The range depends upon the model number, installed options, and firmware revision of your instrument; see the Specifications
Guide for details. The ranges that apply to all instrument models that can be controlled with this command are resolution
338 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
bandwidth, video bandwidth, and number of points.
Resolution Bandwidth: 1 kHz to 5 MHz
Video Bandwidth: 30 Hz to 3 MHz
Number of Points: 101 to 8192, 2 to 8192 in zero span. The total number of points for all segments is
≤ 8192 .
Default Unit: Fundamental units (without entering the actual units)
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Edit, Center Freq
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Edit, Span
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Edit, Resolution BW
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Edit, Video BW
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Edit, Points
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Edit, Sweep Time
Merge Data With Segmented Sweep Data
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SEGMent:DATA:MERGe <SSTop|CSPan>,<string>
Merges the data to the segmented sweep data. Segments will be sorted in order of increasing start frequency. If multiple segments have the same start frequency, they will appear in order of increasing stop frequency. It is possible to define segments that overlap.
For SSTop, the data order used for each segment is: start frequency, stop frequency, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, number of points, and sweep time.
For CSPan, the data order used for each segment is: center frequency, span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, number of points, and sweep time.
This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A.05.00 or later: E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B.
Example:
Range:
:SENSe:SWEep:SEGMent:DATA:MERGe
CSPan,150e06,5e6,1e5,1e5,101,.050,110e06,5 e6,1e5,1e5,100,.05
This example merges two segments into the segmented sweep table. The first segment has a center frequency of 150 MHz and the second segment has a center frequency of 110 MHz.
The range depends upon the model number, installed options, and firmware revision of your instrument; see the Specifications
Guide for details. The ranges that apply to all instrument models that can be controlled with this command are resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, and number of points.
Chapter 5 339
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Resolution Bandwidth: 1 kHz to 5 MHz
Video Bandwidth: 30 Hz to 3 MHz
Number of Points: 101 to 8192, 2 to 8192 in zero span. The total number of points for all segments is
≤ 8192 .
Default Unit: Fundamental units (without entering the actual units)
Delete All Segmented Sweep Data
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SEGMent:DELete
Deletes all segmented sweep data.
This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A.05.00 or later: E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B.
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Delete
Delete Some Segmented Sweep Data
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SEGMent:DELete:ROW <integer>
Deletes only the specified segmented sweep data (row).
This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A.05.00 or later: E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B.
1 to maximum number of segments Range:
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Segmented, Modify, Edit, Delete Segment
The front panel keys shown for this command deletes the active segment only. The remote command deletes any specified segment.
Turn On/Off Segmented Sweep
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SEGMent[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SEGMent[:STATe]?
Turns on or off segmented sweep. Segmented sweep is a mode where only bands of interest are measured with the data presented in a single trace. This improves measurement speed and provides more detail and resolution in those bands.
340 Chapter 5
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
When segmented sweep is turned on or off, all trace data (including stored trace data) is deleted.
This command applies to the following models having firmware revision A.05.00 or later: E4401B, E4402B, E4404B, E4405B, E4407B.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Off
Segmented sweep will be turned off if any of the following actions occur remotely or manually:
Factory Preset
Full Span is activated
Last Span is activated
On entering a measurement (:MEASure subsystem commands)
While segmented sweep is on, the following functions are unavailable:
Auto couple
BW/Avg: RBW, VBW
Center/Start/Stop frequency, CF Step, and frequency Offset
Span, sweep time, and points
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Segmented, ON/OFF
Set Frequency Domain Scale Type
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic
[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPACing?
Selects either linear or logarithmic for the frequency domain (X-axis) scale. The trace query of comma-separated values maps frequency/amplitude pairs for the mathematical interpolation of the log frequency axis. The value of
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts
is adjusted to reflect the acquisition of data for the given sweep span when log sweep spacing is enabled.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Linear
Refer to the User’s Guide for detailed information on the interactions of this command with other functions.
Chapter 5 341
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
FREQUENCY, Scale Type
Sweep Time
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME <time>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME?
Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the display.
Factory Preset and *RST: ESA E4401B, E4411B: 4 ms
ESA E4402B, E4403B: 5 ms
Range:
ESA E4404B: 16.75 ms
ESA E4405B: 33 ms
ESA E4407B, E4408B: 265 ms
The range depends upon the installed options, number of sweep points, and firmware revision of your instrument. See “Sweep
Time Range” in the Specifications Guide for details.
Default Unit: seconds
Remarks: A span value of 0 Hz causes the analyzer to enter zero span mode. In zero span the X-axis represents time rather than frequency. In this mode, the sweep time may be set to faster values when Options AYX or B7D are installed.
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Sweep Time Auto Man
Automatic Sweep Time
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?
Automatically selects the fastest sweep time for the current settings.
Factory Preset and *RST: On
History: This command function changed with firmware revision
A.08.00. With :AUTO ON in zero span, an error will be generated.
342 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Sweep Time Auto Man
Sweep Time Mode
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:MODE SRESponse|SANalyzer
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:MODE?
Specifies the type of automatic coupling for the fastest sweep time at the current settings.
Stimulus response
Spectrum analyzer
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
SANalyzer
Sweep, Sweep Coupling SR SA
Time Gating Delay (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:DELay <time>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:DELay?
Sets the delay time from when the gate trigger occurs to when the gate opens. This is for EDGE triggering only.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
1
µs
0.3
µs to 429 seconds
Default Unit: seconds
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Gate Setup, Edge Setup, Gate Delay
Time Gate Length (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LENGth <time>
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LENGth?
Specifies the gate time length in seconds; for EDGE triggering only.
Factory Preset and *RST: 1
µs
Chapter 5 343
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Range: 0.3
µs to 429 seconds
Default Unit: seconds
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Gate Setup, Edge Setup, Gate Length
Time Gate Level (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LEVel HIGH|LOW
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:LEVel?
Selects the level of the gate signal; this command is for LEVel triggering only.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
High
Sweep, Gate Setup, Level Setup
Time Gate Polarity (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:POLarity NEGative|POSitive
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:POLarity?
Selects the polarity of the gate signal; this command is for EDGE triggering only.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Positive
Sweep, Gate, Edge Gate, Slope Pos Neg
Preset Time Gate (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:PRESet
Presets the time-gated spectrum analysis capability.
Remarks: This command resets gate parameters to default values:
Gate trigger type = edge
Gate polarity = positive
Gate delay = 1
µs
Gate length = 1
µs
Gate level = high
344 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
[:SENSe]:SWEep Subsection
Control Time Gate (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE[:STATe]?
Turns time gating on or off.
Time gate cannot be turned on if external trigger delay is on.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Sweep, Gate, Gate On Off
Time Gate Trigger Type (Option 1D6 Only)
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:TYPE LEVel|EDGE
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:GATE:TYPE?
Selects between edge and level mode for time-gated spectrum analysis.
Level triggers the gate when the signal surpasses a specific level, set to either low or high.
Edge triggers the gate when the edge of a signal is encountered, set to either a negative-going edge or a positive-going edge.
Factory Preset and *RST: Edge
Front Panel
Access:
Sweep, Gate, Gate Control Edge Level
Chapter 5 345
Remote Command Reference
SOURce Subsystem
SOURce Subsystem
The SOURce subsystem controls the signal characteristics of the tracking
generator. Refer also to the “OUTPut Subsystem” on page 304 which contains a
command that controls the tracking generator output.
Sets the Output Power Offset Correction
:SOURce:CORRection:OFFSet <rel_ampl>
:SOURce:CORRection:OFFSet?
Specifies an offset for the displayed output power level. An offset power level can be added to the displayed level to compensate for system losses (for example, cable loss) or gains (for example, preamplifier gain.) This offset does not change the power out of the source, it only changes the display so that it reads out the actual power delivered to the device under test.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 dB
–327.6 dB to 327.6 dB
Default Unit: Currently selected source power units
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amptd Offset
Source Attenuation
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation <ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation?
Attenuates the source output level. Specifically setting
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation <ampl>
sets the mode to manual
(:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF).
Factory Preset and *RST: ESA E4401B, E4411B: 0 dB
ESA E4402B, E4403B: 8 dB
Range:
ESA E4404B: 8 dB
ESA E4405B: 8 dB
ESA E4407B, E4408B: 8 dB
ESA E4401B, E4411B: 0 dB to 60 dB in 10 dB steps
ESA E4402B, E4403B: 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps
346 Chapter 5
CAUTION
Remote Command Reference
SOURce Subsystem
ESA E4404B: 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps
ESA E4405B: 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps
ESA E4407B, E4408B: 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps
Default Unit: dB
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Attenuation Auto Man
Automatic Source Attenuation
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO?
Selects if the source output level attenuator will be set automatically, or manually.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
On
Source, Attenuation Auto Man
Sets the Output Power
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <ampl>
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] UP|DOWN
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]?
Specifies the source output power level. Use :SOURce:POWer:SWEep to set the change in power level across the sweep. Also see :SOURce:POWer:STARt and
OUTPut[:STATe].
Power-level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be accidentally damaged. This is because the actual source amplitude will be greater than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer, when the power sweep function is being used.
The source amplitude value is used as the starting amplitude for a power sweep.
The ending amplitude for a power sweep is higher then the source amplitude value and it may actually be set to values beyond specified output levels. Therefore, exercise caution when connecting a power-level sensitive device to the tracking generator output.
Chapter 5 347
Remote Command Reference
SOURce Subsystem
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
−10 dBm
ESA E4401B, E4411B with option 1DN (50 Ohm Tracking
Generator): –70 dBm to 3 dBm
ESA E4401B, E4411B with Option 1DQ (75 Ohm Tracking
Generator): –27.25 dBmV to 45.75 dBmV
ESA E4402B, E4403B: –66 dBm to 3 dBm
ESA E4404B: –66 dBm to 3 dBm
ESA E4405B: –66 dBm to 3 dBm
ESA E4407B, E4408B: –66 dBm to 3 dBm
Default Unit: dBm
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amplitude On Off
Sets the Source Output Power Mode
:SOURce:POWer:MODE FIXed|SWEep
:SOURce:POWer:MODE?
Sets the source output to be at a single amplitude (fixed) or to sweep through a range of power levels.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Fixed
Source, Power Sweep On Off
Set the Source Sweep Power Range
:SOURce:POWer:SPAN <rel_ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:SPAN?
Specifies the range of power levels through which the source output will sweep.
Use :SOURce:POWer:STARt to set the power level at the start of the power sweep. This command is equivalent to :SOURce:POWer:SWEep.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 dB
0 dB to 20 dB
Default Unit: dB
348 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
SOURce Subsystem
CAUTION
Set the Output Power at the Start of the Sweep
:SOURce:POWer:STARt <ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:STARt?
Specifies the source output power level at the start of the power sweep. Use
:SOURce:POWer:SPAN to set the change in power level across the sweep. This command is equivalent to
:SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]
.
Power-level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be accidentally damaged. This is because the actual source amplitude will be greater than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer, when the power sweep function is being used.
The source amplitude value is used as the starting amplitude for a power sweep.
The ending amplitude for a power sweep is higher then the source amplitude value and it may actually be set to values beyond specified output levels. Therefore, exercise caution when connecting a power-level sensitive device to the tracking generator output.
Set the Output Power to Step Automatically
:SOURce:POWer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1
:SOURce:POWer:STEP:AUTO?
Specifies the source power step size to be one vertical scale division when in logarithmic scale, or 10 dB when in linear scale.
Factory Preset and *RST: On
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amptd Step Auto Man
Set the Output Power Step Size
:SOURce:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] <ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:STEP[:INCRement]?
Specifies the source power step size.
Default Unit: dB
Chapter 5 349
Remote Command Reference
SOURce Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Amptd Step Auto Man
Set the Source Sweep Power Range
:SOURce:POWer:SWEep <rel_ampl>
:SOURce:POWer:SWEep?
Specifies the range of power levels through which the source output will sweep.
Use :SOURce:POWer:STARt to set the power level at the start of the power sweep. See also :SOURce:POWer:SPAN.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 dB
0 dB to 20 dB
Default Unit: dB
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Power Sweep On Off
Output Power Tracking
:SOURce:POWer:TRCKing <integer>
:SOURce:POWer:TRCKing?
Adjusts the tracking of the source output with the spectrum analyzer sweep in the present resolution bandwidth.
Factory Preset and *RST: This command is persistent. The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Range:
Remarks:
Integer, 0 to 4095
This command is not needed with the 1.5 GHz tracking generator.
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Man Track Adj
Output Power Tracking Peak
:SOURce:POWer:TRCKing:PEAK
Automatically adjusts the tracking of the source output with the spectrum analyzer
350 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
SOURce Subsystem
sweep so that the power is maximized for the present resolution bandwidth.
Remarks: This command is not applicable for the 1.5 GHz tracking generator.
Front Panel
Access:
Source, Tracking Peak
Chapter 5 351
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus Subsystem
STATus Subsystem
The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI-defined status-reporting structures.
Operation Condition Query
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Status Operation
Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Operation Enable
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle<integer>
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition Register will set bits in the Operation Event register, which also sets the Operation Status Summary bit (bit 7) in the Status Byte Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Preset sets all bits in this enable register to 0. To have any Operation Events reported to the Status Byte Register, 1 or more bits must be set to 1.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0
Integer, 0 to 32767
Operation Event Query
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Operation Event register.
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is cleared.
352 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
STATus Subsystem
Operation Negative Transition
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0
Integer, 0 to 32767
Operation Positive Transition
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST: 32767 (all 1’s)
Range: Integer, 0 to 32767
Preset the Status Byte
:STATus:PRESet
Sets bits in most of the enable and transition registers to their default state. It presets all the Transition Filters, Enable Registers, and the Error/Event Queue
Enable. It has no effect on Event Registers, Error/Event Queue ESE, and SRE
Registers as described in IEEE Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes,
Formats, Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI/IEEE Std
488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992.
Chapter 5 353
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
This subsection controls the SCPI-defined status-reporting structures.
Questionable Calibration Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Calibration Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Questionable Calibration Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition
Register will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register, which also sets the Calibration Summary bit (bit 8) in the Questionable Register. The variable
<integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s)
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Calibration Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Calibration Event register.
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is cleared.
354 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Calibration Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Calibration Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST: 32767 (all 1’s)
Range: Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Chapter 5 355
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Event register, which also sets the Questionable Status
Summary bit (bit3) in the Status Byte Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
The preset condition is to have all bits in this enable register set to 0. To have any
Questionable Events reported to the Status Byte Register, 1 or more bits need to be set to 1. The Status Byte Event Register should be queried after each measurement to check the Questionable Status Summary (bit 3). If it is equal to 1, a condition during the test made the test results invalid. If it is equal to 0, this indicates that no hardware problem or measurement problem was detected by the analyzer.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Event register.
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is cleared.
Questionable Frequency Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Frequency Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
356 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Frequency Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition
Register will set bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register, which also sets the Frequency Summary bit (bit 5) in the Questionable Register. The variable
<integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s)
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Frequency Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Frequency Event register.
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is cleared.
Questionable Frequency Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0
Integer, 0 to 32767
Chapter 5 357
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Frequency Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s)
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Integrity Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Questionable Integrity Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition
Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register, which also sets the Integrity Summary bit (bit 9) in the Questionable Register. The variable
<integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s)
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Integrity Event register.
358 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is cleared.
Questionable Integrity Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s)
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle
<integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:ENABle?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated
Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register, which also sets the Data Uncalibrated Summary bit (bit 3) in the
Chapter 5 359
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Integrity Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s)
Integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Integrity Uncalibrated Event register.
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is cleared.
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition
<integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated
Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity
Uncalibrated Event register when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition
<integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated
Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity
360 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Uncalibrated Event register when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s) integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Power Condition
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Power Condition register.
The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions.
Questionable Power Enable
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:ENABle?>
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition
Register will set bits in the Questionable Power Event register, which also sets the
Power Summary bit (bit 3) in the Questionable Register. The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s) integer, 0 to 32767
Chapter 5 361
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Power Event Query
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer[:EVENt]?
This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable
Power Event register.
The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register.
The data in this register is latched until it is queried. Once queried, the data is cleared.
Questionable Power Negative Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when that bit has a negative transition (1 to 0). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
0 integer, 0 to 32767
Questionable Power Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s) integer, 0 to 32767
362 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
STATus:QUEStionable Subsection
Questionable Positive Transition
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <integer>
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition?
This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when that bit has a positive transition (0 to 1). The variable <integer> is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
32767 (all 1’s) integer, 0 to 32767
Chapter 5 363
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem Subsystem
This subsystem is used to set the controls and parameters associated with the overall system communication. These functions are not related to instrument performance.
GPIB Address
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[1][:SELF]:ADDRess <integer>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[1][:SELF]:ADDRess?
Sets and queries the GPIB address.
This command applies only to analyzers having Option A4H. Only one Option
A4H can be installed in an instrument.
Factory Preset and *RST: It is set to 18 by :SYSTem:PRESet:PERSistent, which sets the persistent state values to their factory defaults.
This command is persistent. The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Integer, 0 to 30 Range:
Front Panel
Access:
System, Remote Port
Serial Port DTR Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:CONTrol:DTR OFF|ON|IBFull
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:CONTrol:DTR?
Sets the hardware pacing scheme. Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument.
Off - holds the DTR line in the unasserted (off) condition
On - holds the DTR line in the asserted (on) condition
IBFull - selects the input buffer full mode for the DTR line. The IBFull parameter sets the DTR line to indicate when the device is ready to receive.
When the number of received bytes in the input buffer of the device reaches the stop threshold, the device will unassert the DTR line. When the number of bytes has been reduced to the start threshold, the device will assert DTR indicating that it can receive input again. The device will also monitor the state of CTS and will stop transmission if the line becomes unasserted.
364 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Factory Preset
(no *RST): The factory default is On. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Serial Port RTS Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:CONTrol:RTS OFF|ON|IBFull
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:CONTrol:RTS?
Sets the hardware pacing (hand-shaking) scheme. Many high speed asynchronous modems use this line (paired with CTS) as receive/transmit pacing. Only one
Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument.
Off - indicates that the RTS line should always be asserted
On - indicates that the RTS line should always be unasserted
IBFull - selects the input buffer full mode for the RTS line. IBFull sets the RTS line to indicate when the device is ready to receive. When the number of received bytes in the input buffer of the device reaches the stop threshold, the device will unassert the RTS line. When the number of bytes has been reduced to the start threshold, the device will assert RTS indicating that it can receive input again. RTS is sometimes called RFR (ready for receiving). The device will also monitor the state of CTS and will stop transmission if that line becomes unasserted.
Factory Preset
(no *RST): The factory default is IBFull. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Serial Port Baud Rate Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1][:RECeive]:BAUD <baud_rate>
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1][:RECeive]:BAUD?
Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument.
Factory Preset
(no *RST): The factory default is 9600. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Range: Supported baud rates are
110|300|600|1200|2400|4800|9600|19200|38400|
57600|115200
Chapter 5 365
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
System, Remote Port
Serial Port Receive Pace Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1][:RECeive]:PACE XON|NONE
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1][:RECeive]:PACE?
Set the receive pace to on or none for an instrument, with the RS-232 interface installed. Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument. If no optional serial port number is specified, port 1 is assumed.
Factory Preset
(no *RST): The factory default is none. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Serial Port Transmit Pace Setup
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:TRANsmit:PACE XON|NONE
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial[1]:TRANsmit:PACE?
Set the transmit pace to on or none for an instrument, with the RS-232 interface installed. Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument. If no optional serial port number is specified, port 1 is assumed.
Factory Preset
(no *RST): The factory default is none. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Hardware Configuration Query
:SYSTem:CONFigure:HARDware?
Returns string of information about the current hardware in the instrument.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show Hardware
Display the Hardware Configuration
:SYSTem:CONFigure:HARDware:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:CONFigure:HARDware:STATe?
366 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Shows the current hardware configuration of the instrument on the display.
Factory Preset and *RST: Off
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show Hdwr
Query License Key Information
:SYSTem:CONFigure:LKEY?
Returns a comma separated list of options with their respective license keys.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Example:
Off
SYST:CONF:LKEY?
The above query could return the string:
“BAH,2488CE2109E9,1DS,7ED64A85E30F,1DR,C1DC3B
F2B4FA”
Added command with firmware revision A.14.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access:
System
,
Licensing
,
Show License
Display License Key Information
:SYSTem:CONFigure:LKEY:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:CONFigure:LKEY:STATe?
Turns on/off the display of the current license key information for instrument options.
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Added command with firmware revision A.14.00.
System
,
Licensing
,
Show License
System Configuration Query
:SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]?
Returns string of information about the configurations of the instrument.
Chapter 5 367
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
Display System Configuration
:SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]:STATe?
Shows the current system configuration of the instrument on the display.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
System, Show System
Set Date
:SYSTem:DATE <year>,<month>,<day>
:SYSTem:DATE?
Sets the date of the real-time clock of the instrument.
Year is a 4-digit integer
Month is an integer 1 to 12
Day is an integer 1 to 31 (depending on the month)
Front Panel
Access:
System, Time/Date, Set Date
Error Information Query
:SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
This command queries the earliest entry to the error queue and then deletes that entry. *CLS clears the entire error queue.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show Errors
Locate SCPI Command Errors
:SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose?
368 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Adds additional information to the error messages returned by the
:SYSTem:ERRor?
command. It indicates which SCPI command was executing when the error occurred and what about that command was unacceptable.
<error number>,”<error message>;<annotated SCPI command>”
The maximum length of the <annotated SCPI command> is 80 characters. If the error occurs in a SCPI command longer than 80 characters, the <Err> sentinel is placed at the end of the <annotated SCPI command>.
Example: First set SYST:ERR:VERBose ON
If the command SENSe:FREQuently:CENTer 942.6MHz is sent, then sending SYST:ERR? returns:
−113,”Undefined header;SENSe:FREQuently:<Err>CENTer 942.6MHz $<NL>”
The <Err> shown after FREQuently shows you the spelling error. (The $<NL> is the typical representation for the command terminator.
If the command SENSe:FREQ:CENTer 942.6Sec is sent, then sending SYST:ERR? returns:
−131,”Invalid suffix;SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 942.6Sec<Err> $<NL>”
The <Err> shown after Sec shows you the invalid suffix.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Not affected by *RST
The verbose SCPI error debugging state is global to all the SCPI interfaces.
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access: System, Show Errors, Verbose SCPI ON OFF
Host Identification Query
:SYSTem:HID?
This command returns a string that contains the host identification. This ID is required in order to obtain the license key that enables a new application or option.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
License Key – Install Application/Option
:SYSTem:LKEY <“option”>, <“license key”>
:SYSTem:LKEY? <“option”>
Chapter 5 369
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
This command enters the license key required for installing the specified new application or option. The query returns a string that contains the license key for a specified application or option that is already installed in the instrument. The license key will also be returned if the application is not currently in memory, but had been installed at some previous time.
Example:
:SYST:LKEY “BAC”, “123A456B789C”
An option is a three character string that specifies the option or application that is to be installed, as found in the Ordering Guide
(for example, BAH for GSM Measurement Personality). The option name must be enclosed in quotes.
A license key is a 12-character hexadecimal string given with the option. The license key is unique to a specific option installed in the instrument with a specific host ID, as returned by
:SYST:HID?
. The license key must be enclosed in quotes.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Licensing
Delete a License Key
:SYSTem:LKEY:DELete <“option”>
This command allows you to delete the license key from instrument memory for the selected option.
In general, deleting the license key number is not recommended. If the license key is deleted, you will be unable to reload or update the application in instrument memory without re-entering the license key. The license key works with one particular instrument host ID only.
Query Instrument Options
:SYSTem:OPTions?
Returns a list of the options that are installed.
It is a comma separated list such as: “1DS,1D6,A4H,A4J,1DN”
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
Power On Elapsed Time
:SYSTem:PON:ETIMe?
370 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Returns the number of seconds that have elapsed since the analyzer was turned on for the very first time.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Show System
Power On Time
:SYSTem:PON:TIME?
Returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since the analyzer was last turned on.
Power On Type
:SYSTem:PON:TYPE PRESet|LAST
:SYSTem:PON:TYPE?
Sets the defined instrument conditions after a power-on or
Preset
.
PRESet - The instrument settings at power-on will be either the factory preset or user preset, as set by :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE FACTory|USER.
LAST - The instrument settings at power-on will be the settings at the time of power down.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is Preset. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Power On/Preset, Power On Last Preset
Enable IF/Video/Sweep Output Ports
:SYSTem:PORTs:IFVSweep:ENABle OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:PORTs:IFVSweep:ENABle?
This command enables or disables the IF, video, and sweep output ports for analyzers having options A4J (IF, Sweep, and Video Ports) and AYX (Fast Time
Domain Sweeps).
Factory Preset and *RST:
Example:
On
:SYST:PORT:IFVS:ENAB ON
Chapter 5 371
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Range:
History:
Remarks:
On/Off
Added with firmware revision A.04.00.
Disable the output ports for faster measurement times.
Preset
:SYSTem:PRESet
Returns the instrument to a set of defined conditions. The particular set is selected by :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE. This command does not change any persistent parameters. The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
Front Panel
Access:
Preset
Persistent State Reset
:SYSTem:PRESet:PERSistent
Sets the persistent state values to their factory defaults. The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle. Examples of persistent functions are: GPIB address, power-on type, and preset type.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Restore Sys Defaults
Preset Type
:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE FACTory|USER|MODE
Selects the preset state to be either factory-defined or user-defined preset conditions.
Factory Preset and *RST: The factory default is MODE. This parameter is persistent, which means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle.
History:
Remarks:
Changed with firmware revision A.08.00. Previous firmware revisions had default type FACTory.
:SYSTem:PRESet:USER:SAVE
defines the user preset.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Power On/Preset, Preset Type
372 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
SYSTem Subsystem
Save User Preset
:SYSTem:PRESet[:USER]:SAVE
Saves the current instrument conditions as the user preset condition.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Power On/Preset, Save Type Preset
Speaker Control
:SYSTem:SPEaker[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:SYSTem:SPEaker[:STATe]?
Turns the internal speaker on or off.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Det/Demod, Demod, Speaker On Off
Set Time
:SYSTem:TIME <hour>,<minute>,<second>
:SYSTem:TIME?
Sets the time of the real-time clock of the instrument.
Hour must be an integer 0 to 23.
Minute must be an integer 0 to 59.
Second must be an integer 0 to 59.
Front Panel
Access:
System, Time/Date, Set Time
SCPI Version Query
:SYSTem:VERSion?
Returns the SCPI version number with which the instrument complies.
Chapter 5 373
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
TRACe Subsystem
TRACe Subsystem
The TRACe subsystem controls access to the internal trace memory of the analyzer.
Refer also to :CALCulate and :MMEMory subsystems for more trace and limit line commands.
Copy Trace
:TRACe:COPY <source_trace>,<dest_trace>
Transfers the source trace to the destination trace and leaves the destination trace in
VIEW mode.
Source traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Destination traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Example:
Front Panel
Access:
:TRAC:COPY TRACE2,TRACE1
View/Trace, Operations, 1 –> 3
View/Trace, Operations, 2 –> 3
Transfer Trace Data
:TRACe[:DATA] <trace_name>|RAWTRACE,<definite_length_ block>|<comma_separated_ASCII_data>
:TRACe[:DATA]? <trace_name> |RAWTRACE|LLINE1|LLINE2
This command transfers trace data from the controller to the instrument. The data format is set by the command :FORMat [:TRACe][:DATA]. If you’ve selected the ASCII data format, the data returned is comma-separated ASCII values. For
REAL, INTeger, and UINTeger data formats, a definite length block of data is returned.
The query returns the current values of the designated trace. The data is terminated with <NL><END> (for GPIB that is newline, or linefeed, followed by EOI set true; for RS-232 this is newline only.)
LLINE1
and LLINE2 can only be queried; they cannot be set.
<trace_name> is TRACE1|2|3
374 Chapter 5
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
TRACe Subsystem
This command does not allow setting all trace points to the same amplitude value by sending just a single value. If you need to set all trace points to the same value, you must send the same value to each trace point.
Rawtrace data is available with UINT,16 or INT,32 formatting. It is unitless, returns uncorrected ADC values, and is the fastest method of obtaining measurement data.
Example:
Remarks:
Suppose you are using a data format other then ASCII.
:TRAC:DATA TRACE1,#41604<binary trace data><LF–EOI>
This sends the block of data values to trace 1. The block starts with the header: #41604.
• The first digit in the header tells you there are 4 more digits in the header.
• The 1604 means 1 thousand, 6 hundred, and 4 data bytes follow the header.
• Divide this number of bytes by your current data format (4 for real,32). Then there are 401 trace points in the block.
• The line feed EOI is sent as the terminator when using GPIB.
Commands :MMEM:STOR:TRAC and :MMEM:LOAD:TRAC are used to transfer trace data to, or from, the internal hard drive or floppy drive of the instrument.
The number of points in a trace is specified by
[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts
. The trace data format is determined by :FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA], and the binary data byte order is determined by :FORMat:BORDer.
If the parameter to the query is LLINE1 or LLINE2, a very large positive or negative value is returned at any point outside the range of limit values. A large positive number is returned for an upper limit, and a large negative value for lower limits. There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1|LLINE2.
Exchange Traces
:TRACe:EXCHange <trace_1>,<trace_2>
Exchanges 2 traces, point by point and leaves both in VIEW mode.
Trace_1 choices are: TRACE1|2|3
Trace_2 choices are: TRACE1|2|3
Example:
:TRAC:EXCH TRACE3,TRACE2
Chapter 5 375
Remote Command Reference
TRACe Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Operations, 1 <–> 3
View/Trace, Operations, 2 <–> 3
Trace Math Add
:TRACe:MATH:ADD
<destination_trace>,<source_trace1>,<source_trace2>
Adds the magnitudes of the two source traces and places the result in the destination trace.
Destination traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Source traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Example:
:TRAC:MATH:ADD TRACE2,TRACE1,TRACE3
is equivalent to : (trace 2 = trace 1 + trace 3)
Mean Trace Data
:TRACe:MATH:MEAN? <trace>
Returns the mean of the amplitudes of the trace amplitude elements in measurement units.
Traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Query the Signal Peaks
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK[:DATA]?
Outputs the signal peaks by frequency or by amplitude. This command uses only trace1 data. The data is returned as alternating amplitude, frequency pairs.
The sort mode is determined by the command :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT.
The commands :CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion and
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold are used to determine what is a signal peak. To get the number of signals found meeting the specified limits, use the query :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:POINts?
Query Number of Peaks Found
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:POINts?
Outputs the number of signal peaks identified. The amplitude of the peaks can then
376 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
TRACe Subsystem
be queried with :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:DATA? This command uses only trace1 data.
Peak Sorting
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT AMPLitude|FREQuency
:TRACe:MATH:PEAK:SORT?
Determines if the signals in the :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:DATA? query are sorted by frequency or amplitude.
Amplitude sorts the identified peaks by descending amplitude.
Frequency sorts the identified peaks by increasing frequency.
Smooth Trace Data
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth <trace>
Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified in
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth:POINts. There is no equivalent front panel function.
Traces are: TRACE1|2|3, and RAWTRACE commands.
The purpose of this function is to perform a spatial video averaging as compared to the temporal version supplied by the video-average command
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE VIDeo
. The functions of :TRACe:MATH:SMOoth
<trace>
and [:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE VIDeo|POWer are not interchangeable.
Each point value is replaced with the average of the values of the selected number of points, with half of those points located on each side of any particular point
(when possible). Refer to Figure 5-2 . This figure illustrates a 401 point trace with a
smoothing number of 31. Think of the trace points as “buckets” of data. To smooth
(arbitrary) point 273, the analyzer averages buckets 258 through 287 and applies that value to point 273.
Chapter 5 377
Figure 5-2
Remote Command Reference
TRACe Subsystem
Smoothing With 401 Trace Points and 31 Smoothing Points
378
Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing resolution.
The amount of smoothing decreases at the end points. Because
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth <trace>
averages values that occur before and after the data point in time, display irregularities can be caused at the start and stop frequencies. To avoid possible irregularities (signal distortion) at the ends of the trace, use small values for the smooth parameter.
Refer to
Figure 5-2 for a discussion of this end-point smoothing
phenomena. With 31 smoothing points and a 401 point trace, point 16 will be the first point to have full 31-bucket smoothing.
Likewise, point 385 will be the last point with full 31-bucket smoothing. Under the conditions stated, points 2 through 15 will be smoothed as follows: Point 2 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through 3. Point 3 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through 5, Point 4 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through
7, and so forth until point 16 is reached. The quantity of buckets used for the smoothing running average increases at the rate of 2 buckets per point, from point 1 to point ([smoothing number/2]
+ 1), at which time the full number of smoothing points is utilized. The same characteristic occurs at the completion of the trace, beginning at point 386, when the number of averaging buckets begins to decrease until point 401 is reached.
By replacing the value of each point in a trace with the average of the values of a number of points centered about that point, any rapid variations in noise or signals are smoothed into more gradual variations. It thereby performs a function similar to reducing the video bandwidth without the corresponding changes in sweep time; as such, frequency resolution is decreased. Also, signal peaks are reduced with large smoothing
Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
TRACe Subsystem
values; and this can cause the amplitude to appear to be less than its actual value.
Number of Points for Smoothing
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth:POINts <integer>
:TRACe:MATH:SMOoth:POINts?
Specifies the number of points that will be smoothed in :TRACe:MATH:SMOoth.
See that command for an explanation of how smoothing is performed.
Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing resolution. If the number of points is an even number, then the number of points is increased by one. If the number of points is larger than the number of sweep points, then the number of sweep points is used, unless the number of sweep points is even, in which case the number of points will be the sweep points minus one.
The number of points smoothed is always an odd number.
Range: Integer, 3 to current number of sweep points
Trace Math Subtract
:TRACe:MATH:SUBTract
<destination_trace>,<source_trace1>,<source_trace2>
Subtracts the magnitude of the two source traces (trace 1
− trace 2) and places the result in the destination trace.
Destination traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Source traces are: TRACE1|2|3
Example:
:TRAC:MATH:SUBT TRACE3,TRACE3,TRACE2
is equivalent to: (trace 3 = trace 3
− trace 2)
Trace Math Subtract From Display Line
:TRACe:MATH:SUBTract:DLINe <trace>
Subtracts the magnitude of the display line from the selected trace and places the result back in the selected trace.
Trace is: TRACE1|2|3
Example:
:TRAC:MATH:SUBT:DLIN TRACE1
is equivalent to: (trace1 = trace 1
− display line)
Chapter 5 379
Remote Command Reference
TRACe Subsystem
Front Panel
Access:
View/Trace, Operations, 2 – DL –> 2
Select Trace Display Mode
:TRACe1|2|3:MODE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold|VIEW|BLANk
:TRACe1|2|3:MODE?
Selects the display mode for the selected trace.
Write puts the trace in the normal mode, updating the data.
Maximum hold displays the highest measured trace value for all the data that has been measured since the function was turned on.
Minimum hold displays the lowest measured trace value for all the data that has been measured since the function was turned on.
View turns on the trace data so that it can be viewed on the display.
Blank turns off the trace data so that it is not viewed on the display.
Front Panel
Access:. functions are affected:
• All trace data is erased
• Any traces in view mode will go to blank mode
View/Trace, Clear Write
View/Trace, Max Hold
View/Trace, Min Hold
View/Trace, View
View/Trace, Blank
View/Trace, Normalize, Ref Trace View Blank
380 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
TRIGger Subsystem
The TRIGger subsystem is used to set the controls and parameters associated with triggering the data acquisitions. Other trigger-related commands are found in the
INITiate and ABORt subsystems.
External Trigger, Line, and TV Trigger Delay Value
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay <delay>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay?
This command sets the amount of trigger delay when using the rear panel external trigger input, the front panel input with TV trigger, or the line trigger.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
1
µs
0.3
µs to 429 seconds
Default Unit: seconds
External Trigger, Line, and TV Trigger Delay Enable
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:DELay:STATe?
This command allows you to turn on or off a delay, during which the analyzer will wait to begin a sweep after receiving an external trigger signal, a front panel TV trigger, or a line trigger.
Factory Preset and *RST: Off
Default Unit: seconds
Remarks: Free-run activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep. This function is not available when Gate is on.
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, Trig Delay On Off
External Trigger Slope
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal[1]:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal[1]:SLOPe?
Chapter 5 381
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
This command activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start when the external voltage (connected to
GATE TRIG/EXT TRIG IN
on the rear panel) passes through approximately 1.5 volts. The external trigger signal must be a 0 V to +5 V TTL signal. This function only controls the trigger polarity (for positive or negative-going signals).
Factory Preset and *RST:
Front Panel
Access:
Positive
Trig, External Pos Neg
Trigger Offset
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet <time>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet?
This command sets the trigger offset.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Example:
Range:
0 seconds
:TRIG:SEQ:OFFS 1.0s
Hardware specific; dependent upon the ADC being used, current state, and the number of sweep points.
Default Unit: seconds
Remarks: Trigger offset refers to the specified time interval before or after the trigger event from which data is to be written to the trace, and then displayed. Ordinarily, the trigger offset value is zero, and trace data is displayed beginning at the trigger event. A negative trigger offset value results in the display of trace data prior to the trigger event. A positive trigger offset value results in an effective delay in the display of trace data after the trigger event.
The trigger offset value used when the feature is enable will depend on the following parameters:
• Normal trigger offset value originally entered
• Specific instrument hardware in use
• Sweep time
• Number of sweep points
The effective trigger offset value will be re-calculated whenever any of these parameters change.
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, Trig Offset
382 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
Trigger Offset
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet:STATe OFF|ON|0|1
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:OFFSet:STATe?
Turns the trigger offset on and off.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Example:
Off
:TRIG:OFFS:STAT ON
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, Trig Offset
RF Burst Frequency Selectivity
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:FSELectivity[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:FSELectivity?
The RF burst circuit can sample the 21.4 MHz IF either before or after RBW filtering. When frequency selectivity is On, the RBW-filtered IF signal is used, increasing the frequency selectivity.
This command is available only when Option B7E (RF Communications
Hardware) is installed.
Factory Preset and *RST: Off
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, More 1 of 2, RF Burst Setup, Frequency Selectivity
RF Burst Absolute Mode Setting
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:ABSolute <ampl>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:ABSolute?
Select the trigger level of the RF burst envelope signal. The value can be set to an absolute level, with the units displayed in the current y-axis units.
This command is available only when Option B7E (RF Communications
Hardware) is installed.
Factory Preset and *RST:
0 dBm
Chapter 5 383
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
Range:
−100 dBm to 100 dBm
Default Unit: dBm
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, More 1 of 2, RF Burst Setup
RF Burst Relative Mode Setting
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:RELative <rel_ampl>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:RELative?
Set the trigger level when using the RF burst (wideband) trigger. The value is relative to the peak of the burst. RF burst is also known as RF envelope.
This command is available only when Option B7E (RF Communications
Hardware) is installed.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
−6 dB
−45 dB to 0 dB
Default Unit: dB
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, More 1 of 2, RF Burst Setup
RF Burst Mode Setting
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:TYPE ABSolute|RELative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:LEVel:TYPE?
Select the trigger level of the RF burst envelope signal. The level can be set to either a level relative to the peak of the burst (RELative mode) or to an absolute level (ABSolute mode).
This command is available only when Option B7E (RF Communications
Hardware) is installed.
Factory Preset and *RST: Relative
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Trig, More 1 of 2, RF Burst Setup
384 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
RF Burst Narrow Pulse Discriminator
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:NPDiscrim[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:RFBurst:NPDiscrim?
The narrow pulse discriminator prevents undesirable re-triggering on multiple peaks when the RF envelope has significant ripple.
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
Off
Added with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, More 1 of 2, RF Burst Setup, Narrow Pulse
Discriminator
Trigger Source
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
IMMediate|VIDeo|LINE|EXTernal|RFBurst|TV
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?
Specifies the source (or type) of triggering used to start a measurement.
Immediate is free-run triggering
Video triggers on the video signal level
Line triggers on the power line signal
External allows you to connect an external trigger source
RF Burst triggers on the bursted frame
TV triggers on the selected line of a TV frame
Factory Preset and *RST:
Remarks:
Immediate (free-run triggering)
Free-run activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep.
History: Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A.03.00.
Added RF Burst mode for analyzers having Option B7E (RF
Communications Hardware), with firmware revision A.08.00.
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, Free Run
Chapter 5 385
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
Trig, Video
Trig, Line
Trig, External Pos Neg
Trig, TV
Trig, RF Burst
Trigger Delay is not available in Free Run, so turning Free Run on turns off Trigger
Delay, but preserves the value of Trigger Delay.
Set TV Field Mode
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:FMODe ENTire|ODD|EVEN
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:FMODe?
This command allows the user to determine how the fields of the TV picture signal will be treated by the trigger system. Requires Option BAA and B7B.
Factory Preset and *RST: ENTire (entire frame)
Range:
ENTire (entire frame)
For formats NTSC-M, NTSC-Japan, and PAL-M, the minimum line is 1, and the maximum line is 525.
For formats PAL-B, D, G, H, I, PAL-N, PAL-N Combin, and
SECAM-L, the minimum line is 1, and the maximum line is
625.
ODD (Field 1)
For formats NTSC-M, NTSC-Japan, and PAL-M, the minimum line is 1, and the maximum line is 263.
For formats PAL-B, D, G, H, I, PAL-N, PAL-N Combin, and
SECAM-L, the minimum line is 1, and the maximum line is
313.
EVEN (Field 2)
For formats NTSC-M, NTSC-Japan, and PAL-M, the minimum line is 1, and the maximum line is 262.
For formats PAL-B, D, G, H, I, PAL-N, PAL-N Combin, and
SECAM-L, the minimum line is 1, and the maximum line is
312.
Refer to
for a more detailed explanation of TV fields and command dependencies.
386 Chapter 5
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A.03.00.
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Field, Entire Frame
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Field, Field One
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Field, Field Two
Set TV Line Number for Synchronization
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:LINE <line>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:LINE?
This command allows you to set the TV line number to which the analyzer will synchronize its sweep. Requires Option BAA and B7B.
Factory Preset and *RST: 17
Range:
History:
Remarks:
The range is dependent upon the Field Mode, as described in the command :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:FMODe
ENTire|ODD|EVEN
: The minimum value is the minimum line, and rolls over to the maximum value. The maximum value is the maximum line, and rolls over to the minimum value.
Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A.03.00.
Refer to the command :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TV, which is used to activate TV triggering.
Set Analyzer for TV Picture Monitoring
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:MONitor OFF|ON|0|1
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:MONitor?
The currently-selected standard is used to determine the proper setup of the hardware state of the video digitization circuitry for presentation of the TV picture.
Requires Option BAA and B7B.
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
Off
Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A.03.00.
Trig, TV Trig Setup, TV Monitor
Chapter 5 387
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
Set the Video Waveform Sync. Pulse Direction
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:SLOPe POSitive|NEGative
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:SLOPe?
This command defines the direction of the sync pulse on the TV video waveform.
Normal baseband video has sync pulses on the bottom of the waveform (use the
NEG
parameter for more negative voltage). However, when the analyzer is used to demodulate an NTSC or PAL TV RF carrier, the detected video waveform is
“upside down” with sync pulses on the top of the waveform (use the
POS
parameter for more positive voltage). When the analyzer is used to demodulate a
SECAM TV RF carrier, the detected video waveform has normal polarity (use the
NEG
parameter).
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
POSitive
Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A.03.00.
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Sync Pos Neg
Select TV Signal Path
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:SOURce SANalyzer|EXTernal
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:SOURce?
This command is used to select between the internal spectrum analyzer signal path
(the detected video is fed to the TV trigger), or the EXT VIDEO IN connector on the analyzer rear panel. Requires Option BAA and B7B.
Factory Preset and *RST:
History:
Front Panel
Access:
SANalyzer
Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A.03.00.
Trig, TV Trig Setup, TV Source, SA
Trig, TV Trig Setup, TV Source, EXT Video In
Select TV Standard
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:STANdard
MNTSc|JNTSc|MPAL|BPAL|NPAL|CPAL|LSEC
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:TV:STANdard?
388 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
This command allows you to choose one of the various TV standards. Requires
Option BAA and B7B.
As the TV standard is changed, the current line value is clipped as necessary to keep it valid for the chosen standard and field mode. For example, line 600 is selected in Entire Frame mode in PAL-N; if NTSC-M is selected, the line number is clipped to 525. Or, if line 313 is selected in Field 1 mode in PAL-N and
NTSC-M is selected, the line number is clipped to 263. Changing back to the
PAL-N standard will leave the line number at 263.
Factory Preset and *RST: NTSC-M
Example:
History:
Remarks:
:TRIG:SEQ:TV:STAN MNTS
Added TV trigger mode with firmware revision A.03.00.
Once this function is defined, the selected type is persistent.
Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected, even through a power cycle. The setting will change with “Load
State.”
Front Panel
Access: Trig, TV Trig Setup, Standard, NTSC-M
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Standard, NTSC-Japan
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Standard, PAL-M
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Standard, PAL-B,D,G,H,I
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Standard, PAL-N
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Standard, PAL-N Combin
Trig, TV Trig Setup, Standard, SECAM-L
Video Trigger Level Amplitude
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <ampl>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel?
Specifies the level at which a video trigger will occur.
Factory Preset and *RST:
Range:
2.5 divisions below reference level
10 display divisions below reference level to reference level
Default Unit: current amplitude units
Remarks: Video is adjusted using this command, but must also be selected using the command :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
VIDeo
. When in FM Demod and Demod View is on, the Video
Trigger level is adjusted/queried using the command
Chapter 5 389
NOTE
NOTE
Remote Command Reference
TRIGger Subsystem
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency
<freq>
.
Trigger Delay is not available in Video trigger mode, so turning Video on turns off
Trigger Delay, but preserves the value of Trigger Delay.
Front Panel
Access:
Trig, Video
Video Trigger Level Frequency
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency
<freq>
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel:FREQuency?
This command is used to adjust the Video Trigger level when in FM Demod, and
Demod View is on.
Default Unit: Hz
Remarks: Video is adjusted using this command, but must also be selected using the command :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce
VIDeo
. When not in FM Demod, the Video Trigger level is adjusted/queried using the command
:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:VIDeo:LEVel <ampl>
.
Trigger Delay is not available in Video trigger mode, so turning Video on turns off
Trigger Delay, but preserves the value of Trigger Delay.
390 Chapter 5
Remote Command Reference
UNIT Subsystem
UNIT Subsystem
Select Power Units of Measure
:UNIT:POWer DBM|DBMV|DBUV|DBUA|V|W|A
:UNIT:POWer?
Specifies amplitude units for the input, output and display.
Factory Preset and *RST: dBm in log amplitude scale volts in linear amplitude scale
History: Ampere and decibel microampere units are available only with instruments having firmware revision A.06.00 and later.
Front Panel
Access:
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, dBm
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, dBmV
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, dB
µV
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, Volts
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, Watts
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, Amps
AMPLITUDE/Y Scale, Amptd Units, dB
µA
Chapter 5 391
Remote Command Reference
UNIT Subsystem
392 Chapter 5
6
Menu Maps
This chapter provides a visual representation of the front panel keys and their associated menu keys (in
Spectrum Analysis
mode). Refer to
Chapter 2 , “Front-Panel Key Reference,” on page 39
for key function descriptions. See Volume 2 for the menu maps of the one-button power measurements (
MEASURE
key) and their associated setup keys.
393
Menu Maps
What You Will Find in This Chapter
Alpha Editor Menus
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Auto Couple
BW/Avg
Det/Demod
Display
File
Freq Count
FREQUENCY Channel
Input/Output
Marker
Marker
→
Mode
Peak Search
Preset
Print Setup
Source
SPAN X Scale
Sweep
System
Trace/View
Trig
What You Will Find in This Chapter
This chapter provides menu maps for all front-panel keys except those associated with the measurements available when you press the front-panel
MEASURE
key. (Refer to Volume 2 for the one-button power measurement key menus.)
The Alpha Editor Menu is shown separately, though it is accessed when entering data for many keys. The front-panel key menus appear in alphabetical order as follows:
,
394 Chapter 6
Alpha Editor Menu
Menu Maps
Alpha Editor Menu
Chapter 6 395
Menu Maps
AMPLITUDE Y Scale Menu
AMPLITUDE Y Scale Menu
396 Chapter 6
Menu Maps
Amplitude Y Scale: Corrections Menu
Amplitude Y Scale: Corrections Menu
Chapter 6 397
Menu Maps
Auto Couple Menu
Auto Couple Menu
398 Chapter 6
BW/Avg Menu
Menu Maps
BW/Avg Menu
Chapter 6 399
Menu Maps
Det/Demod Menu
Det/Demod Menu
400 Chapter 6
Display Menu
Menu Maps
Display Menu
Chapter 6 401
Menu Maps
File Menus (1 of 3)
File Menus (1 of 3)
402 Chapter 6
File Menus (2 of 3)
Menu Maps
File Menus (2 of 3)
Chapter 6 403
Menu Maps
File Menus (3 of 3)
File Menus (3 of 3)
404 Chapter 6
Freq Count (Marker) Menu
Menu Maps
Freq Count (Marker) Menu
Chapter 6 405
Menu Maps
FREQUENCY Channel Menu
FREQUENCY Channel Menu
406 Chapter 6
Input/Output Menu
Menu Maps
Input/Output Menu
Chapter 6 407
Menu Maps
Marker Menu
Marker Menu
408 Chapter 6
Marker
→ Menu
Menu Maps
Marker
→ Menu
Chapter 6 409
Menu Maps
Peak Search Menu
Peak Search Menu
410 Chapter 6
Preset Menu
Menu Maps
Preset Menu
Chapter 6 411
Menu Maps
Print Setup Menu
Print Setup Menu
412 Chapter 6
Source Menu
Menu Maps
Source Menu
Chapter 6 413
Menu Maps
SPAN (X Scale) Menu
SPAN (X Scale) Menu
414 Chapter 6
Sweep Menu
Menu Maps
Sweep Menu
Chapter 6 415
Menu Maps
System Menu
System Menu
416 Chapter 6
Trace/View Menu
Menu Maps
Trace/View Menu
Chapter 6 417
Menu Maps
Trig Menu
Trig Menu
418 Chapter 6
Index
Symbols
(Local) key
,
*CLS command
*ESE command
*SRE command
*STB? command
*TST? query
< Display Line key
,
Numerics
3 dB bandwidth command
,
A
abort command
ac input coupling command
,
adjusting the display
,
Align Now
alignment all assemblies
commands
FM demodulation assembly
load default values
Alignments key
All but RF
,
Alpha Editor menu map
AM demodulation
on/off
AM, activate AM demodulation
,
amplitude correction data, merging data, setting
,
deleting
,
external amplifier
set, deleting
,
set, turning on/off
,
setting interpolation turning on/off
,
maximizing input signal
scaling
,
Amplitude (Display Edit menu)
,
amplitude corrections
Antenna key
,
Other key
Amplitude Corrections menu map
amplitude interpolation
Amplitude key
amplitude correction point, for other than antenna or cable
,
antenna corrections point
,
cable amplitude corrections
Amplitude menu map
Amplitude On Off
,
amplitude scale
amplitude units
,
AMPLITUDE Y Scale menu
amplitude-correction factors
,
Amptd Interp Log Lin
,
Amptd Offset
,
Amptd Ref (f=50 MHz) On Off
,
Amptd Ref Out (f=50 MHz) On
Off
,
Amptd Step Auto Man
annotation display
,
Annotation On Off
,
Antenna
Correction On Off key
,
antenna amplitude corrections
Edit key
antenna corrections point
Amplitude key
applications currently available
,
selecting
applications, selecting
,
arrow keys
,
ASCII data format
assemblies, aligning all
attenuation input, resetting protection
setting
,
tracking generator
tracking generator, auto on/off
,
Attenuation Auto Man
Attenuation Auto Man key
attenuator tracking generator
Auto Align
Auto Couple
Auto Couple menu map
Auto key
,
auto-range the EMI detector
,
auto-ranging dwell time
autoranging function control of
,
Average On Off
,
Average Type Auto Man
,
Averaging power averaging (RMS)
,
RMS
video averaging
,
averaging number of averages
on/off automatic
,
averaging
,
restart
,
smoothing trace data
,
type, setting
,
B
background alignment
backspace key
band markers
,
set start frequency
set stop frequency
,
start frequency
stop frequency
,
Band Pair Start Stop
Band Power
bandpower marker
bandwidth measurement command
,
measurement command, NdB results
NdB points
,
resolution BW couple to video BW
setting
,
resolution BW automatic on/off
,
video BW auto on/off
ratio to resolution BW
ratio, auto/manual values
,
,
bandwidth ratio video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth
baud rate
RS-232 bus
,
serial bus receive
binary data order
,
Blank
blanking the trace
,
Bluetooth
FM Demodulation
,
book, using
,
brightness, display angle burst trigger level
RF
,
RF absolute
,
RF burst relative
RF narrow pulse discriminator
,
bus configuration
BW/Avg
BW/Avg front-panel key
BW/Avg menu map
,
byte order of data
,
C
Cable
Index 419
Index
Correction On Off key
,
Edit key
cable amplitude
Delete Correction key
,
cable amplitude correction
Frequency key
,
cable amplitude corrections
Amplitude key
Delete Point key
,
Point key
,
Cable key amplitude corrections
CALCulate subsystem commands
,
calibration align all assemblies
align now
automatic
automatic mode
command introduction
corrections on/off
,
defaults
,
frequency reference adjustment
,
frequency reference query
IEEE command
reference on/off
RF
tracking generator
catalog memory/disk
,
Center Freq
,
center frequency
,
setting
,
step size
,
CF Step Auto Man
,
CF step size
,
Change Title
,
Clear Error Queue
,
clear status, IEEE command
Clear Title
Clear Write
,
clock setup
,
CLS command, description
,
Color Capable Yes No
Color On Off
Color Palette
,
color printing
,
colors, reversing the display
,
command parameters
,
commands
Contents
condition register, definition
configuration basic spectrum analyzer state
Connected To Previous Pt Yes No
,
Continuous Pk On Off continuous sweep
,
continuous vs. single measurement mode
,
control measurement commands
,
controller (GPIB)
copy trace 1 into 3
copy trace 2 into 3
copy trace command
correction amplitude deleting
,
deleting correction set merging data on/off
,
,
,
setting correction set
setting data
turning set on/off
constant default
external amplifier
,
impedance mismatch
internal tracking generator
,
set (amplitude), deleting set (amplitude), setting
,
correction factors
Correction On Off key cable
,
other than antenna or cable, for
,
Corrections key
Corrections On Off key
,
corrections other than antenna or cable
Edit key
,
corrections table, loading from file
,
corrections table, storing
coupled sweep time
,
Coupling AC DC
coupling, ac/dc
,
coupling, none (manual)/all
(automatic)
,
Custom key
custom printer
,
D
data exchange trace
format, numeric
,
limit line, merging
mean of trace
,
merging segmented sweep
moving to file
,
testing against limit line
trace, normalize
,
transferring trace
,
date display format
display on/off
,
setting
,
date display
,
Datemode MDY DMY
dc input coupling command
,
defaults, preset
,
Define Custom
,
delay time demodulation
,
gate trigger to open
,
Delete (Display Edit menu)
Delete Correction key
antenna amplitude corrections
,
cable amplitude corrections, edit
,
other amplitude corrections, edit
,
Delete Point (Display Edit menu)
,
Delete Point key
amplitude correction point, for other than antenna or cable
,
antenna amplitude corrections
,
cable amplitude corrections
,
Delta
delta markers
,
Demod View
vertical scale
demodulation
AM
,
Bluetooth FM
displaying signal
,
FM
on/off
,
squelch
,
time
,
type, AM/FM
,
Det/Demod menu map
,
detection type, auto on/off
,
detection type selecting
detector
EMI auto range
diagnostic commands
,
Diagnostics
digital resolution bandwidths
,
directories creating
,
deleting
,
420 Index
Index
of memory/disk
,
display angle
,
annotation on/off
auto ranging on/off
commands
date format
,
date on/off
display line amplitude
,
display line on/off
full screen on/off
graticule on/off
,
hardware configuration
,
intensity (angle)
license key information
,
number printed per page
,
on/off
reference level
,
reference level offset
reference level, normalized
,
reference level, position
,
scaling
,
scaling, vertical axis
system configuration
,
time format
,
time on/off
title
,
trace
units
Display key
,
Display Line menukeys
< Display Line
,
> Display Line
,
Display Line On Off
display line, subtraction from trace
Display menu map
display range
,
display, reversing the color
,
documentation, using
DTR for serial bus
dwell time
,
E
Edge Pos Neg
Edge Setup
Edit
Edit key
antenna amplitude corrections
,
cable amplitude corrections
corrections other than antenna or cable, for
,
Eject Page
EMI detection type, selecting
,
EMI detector auto range
,
dwell time
,
gain setting
,
EMI Res BW
120 kHz, 9kHz and 200 Hz
Enter key
,
Entire Frame key
,
errors data transfer, R-S232
locate SCPI
monitoring
querying
,
Esc key
,
Escape
,
ESE command, description
event enable register, definition
,
event register, definition
,
event status enable
enable and read byte
,
register, query and clear
,
exchange trace 1 and 2
,
exchange trace 2 and 3
,
Ext Amp Gain
,
Ext Mix Band key
,
external mixer, selecting
External Pos Neg
External preamplifier
external trigger
delay on/off
delay value
,
slope
F
factory defaults
factory preset
,
Field key
,
Field One key
,
Field Two key
,
File
File menu map
files copy
correction table, loading
,
correction table, storing
,
deleting
,
instrument state, loading
instrument state, storing
limit line, storing
limit lines, loading
listing
measurement results, storing
,
moving data
,
screen image, storing
trace, loading from file
,
trace, storing
,
fixed, limit line type
FM demodulation type
deviation
,
FM Demodulation
Bluetooth
scale/division
FM demodulation on/off
,
FM demodulation squelch
FM, activate FM demodulation
,
form feed printer
format date
format, data
Free Run
,
,
Freq Correct On Off
,
Freq Count
,
Freq Count menu map
,
Freq Interp Log Lin
,
Freq Offset
frequency center
,
domain type
optimization, phase noise
,
phase noise auto/manual
reference adjustment, coarse
adjustment, fine calibration on/off
,
scaling
,
selectivity trigger
,
span full
,
marker type
previous value
,
start
step size
stop
,
Frequency (Display Edit menu)
,
Frequency (Marker Readout menu)
,
FREQUENCY Channel
FREQUENCY Channel menu map
frequency correction
frequency interpolation
Frequency key
,
,
amplitude correction point, for other than antenna or cable
,
antenna amplitude corrections
,
cable amplitude correction point
,
Index 421
Index
frequency offset
,
frequency span changing to full span
,
front-panel key
Meas Setup
,
MODE
,
Mode Setup
,
Restart
front-panel keys
MEASURE
,
Full Screen
,
Full Span
Function
,
G
gain setting, quasi peak
Gate Delay
,
Gate Length
gate trigger delay, trigger to open
,
edge/level
,
length (EDGE triggering)
,
level
,
level (level triggering)
,
on/off
,
polarity (EDGE triggering)
,
preset (EDGE triggering)
GPIB address
,
command statements
,
instrument types
,
overview
,
graticule display
Graticule On Off
H
handshake, RS-232 bus
,
hardcopy output
hardware configuration query
,
hardware configuration, display
,
Harmonic Auto Man key
Help key
,
,
highest peak finding next
host identification query
,
I
identification of host
identification query
,
IEEE commands
*ESR?
*IDN?
*SAV
,
common commands
IEEE common commands
,
IF Gain
IF Gain Auto Fixed key
IF sweep output on/off
image file type
Image Shift key
,
Image Suppress key
impedance mismatch correction
,
initiate measurement
,
input attenuation
configuration
coupling command
,
power, maximizing
,
signal, measuring
,
input attenuation
input attenuation control
,
input impedance
,
Input key
Input Mixer Int Ext key
,
Input Mixer key
,
Input Z Corr
,
Input/Output key
Input/Output menu map
instrument
GPIB type
preset
,
reset
,
state, loading from file
,
state, storing
status, monitoring
Int Preamp On Off key
,
intensity, display angle
,
internal mixer, selecting
internal preamplifier
generator
Inverse Time (Marker Readout menu)
,
IP, instrument preset
,
L
landscape printing
Language PCL3 PCL5
Language Reference
Last Span
Level Setup
,
license key information, display
,
license key, deleting
license key, entering
licensing
,
limit lines adding values
,
amplitude interpolation
,
correction sets, delete all
,
define values
,
deleting
,
displaying
fixed and relative
,
fixed/relative
,
frequency interpolation
,
from memory
margin size, setting
,
margin, displaying
,
maximum test
,
on/off
,
storing
testing
,
testing data
type upper/lower
,
x-axis units
Limits
,
LIMITS FIX REL
Limits Fixed Rel
Line
line trigger
,
linear scale
Amplitude Y Scale
linear scaling
listener (GPIB)
LO harmonic value
,
Load
,
Load Defaults
,
load limits
load setup files
,
load states
load traces
,
log scale
,
Amplitude Y Scale
logarithmic scaling
LRN, IEEE command
,
M
Man Track Adj
manual, using
Margin On Off
,
Marker
,
marker selection
,
trace selection
Marker -> menu map
Marker All Off
marker control keys
marker counter
resolution
Marker Counter On Off
Marker delta to span
Marker menu map
,
Marker Noise
,
marker noise
Marker Noise On Off
marker readout
422 Index
Index
Marker Table On Off
,
marker to center frequency
,
Marker to center frequency step
,
marker to reference level
,
Marker to start
Marker to stop
,
Marker Trace Auto A B C marker tracking
,
,
markers all off
bandpower/noise/off
band-type set start frequency set stop frequency
,
start frequency stop frequency
,
center frequency
,
commands
continuous peaking on/off
,
delta
frequency span
start
,
step size stop
,
frequency counter automatic resolution on/off
,
on/off
,
query
resolution
marker table on/off
NdB bandwidth command
on/off
peak search define left
,
minimum
next
,
perform
right
peak, definition of
,
peak, threshold
,
peak-to-peak
,
reference level
,
span pair
,
span-type, set values
,
trace assignment
trace assignment, auto
tracking signal
,
type
,
x-axis location
,
x-axis readout
,
y-axis query
Max Hold
max hold trace
,
Max Mixer Lvl
maximum power to mixer
mean of trace data
Meas Control
,
Meas Setup front-panel key
,
Meas Tools
,
Measure Cont Single
,
MEASURE front-panel key
measurement bandwidth command
commands
,
control of
,
increasing speed
input signal
,
pause
,
restart
results, storing
,
resume
single/continuous
trigger
measurement modes currently available
,
selecting
measurement speed increase
menu map
Alpha Editor
Amplitude
Amplitude Y Scale Corrections
,
Auto Couple menu
,
BW/Avg
Det/Demod
Display
File
,
Freq Count
,
FREQUENCY Channel
Input/Output
Marker
Marker ->
,
Peak Search
Preset
Print Setup
Source
,
SPAN X Scale
,
Sweep
,
System
Trace/View
Trig
Min Hold
,
min hold trace
Min Search
,
minimum to marker
,
mixer external, band, selecting
external, bias, adjusting
external, bias, turning on/off
,
external, LO harmonic mode on/off
,
external, LO harmonic, setting
,
internal/external
maximum input power
type, preselected/unselected
,
Mixer Bias On Off key
Mixer Config key
,
Mixer Type Presel Unpre key
MODE front-panel key
Mode Setup front-panel key
,
modes, external mixer LO harmonic, on/off
,
monitoring errors monitoring status
,
,
N
N db Points On Off
,
NdB bandwidth command
NdB command
,
,
NdBstate command
,
negative peak detection
negative transition register, definition
Next Peak
,
Next Pk Left
,
Next Pk Right
,
,
Next Window noise level
,
noise marker
,
None key
,
Norm Ref Lvl
Norm Ref Posn
Normal key
,
,
normal marker
Normalize
Normalize On Off
normalize on/off
,
normalized reference| level position
O
offsets trigger
,
OPC command, description
operation complete command,
IEEE command
,
operation event query
Operations key
Optimize LO phase noise
option license key information
,
Index 423
Index
options query
,
options, IEEE command
Orientation
,
Other key other amplitude corrections
,
output screen data
,
outputs configuration
,
on/off
IF sweep
sweep
,
tracking generator
,
video
,
overall status register system, diagram
,
P
PACE for serial bus receive
PACE for serial bus transmit
page orientation (printing)
Page Size
parameters in commands
pass/fail limit line test
Pause
,
pause
peak next
,
Peak Excursn
,
Peak Readout
,
Peak Search
,
Marker Search
menu map
,
peak search define
,
left
minimum
next
,
peak threshold
,
perform
right
Peak Sort Freq Ampl
,
Peak Table
Peak Table On Off
,
Peak Threshold
peak to peak measurement
,
peaks list of
number of points
sorting
Period (Marker Readout menu)
,
persistent state values, preset to default
,
personalities currently available
,
selecting
phase noise auto/manual
phase noise optimization
Pk-Pk Search
,
Point (Display Edit menu)
Point key
,
antenna amplitude corrections, edit
cable amplitude corrections
correction data for other than antenna or cable
polling method, accessing status register
portrait printing
positive peak detection
positive transition register, definition
power tracking
tracking generator
,
tracking generator, fixed/swept
,
tracking, peak
,
units
Power Average (RMS)
Power On Last Preset
,
Power On/Preset
,
power sweep tracking generator on/off
,
range
start amplitude
step auto on/off
step size
,
Power Sweep On Off
power-on conditions, preset/last
,
time (milliseconds)
,
time (seconds)
,
power-on state of spectrum analyzer
,
preamplifier gain
preamplifier on/off
Preferences
Presel Adjust key
Presel Center key
,
preselector adjustment
,
preselector centering
preselector peaking
Preset menu map
preset
customized
,
to factory defaults
type at power-on
type, factory/user
,
Print key
,
Print Setup
Print Setup menu map
,
Printer Type
printer type
,
printing
abort
color
commands
,
form feed
page orientation
,
page size
print now
printer type
prints per page
Prints/Page 1 2
,
programmer’s reference, using
programming commands creating valid
multiple commands on one line
,
notation syntax
parameters
separator syntax
,
special characters
terminations
programming errors, debug information
Q
quasi peak gain
quasi-peak detection
queries frequency reference
hardware configuration
,
host identification
,
identification
,
marker frequency counter
,
marker y-axis
operation event
,
peaks frequency/amplitude
,
number of
,
sort, frequency/amplitude
SCPI version
standard event status register
,
state
sweep segments
,
system configuration, instrument
system options
questionable condition registers
,
questionable condition registers/queries quit command
,
424 Index
Index
R
range dwell time
ratio video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth
Readout
real number data format
,
real-time clock set date
set time
recall, IEEE command
Ref Level key
AMPLITUDE Y Scale
Ref Lvl Offst key
reference calibration control
level normalized
offset
position, normalized
y-axis amplitude reference level
,
reference level offset
,
registers event enable, definition
,
event, definition
,
negative transition, definition
,
positive transition, definition
,
questionable condition
service request enable, description
,
status byte, description
,
relative, limit line type
Remote Port
Rename
,
rename correction files
rename limits
,
rename screen files
rename setup files
rename states
,
rename traces
Res BW Auto Man
,
reset, IEEE command
Resolution Auto Man
,
,
resolution bandwidth automatic on/off
,
,
ratio auto/manual
,
ratio to video BW
,
value
,
resolution of marker counter
,
Restart
Restart front-panel key
Restart key
,
Restore Sys Defaults
Return key
,
reverse the display color
,
RF alignment on/off
calibration
,
overload reset
RF burst absolute trigger level
narrow pulse discriminator trigger
,
relative trigger level
,
trigger level
RS-232 bus baud rate
,
character format parameters
,
data transfer errors
handshake
,
modem handshaking
,
overview
,
serial interface settings
,
RTS for serial bus
,
S
sample detection
Save
,
save command
,
Save key
,
save limits
,
save screen image file type
save setup files
save states
,
save traces
Scale Type Log Lin
Y-axis
scale type, linear/logarithmic
Scale/Div
Bluetooth FM Demodulation
FM Demod
,
Scale/Div key
scaling
,
SCPI command subsystems, locating
,
errors during execution
,
errors, locating
version query
screen annotation on or off
screen data output
,
screen graticule
screen image, storing
,
screen title
screen, reversing the color
Search Criteria
Segmented sweep
,
,
segmented sweep changes in segment order
deleting all data
,
deleting some data
,
displaying the trace
,
editor
,
interaction with other analyzer functions
merging data
on/off
query number of segments
,
segment parameters
,
Select Marker 1 2 3 4
,
selecting
EMI detection type
instrument modes
,
modes
self-test query
,
separator syntax
,
serial bus
DTR
receive baud
receive PACE
,
RTS
transmit PACE
,
serial bus overview
serial interface settings
Service key
,
service key access
,
,
service request accessing status register, method
enable register
generating
IEEE command
,
using
service request enable register bit descriptions
description
Set Date
,
set display background
set screen image file type
Set Time
Show Errors show errors
,
,
Show Hdwr
,
Show System
Signal ID Mode key
,
Signal Ident On Off key
signal peaks number of
,
query
,
sorting
,
Signal Track On Off signal tracking
,
signals demodulated, displaying
,
identification mode
identification, on/off
Index 425
Index
tracking
,
Single Sweep
single sweep
,
single vs. continuous measurement mode
Source
source calibration, internal
,
internal tracking generator commands
Source menu map
source power
Span
,
span full
,
full scale
last
,
marker type
markers values
,
to previous
value
zero
span functions
Span Pair Span Center
,
SPAN X Scale
SPAN X Scale menu map
Span Zoom
speaker, on/off
,
special characters in commands
,
Spectrum Analysis key
,
spectrum analyzer state recalled
,
spectrum analyzer state, configuring
squelch
SRE command, description
SRQ command
,
SRQ, using
standard event status byte, enable and read
,
status event enable register, description
status register query
,
status register, description
Standard key
Standby key
,
start and stop frequencies
,
Start Freq
start frequency
start measurement
,
state of spectrum analyzer at power on
,
states, setting amplitude correction
,
amplitude correction set
automatic averaging
automatic detection type
averaging on/off
external mixer
,
loading from file
query
,
recall
,
resolution BW automatic
,
save
,
signal identification
,
tracking generator output
,
status byte clearing
IEEE command
,
register
status command, using
,
status registers commands
descriptions
operation condition register, description
,
operation condition register, description of bits
,
operation register, description
,
operation register, diagram
,
querying
questionable condition
questionable power register, bit descriptions
,
questionable power register, diagram
,
questionable register, diagram
,
questionable status power register, diagram
,
questionable status power, bit descriptions
,
setting
standard event
using
STB command, description
stimulus response mode
,
stop command
frequency
Stop Freq
,
stop frequency
subdirectories, creating
subdirectories, deleting
subtract display line from trace 2
,
Sweep
,
Sweep Cont Single
sweep control continuous
single
Sweep menu map
sweep output on/off
sweep points, setting number
sweep segments deleting all data
deleting some data
merging data
,
on/off
,
parameters
query
sweep time
,
auto on/off
stimulus response/spectrum analyzer
,
time
,
Sweep Time Auto Man
switch trace 1 and 2
Swp Coupling SR SA
,
Sync Pos Neg key
sync pulse (TV)
synchronization
,
syntax of programming commands
,
system configuration commands
,
display
hardware query
instrument query
options query
System key
,
System menu map
,
T
tab keys
talker (GPIB)
terminations in commands
test limits maximum
,
pass/fail
Test On Off
,
test, IEEE command
,
throughput, improving
time display format
display on/off
,
setting
,
since power-on (milliseconds)
,
since power-on (seconds)
Time (Marker Readout menu)
,
Time/Date
Time/Date On Off
Timebase
,
timebase adjust
Fine, Coarse
426 Index
Index
timebase verification
timing control
Title
,
,
title display
,
trace adding magnitudes
,
averaging type
averaging on/off
blank
clear write
,
commands
copying
data, normalize
,
display
,
exchange data
,
format
,
max hold
mean of amplitudes
min hold
mode
smoothing, number of points
,
smoothing, select
,
storing
,
subtraction
subtraction of display line
transferring data
,
view
,
writing
,
Trace 1 2 3
,
trace register contents
,
trace registers copying contents
,
exchanging contents
trace, loading from file
,
Trace/View menu map
tracking generator attenuation
attenuation, auto on/off
,
calibration
commands
correction offset
,
fixed/swept
,
output on/off
,
output power
,
power level
,
tracking
,
tracking, peak
power sweep
on/off range
,
start amplitude
step auto on/off
step size
,
power sweep range
,
source power offset
,
source power step size
tracking generator functions
Tracking Peak
Trig Delay On Off
Trig key
Trig menu map
,
Trig Type Edge Level
trigger burst level, frequency selectivity
commands
,
external
delay on/off
,
delay value
slope
,
IEEE command
level, gate
,
line
,
measurement
offset
RF burst absolute
level
relative
,
RF burst narrow pulse discriminator
source, video
,
TV field, entire/odd/even
,
video
video, level amplitude
video, level frequency
,
turning off markers
TV field, entire/odd/even
picture monitoring
signal path analyzer/external
,
standby
synchronization, line number
,
video waveform sync. pulse
TV key
TV Monitor key
TV Source key
TV Trig Setup key
Type Upper Lower
,
U
units, setting power
User key
,
user preset
,
user preset, saving
,
user’s reference, using
,
V
VBW/RBW Auto Man
,
Video
video averaging
,
video bandwidth auto on/off
,
couple to resolution bandwidth
,
ratio, auto/manual
ration to resolution bandwidth
,
values, setting
,
Video BW Auto Man video output on/off
,
,
video trigger level amplitude
,
level frequency
source
,
video waveform sync. pulse
View
view
EMI
,
max/min
,
view commands
View/Trace
Viewing Angle
,
W
wait, IEEE command
Y
Y Axis Units key
,
y-axis amplitude scaling
frequency scaling
,
units
Z
Zero Span
,
Zone
Zone Center
Zone On Off
,
Zone Pk Left
Zone Pk Right
Zone Span
,
Zoom
Index 427
Index
428 Index
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project